Hsems PDF

HSE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Doc. No. ONGC/CHSE/1/1/HSEMS March 2016 Page 1 of 289

March 2016
© Oil and Natural Gas Corporation Ltd.
Published By:
Corporate Health Safety and Environment
Oil and Natural Gas Corporation Ltd.
8th floor –SCOPE Minar, Delhi - 110092










SAFETY
CHAPTER - 1
INTRODUCTION
Doc. No. ONGC/CHSE/HSEMS March 2016 Page 14 of 289

SAFETY
Chapter – 1
INTRODUCTION
1. Purpose of HSE Management SystemDocument

The HSE Management System is designed to assist employees in understanding the hazards in oil &
gas field operations and to comply with best safety, health and environmental practices. Each
employee should read this HSE MS document and understand the HSE requirements for his/her area
of work.
2. Objective of HSE Management System Document

To achieve continual improvement in HSE management system of the company through information of
the hazards involved and mitigation measures within his/her area of functioning of all employees.
3. Vision & Mission

3.1. Everybody who works for ONGC is responsible to ensure that all HSE rules, standards and
guidelines are followed to accomplish any task.
3.2. Our Goals are no accident, no harm to people, no damage to environment and no loss to our
physical assets.
3.3. ONGC is committed to assert itself for not only to ensure adherence to the applicable statutory
rules and regulations, but to go beyond such benchmarks also.
3.4. ONGC is committed to help developing and maintaining a “Safety Culture” that would reflect in all
the activities it perform, with the active involvement of all the employees, contractors, stakeholders
and also the community.
3.5. Adhering to the HSE guidelines is mandatory at all levels.
3.6. No work is so important that it can not be done safely.
4. HSE Policy
We are committed to maintain highest standards of occupational health, safety and environmental
protection with effective HSE risks management.
We shall comply with all applicable legislations, codes, standards and requirements to promote
occupational health, safety and environmental protection for sustainable development
We shall always be alert, equipped and ready to respond to emergencies through effective and
updated Emergency Response Plan
We shall take all actions necessary to protect equipment and the integrity of the system to avoid
accidental release of hazardous substances for minimizing environmental pollution
We shall enhance awareness and involvement of all the stake holders in promotion of occupational
health, safety and environment protection
We shall set targets against the international benchmarks, and strive to promote safety culture for
continual improvement
SAFETY
5. Distribution and Use

5.1. Copies of the document shall be made available to: CMD, All Directors, Executive Directors; Group
General Managers. General Managers; Head of sections at each work centre; Managers under
Mines Act/Factories Act., Sectional Heads; Drillers-In-Charges; Officers-In-Charges of production
installations; Officers-In-Charge of Helibase; Safety & Fire Officials.
5.2. The above noted authorities should ensure that every person under their charge receives an
abstract of instructions and that the person fully understands the instructions. Any doubts should
be promptly clarified.
5.3. Copies of the documents should be made available in concerned offices, libraries and important
operational areas for ready reference.
5.4. Copy of the Manual will be hosted on the website of Corporate HSE of ONGC.
6. Updating of Document
6.1. This document will be updated as and when necessary, but at least once in two years by the office
of Chief HSE so that changes necessitated by changes in governmental rules/regulations,
adoption of improved technology and higher standards of Occupational Health & Safety and
Environment are duly incorporated.
6.2. Any person concerned with the subjects covered in this document may suggest changes to
improve the contents. A self-contained note giving the part and section number of the text
proposed to be changed, the suggested change and justification for the same should be sent to
Chief HSE
7.0 Scope
HSE aspectsincluding the procedures to follow of all operations including drilling both offshore &
onshore operations, Work Over operations, Well stimulation operations, well completion & testing
operations, logging operations, logististic operations, marine operations, Aviation operations, well
platform operations, Process Plants operations, Seismic operations, Reservoir opeartions and
other allied operations
8.0 Definitions & Abbreviations (See Appendix)
9.0 Standards, Regulations and References (See Appendix)
1. Standards:
Useful in design, fabrication, installation, layout, operation, inspection, testing and maintenance of
facilities
Regulations:
2. Federal, State, municipal and local established requirements may influence design, fabrication,
installation, layout, operation, inspection, testing and maintenance of facilities.
References:
3. A partial list of references (textbooks, references and technical articles) that have substantial
acceptance by industry and governmental bodies are listed in Appendix

SAFETY
10.0HSE Management Programme Elements and Principles
The programme elements address 14 areas to cover the whole gamut of operations as per API-RP-75
Guidelines with the aim to control and mitigate the potential losses due to accidents/incidents
10.1 The following are the 14 Elements:

Element No. E1– Leadership & Organization
Element No. E2 – HSE Information
Element No. E3 – Hazards Analysis
Element No. E4 – Management Of Change
Element No. E5 – Operating Procedures
Element No. E6 –Safe Work Practices
Element No. E7 – Training
Element No. E8 –Asset Integrity Management( Quality & Integrity of Critical Equipment)
Element No. E9 – Pre-Start Up Review
Element No. E10 – Emergency Response And Control
Element No. E11 – IncidentReporting & Investigation of Incidents
Element No. E12 – Audit/Inspection of SEMP Elements ( Monitoring& Review)
Element No. E13 – Records And Documentation
Element No. E14 – Contractual Safety Management
10.2 Principles
a. Management responsible for overall success of SEMP
b. Management provides leadership to establish goals and performance measures
c. Management designates representatives responsible to report SEMP performance
d. Management develops written SEMP policies and organizational structure with defined
responsibilities
e. Managemet utilizes personnel expertize for hazard identification, environmental impact, safe work
practices, training programmes and incident investigation
f. All stakeholders have own responsibility to protect personnel and the environment

SAFETY
g. Facilities are designed, constructed, operated and maintained as per applicable codes, standards,
accepted practices and compliant with government regulations
h. Management f Safety hazards and environmental impacts integral part of facility
i. Suitable trained personnel are employed
j. Periodic audits to maintain SEMP and ensure effective performance
k. SEMP enhances HSE performance
l. Human factors considered in design and implementation of SEMP

SAFETY
CHAPTER - 2
Leadership & Organization

SAFETY
CHAPTER -2
Leadership & Organization
HSE management is the responsibility of all the employees at various levels of ONGC hierarchy, HSE
functions need to be imbibed in working culture & performed at all levels, both involved in Line & Support
functions, with overall guidance & support from the Top Management.
Accordingly, roles & responsibilities related to HSE Management at various levels is outlined below,
including those of HSE group, Line & Support functions as enumerated in this HSE Management System
Ledership
1 Roles & Responsibilities
HSE Administration
HSE management is the responsibility of all the employees at various levels of ONGC hierarchy. As such,
HSE functions need to be imbibed in working culture & performed at all levels, both involved in Line &
Support functions, with overall guidance & support from the Top Management.
Accordingly, roles & responsibilities related to HSE Management at various levels is outlined below,
including those of HSE group, Line & Support functions as enumerated in this manual
Roles & Responsibilities of Line Managers & other Support services

Asset Manager / Basin Manager / Plant Manager /Chief of Services
Sl. Roles & responsibility Frequency

No. of
Review/Acti
on
1 Ensure Occupational Health, Safety and environment performance of the Asset/ Six monthly
Basin/ Plant/Chief of Services
2 Ensure all L2 officers have HSE KPIs(HSE goals and targets) and these are Quarterly
periodically reviewed
3 Ensure that necessary financial and other provisions and such other steps as may Ongoing
be necessary are taken for compliance with the provisions of applicable legal and
other HSE requirements on priority
4 Ensure that all operations carried on are conducted in accordance with the Ongoing
provisions of the applicable legal and other HSE requirements
5 Provide or promote recognition of exceptional contributions to HSE Six monthly
6 Issue of letter to employees highlighting past performance 4 per/yr

SAFETY
7 HSE tour (Loss control tour) of facilities/ sites 4 per/yr

8 Ensure employee involvement in the QHSE management system Ongoing
9 Discuss HSE issues at relevant forums and meetings Weekly
10 Conduct Safety review meeting / Management Review Meeting Six monthly
11 Disseminate Rules of Safety to staff and contractors As required
12 Ensure all L2 officers have HSE roles and accountabilities Once
13 Ensure annual appraisal process is undertaken with HSE performance Once /yr.
14 Discuss progress for HSE implementation with Managers Six monthly
15 Ensure reporting of accidents as per procedure As required
16 Review incident reports and ensure lessons learned are applied Ongoing
Review all audit recommendations and ensure their compliance Ongoing
17 Reinforce HSE Policy with employees and contractors Ongoing
18 Ensure open and effective communications between the community and As required
stakeholders
19 Ensure compliance to statutory & legislative requirements Ongoing
20 Act as Chief Emergency coordinator As required
21 Participate in major mock drills Six monthly
Ensure that Installation has all valid consents & approvals As required
Constitute investigation teams for Major /Minor accidents As required
Plant Operations Manager / Surface Manager / HDS / HWS / HLS / HES / Support Manager /
Party Chiefs / Sub Surface Manager / Head Marine & Air Logistics / Head Info-com
Sl. Activity Frequency

No.
1 Ensure Occupational Health, Safety and environment performance Six monthly
2 Ensure communication of Management System to personnel and contractors Annually
3 Establish performance HSE contracts Annually
4 Ensure direct reports have performance HSE KPIs and these are periodically Twice per/yr
reviewed
5 Ensure that necessary financial and other provisions and such other steps as may Ongoing
be necessary are taken for compliance with the provisions of applicable legal and
other HSE requirements on priority
6 Ensure that all operations carried on are conducted in accordance with the Ongoing
provisions of the applicable legal and other HSE requirements
7 Provide or promote recognition of exceptional contributions to HSE As required
Manage the QHSE Management Programme Ongoing
9 Ensure HSE Policy is included in induction of new employees & contractors and As required
that they understand their HSE responsibilities
10 HSE tour (Loss control tours) of work units Four per/yr.
11 Actively promote employee involvement in the QHSE management system through Twice per/yr
awareness & trainings
12 Raise HSE issues at relevant forums and meetings As required

SAFETY
13 Ensure QHSE management system is implemented against a defined plan Ongoing

14 Disseminate Rules of Safety to employees and contractors As required
15 Ensure direct reports have HSE roles and accountabilities Once per/yr
16 Ensure annual review of the QHSE management manual Once per/yr
17 Ensure Safe operating procedures and practices are developed and applied Ongoing
18 Develop annual HSE plan of work in conjunction with the management team Once per/yr
21 Review incident reports and ensure lessons learned (safety alerts) are applied on Ongoing
all work units
22 Reinforce HSE Policy with staff and contractors Ongoing
23 Support employees HSE training needs Ongoing
24 Ensure communication of HSE objectives to employees and contractors‟ personnel Annually
25 Approve/agree bridging documents with contractors As required
26 Ensure HSE Review of Major / minor modifications are undertaken and MOC As required
documents are developed.
27 Ensure adequate standards, procedures, systems and interface documents exist As required
28 Ensure Operations and HSE personnel are fully integrated As required
29 Ensure clear operating responsibilities and adequate manning exists Twice per/yr
30 Approve MOC procedure including by-pass As per
requirement
31 Setup Safety review & Process Hazard Analysis committee Once
32 Ensure PTW system is operated as intended Annually
33 Carry out review of current and completed modifications Annually
34 Review MOC Procedure (combine with 30) Annually
35 Ensure documentation, drawings etc. are clearly identifiable and readily accessible Annually
36 Review operating procedures, permits, regulations etc. Annually
37 Review emergency procedures Annually
38 Participate in establishing measurable HSE goals and targets Annually
39 Review HSE performance against goals Four per/yr
40 Conduct Management Review Meetings Twice per/yr
41 Initiate QHSE internal audits As required
42 Implement and Maintain the Operations Assurance Process Ongoing
43 Review all audit recommendations and ensure their compliance Ongoing
As required
Ensure timely inputs for submission of Annual/quarterly returns to the statutory authorities As required
Ensure procurement/ provisioning of the HSE equipment, life saving appliances & monitor
its up-keep, testing & maintenance.

SAFETY
Surface Area Manager / Location Manager / Plant Operation Area Manager

No.
1 Ensure communication of QHSE Management System to personnel and Annually
contractors
2 Fulfil the role of Management Representative / Management Appointee as Ongoing
applicable
3 Establish QHSE objectives & targets Annually
4 Ensure direct reports have performance HSE contracts and these are periodically Twice per/yr
reviewed
5 Ensure safe and proper working of the operations by exercising supervision, control Ongoing
and direction to ensure that all work is carried out in accordance with the applicable
legal and other HSE requirements
6 Ensure sufficient supply of proper materials and appliances for carrying out the Ongoing
provisions of the applicable legal and other HSE requirements for ensuring the
safety of the work units and persons employed therein.
7 Appoint competent persons and assign them specific duties to ensure that they Ongoing
understand and carry out the provisions of the applicable legal and other HSE
requirements.
8 Maintain record of the findings of each of his inspections and the action taken by Ongoing
him to rectify the defects mentioned, if any.
9 Identify operations of hazardous nature and frame safe work practices to be Ongoing
followed by persons engaged in the operation. Such safe work practices shall be
consistent with the applicable legal and other HSE requirements.
11 Ensure HSE Policy is clearly and prominently displayed Annual
12 Ensure HSE Policy is included in induction of new employee & contractor and that As required
they understand their HSE responsibilities
13 Carry out HSE inspections (Loss control tours) of facility As Per
schedule
14 Actively promote employee involvement in the QHSE management system Twice per/yr
15 Raise HSE issues at relevant forums and meetings Monthly
16 Ensure QHSE Management system is implemented and sustained Ongoing
17 Develop HSE plan of work in conjunction with the management team Once per/yr
19 Review incident reports and ensure lessons learned (safety alerts) are applied on Ongoing
all work units
20 Ensure Hazop analysis/ QRA remains valid Ongoing
21 Ensure all hazards are identified for ongoing operations Annually
22 Implementation of the Work Control System Ongoing

SAFETY
23 Ensure operations teams understand the hazards and mitigation measures in place Ongoing
24 Develop schedule of planned inspections for the facility Annually
25 Conduct review of outstanding actions Monthly
26 Ensure risk assessments carried out are conducted by competent persons and Ongoing
reviewed prior to use
28 Support staffs HSE training needs Ongoing
29 Carry out performance reviews with direct reports Twice per/yr
30 Ensure communication of HSE objectives to staff and contractors‟ personnel Annually
31 Review training database to ensure refresher training is up to date Annually
32 Ensure all new direct reports receive a satisfactory induction As required
33 Ensure that work undertaken by contractors and Vendors is adequately supervised As required
34 Feedback of Contractor/Vendor Performance As required
35 Arrange Contractor meeting when possible As required
36 Ensure clear operating responsibilities and adequate manning exists Twice per/yr
37 Ensure adequate operating and maintenance procedures exist and these are Annually
regularly reviewed and updated as necessary
38 Ensure operating basis and systems remain valid and in place Annually
39 Ensure PTW system is operated as intended Annually
40 Develop schedule of PTW, isolations and staff handover procedures Annually
41 Procedures are developed and periodically reviewed for the removal of plant and Ongoing
equipment from service
42 Ensure all protective devices are identified, and regularly used Ongoing
43 Monitor of overdue maintenance items Ongoing
44 Ensure SIMOPs procedures remain valid Ongoing
45 Ensure any uncontrolled release to the environment is investigated and reported Ongoing
46 Provide adequate procedures for the storage, handling and use and disposal of Ongoing
hazardous substances
47 Appoint a responsible person(non-HSE)for Waste management Once
48 Periodic update of security measures at the facility Annually
49 Ensuring all modifications and changes on the facilities are implemented under the Ongoing
MOC system
50 Control installation/hook-up/decommissioning of temporary equipment Ongoing
51 Control site work packages As required
52 Review installation manning levels Annually
54 Ensure operating procedures, standing instructions etc, are current and periodically Ongoing
reviewed
55 Ensure adequate and where necessary written daily handover occurs between Ongoing
shifts
56 Ensure obsolete documentation is removed from the facilities
stakeholders
SAFETY
58 Review emergency procedures and ensure project response procedures remain Annually
valid
59 Act as member of Emergency Control Team Ongoing
60 Ensure personnel are aware/familiar with emergency procedures Ongoing
61 Share lessons learned with peers, staff, contractors etc. As required
64 Initiate internal audits As required
65 Participate in the Operations Assurance Process Ongoing
Maintenance Manager

No.
1 Ensure proper installation, maintenance and safe working of machinery Ongoing
2 Ensure that when any machinery is shifted or newly installed, it is given a trial run As required
before it is put into use
3 Ensure that the provisions of the applicable legal and other requirements relating to Ongoing
installation, operation, maintenance and examination of machinery are properly
carried out by subordinate officials, competent persons and employees as the case
may be, appointed for the purpose
4 Ensure equipment has necessary approvals as per statutory requirements As required
6 Establish personal HSE objectives/contract Annually
7 Ensure direct reports have personal HSE contracts and these are periodically Twice per/yr
reviewed
9 Ensure HSE Policy is included in induction of new staff and that they understand As required
their HSE responsibilities
11 Actively promote employee involvement in the management system Twice per/yr
13 Ensure management system is implemented against a defined plan Ongoing
15 As Element Leader carry out review of element 4 Annually
16 Carry out HSE tours 6 Monthly
17 Participate in risk assessments As required
19 Review/approve deviations from codes/standards/specs. As required
20 Approve plant/process trials through MOC Procedure As required
21 Evaluate effectiveness of inspection/maintenance Annually
22 Establish codes, standards and specifications for maintenance/inspection As required
23 Establish programme for structural inspection (L2) Annually
24 Establish pipeline inspection schemes and inspection programmes (L2) Annually

SAFETY
25 Ensure maintenance and inspections records are maintained Ongoing

26 Review Technical Integrity Management process Annually
27 Manage the Management of change (MOC) Process Ongoing
28 Control minor modifications As required
29 Review excursions above design rates As required
36 Participate in the Operations Assurance Process Ongoing
Ensure timely calibration and Maintaintenance of monitoring equipment& Ongoing
maintaintenance of records
 Onshore / Offshore Installation Manager / Drilling In-charge / Process Unit I/C for Plants
Activity Frequency
1 Ensure that all work is carried out in accordance with the provisions of the legal and Ongoing
other HSE requirements.
2 Ensure that Installation has all valid consents & approvals As required
3 He shall visit and examine the installations under his charge to see that safety in Ongoing
every respect is ensured
4 He shall maintain a detailed record of the results of each of his inspections and the Ongoing
action taken by him to rectify the defects noticed, if any
5 Ensure that all persons employed at the installation are thoroughly aware and Ongoing
familiar with the provisions of the legal and other HSE requirements, safe work
practices and emergency plan
6 Ensure that the operation and maintenance are properly carried out by competent Ongoing
person declared for the purpose
8 Establish personal HSE objectives/contract Annually
9 Ensure direct reports have personal HSE contracts and these are periodically Twice per/yr
reviewed
11 Ensure HSE Policy is included in induction of new staff and that they understand As required
their HSE responsibilities
12 Actively promote employee involvement in the management system Twice per/yr
14 Ensure management system is implemented against a defined plan Ongoing
15 Ensure direct reports have roles and accountabilities clearly defined in their job Once per/yr
descriptions/roles and responsibilities

SAFETY
16 Ensure annual review of the management manual Once per/yr

17 Ensure procedures and practices from this manual are developed and applied Ongoing
18 Participate in risk assessments As required
19 Work with Procurement cell to ensure operational needs are met Ongoing
20 Review/approve deviations from codes/standards/specs. As required
21 Approve plant/process trials through MOC Procedure As required
22 Establish codes, standards and specifications As required
23 Maintain Subsea flowline and riser integrity As required
24 Share lessons learned with employees, contractors etc. As required
27 Participate in Safety Committee Meetings & MRMs Monthly
28 Participate in MRMs Six monthly
29 Conduct site level safety meetings Monthly
30 Ensure QHSE internal audits are carried out Six monthly
31 Ensure reporting of incidents as per procedure As required
32 Conduct preliminary incident enquiry as per procedure
33 Discuss incidents and lessons learned in Safety Meetings Weekly
34 Ensure employees are provided HSE training as per training need analysis Ongoing
35 Ensure compliance with PPE standards and procedures As required
36 Conduct job orientation/induction for new arrivals As Required
37 Ensure appropriate risk assessments are in place for contractors and vendors As Required
38 Ensure procedures exist and are used for all operations Annually
39 Ensure PTW and isolations and handover systems are being followed as per Ongoing
procedures
40 Ensure clear and comprehensive handover occurs Daily/Monthly
41 Ensure maintenance schedules are completed As required
42 Calibrate and Maintain monitoring equipment wherever applicable As required
43 Maintain records of calibration and maintenance of monitoring equipment As required
44 Implement the MOC Procedure As required
45 Maintain the Daily Operations Report Daily
Project Managers (Engineering Services)

No.
1 Ensure communication of HSE requirements to contractors Annually
2 Ensure proper installation, maintenance and safe working of machinery Ongoing
3 Ensure that when any machinery is newly installed, it is given a trial run before it is As required
put into use

SAFETY
4 Ensure that the provisions of the applicable legal and other requirements relating to As required
installation, operation, maintenance and examination of machinery are properly
carried out by subordinate officials, competent persons and employees as the case
may be, appointed for the purpose
5 Ensure that necessary approvals are taken for the total Project as per statutory As required
requirements
6 Actively promote employee involvement in the HSE management system Twice per/yr
7 Raise HSE issues at relevant forums and meetings Weekly
8 Review incident reports and ensure lessons learned are applied Ongoing
9 Ensure risk assessment techniques are used effectively and referenced in project Ongoing
documentation
11 Ensure communication of HSE objectives to employees and contractors‟ personnel Annually
12 Ensure bridge document is prepared to integrate contractors management system As required
13 Ensure EIA is completed or amended as applicable in time Once
14 Ensure systems are in place to apply best pollution control technology Ongoing
15 Ensure adequate standards, procedures, systems and interface documents exist As required
16 Develop Project HSE Plan Annually
17 Ensure project is designed, constructed and commissioned to recognised and As required
accepted standards
18 Ensure clear project responsibilities and adequate manning exists Twice per/yr
19 Responsible for utilising appropriate risk assessment techniques As required
20 Control deviations from design Ongoing
21 Ensure applicable regulations and other HSE requirements are met or exceeded Ongoing
22 Produce Major Hazard document prior to commissioning Once
23 Ensure training of Operations personnel is incorporated into the pre operations plan Ongoing
24 Review Project MOC Procedure Annually
26 Monitor document control system Annually
27 Review project procedures, permits, regulations etc. Annually
28 Ensure documentation provided by Projects fully meets the expectations As required
stakeholders
30 Review emergency procedures Annually
31 Share lessons learned with employees, contractors etc. As required
34 Initiate unscheduled internal audits/ inspections As required
Carry out audits of the ongoing project activities Quarterly

SAFETY
I/c HR-ER at Asset / Basin / Plant

No.
1 Ensure timely procurement of Personal Protective Equipment Annually
2 Ensure training need analysis of employees as per job requirement Annually
3 Establish/ maintain training programme Ongoing
4 Resource training requirements Ongoing
5 Review training course appraisals Ongoing
6 Ensure training records are updated in database Ongoing
7 Arrange Medicals for employees Ongoing
8 Manage Employee Assistance Programme Ongoing
9 Ensure welfare of employees working during emergency As required
Medical Officer

No.
1 Provide 24 hour medical coverage Ongoing
2 Ensure first aid facilities meet statutory requirements/equipment in good, clean Ongoing
order
3 Record offshore medical consultations As required
4 Monitor employees‟ health and potential health hazards Ongoing
5 Ensure PME of all employees & contractual workers are carried out and maintain Ongoing
the records
6 Carry out hygiene surveys Weekly
7 Monitor condition of potable water Monthly
8 Conduct and review occupational health surveys Yearly
9 Conduct First Aid training and refresher training (in-house or outside) Ongoing
10 Maintain register of First Aiders Ongoing
11 Develop health and wellness programmes Annually
12 On-site first aid training of Medical Response teams and others Weekly
13 Participate in annual review of Emergency Response Plans Annual
Roles & Responsibilities of HSE Group

Chief HSE
No.
1. Formulating policies & plans on HSE management & ensure implementation
2. Monitoring of HSE performance of all Assets, Basins, Plants, Services & other work
centres
3. Achieving HSE parameters in MOU with MoPNG
SAFETY
4. Monitoring of compliance of all Legal & other requirements related to HSE

performance
5. Promoting and Creating awareness and competency building through training,
seminar & workshops on emerging HSE issues
6. Liaison with statutory, regulatory & other bodies on the matters related to HSE
Management
7. Investigation of fatal & major incidents and monitoring of compliance of
recommendations
8. Preparation and distribution of Manuals on HSE Management
9. Promoting & Facilitating QHSE certification of work centres & installations
10. Maintaining database on key performance indicators of HSE
11. Facilitation for preparation of DMP & ERP
Head Offshore Safety

No.
1. Head HSE Offshore operations to function as an extended arm of Chief HSE for overseeing Ongoing
HSE management related to all offshore operations of Western &Eastern offshore
includingWestern Offshore Basin, Uran Plant, Hazira Plant, Nhava Supply base, Engineering
Services, Logistics (Air & Marine), IEOT & IOGPT.
2. MonitorOccupational Health, Safety and environment performance of all above work units. Ongoing
3. Provide or promote recognition of exceptional contributions to HSE Six monthly
4. Raise HSE issues at relevant forums and meetings As required
5. Ensure employee involvement in the QHSE management system Ongoing
6. Develop annual HSE plan of work including goals and targets in conjunction with the Annual
management team
7. Review HSE performance against goals Quarterly
8. Review contractors interface system ( Bridge document ) As required
9. Review compliance of legal and other HSE requirements Quarterly
10. Advise for implementation of changes in legal and other HSE requirements As required
11. HSE auditing of all above work units ( As per MOU ) Ongoing
12. Standardization of HSE equipment for offshore operations and Plants As required
13. Monitor audits and compliance to observations of OISD and other Third Party. Quarterly
14. Up-gradation of HSE Standards for offshore and plants (Practices, facilities) through Ongoing
awareness.
15. Facilitate to obtain environmental clearance from MoEF and consent from MPCB. As required
16. MonitoringOil Spill Management ensuring response capability, updation of oil spill response As required
contingency plan and monitoring drills and exercises
17. Investigation/ analysis of Incidents and issue of safety alerts As required
18. Nodal officer between OISD & ONGC for offshore operations with regard to statutory Ongoing
requirement.
19. Nodal officer for Emergency Response / Crisis management / Disaster Management related to As required
offshore Operations and plant.
20. Monitoringsafety of sub-sea pipelines, integrity & transportation. Ongoing
21. Provide inputs and assist in the development / revision / updating of Safe operating Procedures, As required
Code of practices, Standard Operating procedures
22. Carry out liaisoning with statutory and other external agencies and auditors As required

SAFETY
I/C Sectoral HSE-Onshore

No.
1. Carry out HSE audits of Assets / basins thro‟ Multi Disciplinary Team ( As per MOU ) Ongoing
Head HSE - Asset / Basin / Plant

No.
1. Oversee HSE management related to all operations under that Asset/ Basin. Ongoing
2. MonitorOccupational Health, Safety and environment performance of the Asset/ Basin Ongoing
3. Provide or promote recognition of exceptional contributions to HSE Six Monthly
5. Developemployee involvement in the QHSE management system Ongoing
6. Develop annual HSE plan of work including goals & targets in conjunction with the management Annual
team
8. Review contractors interface system ( Bridge document ) As required
9. Review compliance of legal and other HSE requirements Quarterly
11. Facilitate to obtain environmental clearance from MoEF and consent from SPCB. As required
12. Providing intellectual support (training, guidance etc.) for accreditation of work units As required
13. To Undertake QHSE/ HSE audits/ inspections of installations, rigs & facilities. Ongoing
14. Monitoring and implementation of QHSE/ HSE audit/ inspection observations ( Int & Ext) Quarterly
15. Coordination with DGMS, OISD, SPCB, Accreditation agency As required
16. Provide inputs and assist in the development/revision/updating of Safe operating Procedures. As required
17. Facilitate studies in HSE mgt. (In-house or thro‟ out-side agency) As required
18. Undertake incident enquiries and analysis, issue reports & alerts. As required
19. Facilitate in monitoring ambient air, water/effluent quality, sewage disposal & noise pollution. As required
20. Monitor implementation of tree plantation / Greening programme. Quarterly
21. Prepare and update contingency plan/ DMP as per guidelines. Annual
22. Monitor upkeep of Oil Spill Response Equipment and facilities. Quarterly
23. Monitor mock-drills & emergency preparedness Ongoing
24. Annual/quarterly returns to the statutory authorities & maintain liaison Quarterly
25. Maintain HSE database pertaining to the Asset / Basin/Plant. Ongoing
26. Monitor PME of employees Quarterly
27. Head HSE, Basin to oversee Safety in explosives / radioactive substances storage, Ongoing
transportation and usage, Geophysical operations & labs
I/C HSE - Drilling Services / Well Services/ Surface

No.
1. Oversee HSE management related to all operations under that service Ongoing
2. Inspect, as often as may be necessary, the work units with a view to identify the dangers which Ongoing
may cause bodily injury or impair health of any person.
3. Advise on the measures necessary to prevent dangerous situations. As required
4. Ensure reporting of incidents as per procedure. As required
5. Investigate into the circumstances and causes of incidents and advise on measures necessary As required
to prevent recurrence of such incidents.
SAFETY
6. Analyse incident data with a view to promote safe practices and improvement of working Annual
environment.
7. Promote safety awareness amongst persons employed in the mine. Ongoing
8. Ensure all new employees and those transferred to new jobs receive adequate HSE training. As required
9. Ensure Occupational Health, Safety and environment performance of the service Ongoing
10. Facilitate in implementation & sustenance of QHSE accreditation. Ongoing
11. Coordinate conducting of QHSE internal audit & MRM As required
13. Developemployee involvement in the QHSE management system Ongoing
14. Monitorcompliance of legal and other HSE requirements Quarterly
16. Coordination with DGMS, OISD, SPCB, Accreditation agency As required
17. Establish measurable HSE goals and targets Annual
19. Periodic Inspection and certification of Rig and installation based safety devices Viz. Crown-o- Ongoing
matic / floor-o-matic (twin stop safety device), top man escape device, BOPs, guy rope
anchoring, mud volume totaliser, shale shaker gas detection alarm etc.
20. Carry out Surprise blow out drills and emergency drills. Six monthly
21. Surprise HSE inspection of rigs/installations (Usage of personal protective equipments and monthly
derrick floor safety devices etc.).
22. Co-ordination with Crisis Management Team As required
23. Monitorimplement mandatory trainings and to maintain records Ongoing
24. Maintain HSE Data base of Rigs/Installations Ongoing
HSE officer of Installation / Platform / Rig

No.
Fulfill Role of HSE Manager as per statutory requrements
1. Responsible for sustaining QHSE management system at the facility Ongoing
2. Supervision of HSE during routine and non-routine operations Ongoing
3. Ensure implementation of HSE observations and guidelines. Ongoing
4. Keep self abreast with latest applicable legal & other QHSE requirements As required
5. Maintain and keep records including reporting thereof. Ongoing
6. Carry out all HSE drills and record observations of the drills. Monthly
7. Identify the hazards which may cause bodily injury or impair health of any person & take Ongoing
suitable necessary action.
8. Promote safety awareness amongst persons employed in the mine. Monthly
9. Ensure that all new workers and workers transferred to new jobs receive adequate HSE As required
training.
HSE officer Logging Services

No.
1. Authorization for transportation & Handling of Radioactive equipments and explosives. As required
2. Inspection and certification of wire line lubricators, Wire line BOPs and pack off system. As required
3. Inspection and certification of wire line unit (Including certification of explosives arming / firing As required
system etc.)
4. Training of personnel on radioactive substances handling and ensuring the same in the field. Quarterly

SAFETY
5. Ensure and improve hygiene standard of Field parties, occupational health & safety. On going
6. Safety of Explosive Magazines. On going
I/C HSE - Engineering Services

No.
1. Implement HSE management in onshore and offshore facilities & pipeline projects under On going
construction; which includes construction and maintenance of trunk pipelines and pipeline
components.
2. Maintain pipe line and corrosion protection system data base. Ongoing
3. Undertake HSE management of turnkey projects till its completion. If the turn key construction As required
/ modification job is to be executed in the premises of existing operating facility, then the HSE
management of the job has to be conducted in co-ordination with the HSE management of
existing facility (Eg : HSE in simultaneous operation )
4. Provide advice on HSE elements during conceptual, feasibility report and in the final bid As required
document preparation.
5. Should be familiar with the requirements of contractor safety management. On going
I/c HSE Institutes

No.
1. Provide and improve HSE management of institute facilities Viz. Laboratories, libraries and Ongoing
storage areas.
2. Carry out frequent awareness programmes on HSE matters of the institute. Quarterly
3. Perform periodic HSE audits of the institute. Six monthly
4. Undertake accident / incident enquiry, issue reports & the alerts. As required
5. Fire Safety Management Ongoing
6. Ensure the emergency preparedness in the institute. Quarterly
I/C HSE - Central Workshop

No.
1. HSE related matters and to facilitate implementation Ongoing
2. Testing & maintenance of LSA and HSE related eqpt. As required
3. HSE inspections of Central W/Shop & facilities. Six monthly
4. HSE management system implementation Ongoing
5. Undertake accident / incident enquiry, issue reports & the alerts. As required
6. Prepare and issue contingency plan. Annual
7. Data on solid wastes, construction wastes, used fuels and its disposal. Annual
8. Fire safety management Ongoing
9. Undertake mock drills and emergency preparedness. Quarterly
I/C HSE - Central Stores

No.
1. HSE management of stores. Ongoing
SAFETY
2. Safety in storage and handling of heavy equipments and spares Ongoing

3. Safety in storage and handling hazardous and inflammable materials. Ongoing
4. Emergency preparedness. Ongoing
5. Ensure upkeep of premises. Ongoing
Reporting Matrix of HSE officers

Reporting relationship amongst different HSE setup are as under:
Sl. HSE setup Administrative Functional reporting

No. Reporting
1. Chief HSE- Corp Director I/C HSE Director I/c HSE
2. Head Offshore Safety Chief HSE- Corp Chief HSE- Corp
3. Head Asset /Basin/ Plant HSE Asset /Basin / Plant Chief HSE- Corp
Manager
4. HSE Manager-offshore OIM/ Tool Pusher Head HSE- Surface/ Drilling
Platform / Rig Services
5. HSE-Mumbai, services
I/c HSE, DS, Mumbai Head DS, Mumbai
I/c HSE, ES, Mumbai Head ES, Mumbai
I/c HSE, Logging Services, Head Logging Services,
Mumbai Mumbai
I/c HSE, Well Services, Mumbai Head, Well services, Chief HSE- Corp
I/c HSE, Offshore Logistics Mumbai
Head offshore Logistics
6. I/c HSE DS (Onshore Assets) Head DS-Asset Head HSE- Asset
7. I/c HSE, Surface Group (Onshore Surface Manager-Asset Head HSE - Asset
Assets)
8. I/c HSE - Well Services Head Well Services in Head HSE – Asset
(Onshore Assets) Assets
9. I/c HSE - Logging Services Head Logging Services in Head HSE – Asset / Basin
(Onshore Assets) Assets/ Basins
10. I/c HSE –Geophy. Services Head Geophysical Head HSE – Basin
Services
11. I/c Sectoral HSE Chief HSE- Corp Chief HSE- Corp

SAFETY
Organization Organogram of HSE Setup (Onshore)

Board of Directors
CMD
Director HSE
Chief HSE

Head Safety Head Environment Head O/H
Sectoral HSE, Kolkata

I/C Env. I/C Safety
Sectoral HSE, Baroda
Sectoral HSE, Chennai

Sectoral HSE,
Dehradun
AM/BM/PM/COS (Mines Agent)
Head of Services (Mines Manager)

Head HSE of Asset/Basin/Plant
OIM/IM/DIC
I/C HSE – OF Concerned services
Safety Officer at Installation

Functional Reporting
Administrative Reporting
SAFETY
Organogram of HSE Setup (Offshore)

Board of Directors
CMD
Director HSE
Chief HSE

Head Safety Head Environment Head O/H
Sectoral HSE, Kolkata

I/C Env I/C Safety
Sectoral HSE, Baroda
Sectoral HSE, Chennai

Sectoral HSE,
Dehradun
AM/BM/PM/COS /HOS
OIM/IM/DIC
Head HSE of Asset/Basin/Plant
Safety Officer at Installation

Functional Reporting
Administrative Reporting
SAFETY
Chapter – 3
HSE INFORMATION

HSE INFORMATION
SAFETY
Chapter – 3
HSE INFORMATION
GENERAL The management program should require that a compilation of safety and
environmental information be developed and maintained for any facility
subject to this RP.
PROCESS DESIGN
INFORMATION
The process design info should include, as appropriate, a simplified process
flow diagram and acceptable upper and lower limits, where applicable, for
items such as temperature, pressure, flow and composition. (see API RP
14J, which on a MODU is only applicable to a production processing system)
Where original process design info is no longer existent, info may be
developed via a hazard analysis in sufficient detail to support the analysis.
MECHANICAL & FACILITIES
DESIGN INFORMATION
The mechanical design info should include, as appropriate, piping and
instrument diagrams, electrical area classifications, equipment arrangement
drawings, design basis of the relief system, description of the alarm,
shutdown, and interlock systems, description of the well control systems,
and design basis and active fire protection features and systems and
emergency evacuation procedures.
The mechanical and design info for MODUs should conform to the
applicable requirements of the flag State and Class Society.
The mechanical and design info should be consistent with applicable
consensus codes and standards in effect at the time of design.
When original mechanical design info is no longer existent, suitability of
equipment design for intended use should be verified and documented
based on engineering analysis and prior operating experience.
Design and installation of new facilities and major modifications should
include consideration of human factors.

HSE INFORMATION
SAFETY
Chapter – 3
HSE INFORMATION
1. Objective:
For evaluating and monitoring the effectiveness of HSE implementation, an Information System is of
utmost importance which will be handy and useful to the management in achieving the ultimate goal of
accident prevention and disaster mitigation/ management. In this system element, it is important to give
an insight as to what are all the information that are needed for a successful Health, Safety and
Environment Management in various ONGC operations, not only from the point of view of
management decision making, but for the purpose of internal and external HSE audits also.
2. Information Requirement:
It is now evident that a well laid-down HSE information system provides the basis of HSE Management
and must be considered as the key element for effective administration of HSE related issues in
operation. As such, the minimum applicable HSE information shall include the following and shall be
maintained at each installation. Certain general information is common to all activities, whereas few
specifics are included depending on the type of activities being performed:
2.1. Common Information
2.1.1. General
 QHSE manuals including policy, objectives, procedures, risk register, aspect register & legal
register
 Statutory licenses/ Consents/ clearences(e.g. from factory Inspectorate/ DGMS, OISD,
MOEF,CCOE etc.,)
 Quarterly & annual returns (only for installations under Mines Act).
 Safety committee & Management review meeting record
 Statutory appointments including competent persons, OIM, HSE Manager
 All audit & inspection reports (internal & external) with compliance.
 All MOC documents
2.1.2. Accident/ Incident/ Non-conformity Data
 Past Accident/ Incident / Near Miss Records

 Investigation Records with corrective/ preventive actions (recommendations)
 Action Taken Report (ATR)
 Analysis & Lessons learnt system

HSE INFORMATION
SAFETY
2.2. Process Equipment Related
 Equipment Layout
 OEM manuals
 History sheets/cards/log books
 Design basis for passive and active fire protection
 Emergency evacuation procedure
 NDT records
 Hydro test Records by competent persons
 Calibration records of PSVs and other instruments
 Testing records of Lifting tools & Tackles by competent persons
 Where original Mechanical Design Information is not available, suitability of equipment design
for intended use should be verified and documented.
 Breathing Air compressor maintenance and fit-for purpose test records.
 Crane load test certificates
2.3. Hazard Analysis
 Risk identified in Risk Register

 Hazop & QRA reports
 Implementation status of the recommendations
2.4. Operation and maintenance
 Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs)

 OEM maintenance manual
 Safe work practices (SWP) & Associated Records
 Permit to Work (PTW) procedures
 Management of Change (MOC) procedures
 Shift changeover procedures
 Job Safety Analysis (JSA) procedures
 Simultaneous Operations (SIMOPS) procedures,
 Marine operations procedures
 Air operations procedures
 Tool Box Talk (TBT)/ Floor level talks etc
 Maintenance schedule for rotating and static equipment
 Equipment Maintenance documents including history of maintenance
 List of insurance spares with stock
2.5. Electrical Systems
 Hazardous Area Classification (HAC) Drawings

 Electrical Single Line Diagram and control drawing
 Integrity of earthing System and its documentation
 Insulation Resistance measurement document

HSE INFORMATION
SAFETY
 Relay set point and their calibration documentation

 Design basis of lightning arresters, if any.
 Explosion proof certificates for equipments and maintenance records
 Obstruction lighting details
 Emergency plant shut down procedures
2.6. Fire Protection and Safety Equipment
 Layout drawing for fixed fire equipments/systems.

 Layout of Fire & Gas detection & suppression system.
 Placement details for portable fire equipments including hose reel locations.
 Placement details of Life saving equipments (e.g. Breathing sets, escape masks etc.)
 Periodic inspection, maintenance and testing records
 Placement details of EPIRB / SART etc.
2.7. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)
MSDS for all chemicals must be made available in English & Local Language and the minimum
information to include are:
 Toxicity
 Permissible exposure limits
 Physical Data
 Reactivity data
 Corrosivity data
 Thermal and Chemical stability data
 Incompatibility data
 Treatment procedure in case of body contact
2.8. Environment information
 Resources consumption records e.g. water, electricity etc.

 Chemical consumption records
 Spill Records
 Energy records (Diesel, Power, Gas etc.)
 Statutory clearances (e.g. Air/water consents, hazardous waste authorization, Cess payment
data, cost of pollution abatement and control etc.)
 Air & Stack monitoring
 Effluent test record
 Disposal records
 EIA reports, if carried out
 Environment Clearance & compliance
 Environment statements

HSE INFORMATION
SAFETY
2.9. Training Records
 Training Need Matrix

 Induction training / Orientation training
 Mandatory HSE trainings (QHSE Requirements, Chemical Safety, Emergency Plans &
Procedures, Use Of General & Specified Ppes, Sea Survival, HUET, H2S, First Aid, MVT, Fire
Fighting etc.)
 Specialized Training Record like well control, equipment operation, crane operation, material
handling etc.
 Records of Training Feedback & Analysis
2.10. Occupational Health & Hygiene Information
 Occupational health & Hygiene Survey Reports:

o Noise
o Vibration
o Illumination
o Radiation (wherever applicable)
o Suspended particles in air measurement
 Job Observation Report
 Wall to wall walkthrough summary reports and recommendation reports.
 Periodical Medical Examination (PME) records –
o Form „O‟ under Mines Act.
o Health Register under Factories Act.
o PME Analysis, recommendations and follow up
 First-aid reports
 Ergonomic survey reports
 Catering Reports:
o Potability report (for water)
o Health Status report of Catering Staff.
2.11. Emergency Management Information
 Disaster Management Plan (DMP), Regional Contingency Plan (RCP)& Corporate Disaster
Management Plan (CDMP)
 Emergency Response plan (ERP) – specific to the installations/ rigs
 Fire drill records
 On & Offsite DMP Mock-drill records/table top exercises
 Action Taken Reports (ATRs) / Lessons learnt database

SAFETY
Chapter – 4
HAZARD ANALYSIS

SAFETY
Chapter – 4
HAZARD ANALYSIS /RISK ASSESSMENT SYSTEM
APPLICATION The management program should require that a hazard
analysis be performed for any facility subject to this RP.
METHODOL-OGY
Hazard analysis should take an orderly, systemic approach,
following one or more methodologies such as those
recommended in API RP 14J .
Hazards Analysis for MODUs
a. For most MODUs this is implicit in the Flag State and
Classification Society certification process.
b. It may be necessary to perform site-specific hazard
analysis for certain operations to assure the MODU is not
exposed to condition beyond its designed limits.
INITIAL ANALYSIS
The hazard analysis should be performed in order of
priority:
a. Areas with continuous offshore population
b. Inventory and flow rate of flammable, toxic or other
materials that constitute a safety hazard or environmental
impact
c. Locations involving simultaneous operations
d. Facilities that remove natural gas or handle H2S
e. Facilities with severe operating conditions (i.e. high
pressure, highly corrosive fluids, high flow rates, etc)
f. Facilities in close proximity to environmentally sensitive
areas.
Hazard analysis on new or modified facilities should be

given special consideration.
PERIODIC ANALYSIS Management should establish a program for updating
hazard analyses

SAFETY
Chapter – 4
HAZARD ANALYSIS /RISK ASSESSMENT SYSTEM
1. Introduction
In every walk of life including operations in industry there are always chances of undesirable events
taking place. The basic cause of these undesirable events is the hazards which are either inherently
present or created by mankind. Risk is the consequence of a hazard in the event of an incident. This is
a combination of likelihood and severity of the event and can be rated at different levels.
2. Objective
In carrying out any activity it is impossible to eliminate all hazards and bring the level of the risk to zero.
Hence the endeavor always is to bring the level of the risk to acceptable levels through implementation
of certain measures called risk control measures.
The objective of this section is to outline the concept of Risk Management through identification of the
Hazards and the associated Risks, assessment of the Risks and mitigation of the Risks through
identified control measures.
3. Hazard, Risk & Risk Control

3.1 Hazard:
A Hazard is a source or situation with potential for harm in term of human injury or ill health, damage to
property, damage to the work place environment, or a combination of these. Hazards can be of different
kinds like Physical, Chemical, Biological, Ergonomic etc. For example a hanging load on top of working
or walking person is a physical hazard whereas hazards due to handling or storage can amount to a
chemical hazard.
i. 3.2 Risk:
Risk is the combination of the likelihood/ frequency and the consequence(s)/ severity of a specified
undesired event occurring. For example the likelihood or frequency of an air accident is lower than that
of a road accident but the consequence or severity of air accident is much higher than that of road
accident. The risks can be classified into different levels such as low medium or high.
ii. 3.3 Acceptable Risk:

The level of risk is considered good enough or acceptable where advantages of increased safety are not
worth the extra cost of reducing risk. Hence, the reduction of the risk is aimed at a level of `as low as
reasonably practical (ALARP)‟ rather than zero which is not cost effective or practical to achieve.

SAFETY
iii. 3.4 Risk control

All activities associated with identifying, analysing, measuring, avoiding, preventing, reducing or
otherwise controlling risks and uncertainties are known as risk control measures. The risk control
measures could involve elimination, substitution, management or transfer of the risk.
iv. 3.5 Risk Assessment

The process of identification of the hazard and judgement of significance of the risk based on the
frequency and severity of the risk is known as risk assessment. There are various qualitative and
quantitative methods through which the level of a risk can be assessed.
4. Hazard Identification and Risk Assessment

There are several types and methods of risk assessment staring from basic qualitative method to the
more advanced methods
The different types of Risk Assessment are
1. Simple or qualitative risk analysis.

2. Quantitative Risk assessment (QRA)
3. Process Hazard analysis (PHA)
4. Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA)
5. Hazard and operability study (HAZOP)
6. Hazard Ranking (DOW & MOND Index)
7. Fault Tree Analysis (FTA)
8. Event Tree Analysis (ETA)
9. Accident or Cause Consequence analysis
10. Maximum Credible Accident Assessment (MCAA)
11. Vulnerability Analysis
12. What if Analysis
13. Major Accident Hazard (MAH) Control
14. Reliability Engineering
The different methods of hazard identification and risk assessment are used individually or in
combination at different stages in the lifecycle of an industry either in general or for specific systems and
equipment.
5. Stages of Hazard identification and Risk Analysis

Hazard identification and Risk Analysis needs to be carried out at different stages of lifecycle of an
industry viz.
 During Basic &Detailed engineering
 During operations for regular operations or modifications and revamping
 During decommissioning or abandonment
SAFETY
5.1 Basic & Detailed Engineering

HAZOP and QRA is carried out at Basic and Detailed Engineering stage to assess the major hazards
and operability issues of the project, quantitatively evaluate the risk involved with the operations and to
suggest risk control measures to reduce the risks to acceptable levels through engineering controls.
5.2 Regular operations, modifications & revamping
Periodic review of the risks are carried out through HAZOP and QRA during the operations for
identification of emerging risks due to changes in process or work environment or additional risks
emerging during modification or revamping of the existing facilities. The periodicity of such studies are
based on the risk profiles of the facilities.
In addition to this regular operational personnel have to carry out hazard identification and risk
assessment involving their activities on a regular basis using qualitative risk analysis and identify risk
control measures to mitigate the risk.
5.3 Decommissioning and abandonment
Qualitative and quantitative risk assessment is carried out during decommissioning or abandonment of a
facility to assess the risk emerging out of the decommissioning activities as well as the abandoned
facility in future.
HAZOP, QRA and other advanced form of risk assessment is mostly carried out during basic
engineering and commissioning stage as engineering controls which are most effective form of control
are easier to implement during that stage. During most part of the operations, qualitative method of risk
assessment is used for assessment of the risks and implementation of the controls.
6. Qualitative Risk Assessment

A major amount of Hazard identification and risk assessment for the ONGC‟s operations is carried out
at the design stage through implementation of codes & standards and various studies like HAZID, PHA,
FMEA, PEM, EERA, QRA, HAZOP etc. in order to create an inbuilt risk mitigation mechanism on the
facilities at the design stage. The risk mitigation is carried out using the standard hierarchy of reducing
measures which is
a. Isolation
b. Engineering Control
c. Administrative Control
d. Use of PPE
The activities/ aspects normally considered for the risk assessment are for:
 Routine & non routine activities

 Normal and abnormal conditions
 Activities of all persons having access to workplace ( including contractors & visitors
 Human behavior capabilities and other human factors.

SAFETY
 Identified hazards originating outside the workplace capable of adversely affecting the health
and safety of persons under the control of the Asset within the workplace
 Hazards created in the vicinity of the workplace by work related activities under the control of
the Asset.
 Infrastructure, equipment and materials at workplace, weather provided by the organization or
others.
 Changes or proposed changes in the organization, its activities or materials
 Modifications to the OHSAS Management System, including temporary changes and their
impacts on operations, processes and activities
 Any applicable legal obligations relating to risk assessment and implementation of necessary
controls
 The design of work areas processes, installations, machinery, equipment, operating
[procedures and work organization, including their adaptation to human capabilities.
The qualitative process consists of the following six steps
1. Hazard Identification ( Identify sources and causes of Hazard)

2. Hazard Analysis ( Analyze how Hazards will occur and affect)
3. Risk Assessment (Estimate the level of the risk taking into consideration the probability of
the hazard resulting in an accident and consequence of loss due to the accident)
4. Develop a plan for control of the risk. This could be through termination, treatment or transfer
of the risk.
5. Implement the plan
6. Monitor the implementation of the plan & review the effectiveness of risk reduction. If
required revise the plan.
7. Procedure for Qualitative Risk Assessment
The procedure for identification of hazards, evaluation of the risk, identification of the control and
structured documentation of the result in form of Risk Register is carried out broadly in accordance with
guidelines of ISO 17776: 2000.
The exercise of Hazard identification, Risk assessment and development of the Risk Register is an
ongoing process which is carried out by a group of personnel having requisite knowledge and
experience of the working of operations as well as the Hazard Identification and risk assessment
techniques.
The following steps are involved in the identification of hazards, assessing risks and implementing
controls:
1. Classify all the work activities and gather information about them
2. Identify all the significant hazards related to each activity

SAFETY
3. Define a risk matrix for estimation of the magnitude of the risk based on severity and probability
of the risk involved with the hazard
4. Classify the risk levels define the screening criteria and actions to be taken for different levels
5. Make a subjective estimate of the risk associated with each hazard assuming that planned
safeguards are in place. The assessments should consider the effectiveness of the controls and
the consequences of their failure
6. Decide if the risk is tolerable (i.e., that the risk has been reduced to as low as reasonably
practicable) by judging whether planned or existing OH&S precautions are sufficient to keep the
hazard under control, and, and at a minimum meet the legal requirements
7. Prepare a risk control action plan. The risk control action plan includes preventive control
measures for prevention of an event causing the risk followed by protective control measures
which will prevent escalation of the risk if the event occurs in spite of the preventive controls
being in place or failure of the preventive controls.
8. Review the adequacy of the action plan by assessing the residual risk to find out if it is within
the As Low As Reasonably Practicable ( ALARP) level
9. Provide a written record where the risks are significant
10. Carry out updating of the assessment when conditions change such as
Change in process
Change in equipment
Revamping
Accidents
Audit findings etc.
v. 7.1 Classification of work activities:
Information required for each work activity includes items from the following:
1. Tasks being carried out, their duration and frequency

2. Locations
3. Who normally/occasionally carries out the work
4. Who else may be affected by the work
5. Training the personnel have received about the work
6. Written system of permit to work procedures
7. Plant and machinery that may be used
8. Powered hand tools that will be used
9. Manufacturer‟s/suppliers instructions for machinery and hand tools
10. Size, shape and character of weight that may be handled
11. Substances used or encountered during work
12. Physical form of substances used or encountered during work (fume, gas, vapor, liquid,
dust/powder solid, etc.
13. Content and recommendations of safety, data sheets relating to substances used or
recommended
14. Relevant regulations, standards relating to the work being done, plant and machinery used and
the materials being used
SAFETY
15. Competent Safety supervision and Control measures in place

16. Available monitoring data gained as a result of information from within and outside the
organization, accident-incident , ill health experience associated with the work/equipment or
material
17. Finding of any existing assessment relating to the work activity
vi. 7.2 Identification of Hazards
The first step in the risk assessment process is to identify the hazards and this will form the basis of all
risk assessments, which are subsequently carried out. A systematic approach should be taken in the
identification of hazards or many may be missed. The whole workplace needs to be divided in workable
sections to make the work more effective.
While hazards relating to the following categories are normally considered during the hazard
identification process, the identified hazards are not limited to them. The effort is to identify as many
numbers of hazards as possible at the work place for which risk assessment is being carried out:
1. Process - Chemical
2. Mechanical
3. Electrical
4. Radiation
5. Substances
6. Fire and explosion
7. Environment- Toxic release
8. Inadequate or no Machine guard
9. Violence to staff/Human behavior/Unsafe act
As a complementary approach the following prompt list is also used:
During work activities could the following hazards exist?
a. Slip/falls on the level,

b. Falls of persons from height,
c. Fall of tools/materials from heights,
d. Inadequate head room
e. Hazards associated with manual lifting/handling of tools, materials, etc,
f. Hazards associated with plant, machinery associated with assembly, commissioning,
operations, maintenance, modifications, repair, and dismantling,
g. Fire and explosion,
h. Violence to staff,
i. Substances that may be inhaled,
j. Substance that may damage the eye,
k. Substances causing harm to the skin through contact with or being absorbed into the skin,
SAFETY
l. Substances that may cause harm by being ingested

m. Hazards due to energies (pressure, temperature, heat, radiation, sound, vibration, electricity,
chemical, etc.) being higher than the threshold levels or duration
n. Work related to muscle disorders due to repetitive tasks,
o. Low lighting and poor ergonomics,
p. Slippery surfaces,
q. Inadequate guard rails,
r. Sub contractors‟ activities
vii. 7.3 Determination of risk Magnitude
This is an area where qualified and informed judgement has to be made. For it to be effective, common
sense is needed but even then disparities may still appear in the prioritization of the risk.
Risk is essentially a combination of three factors
 The number of people that could be affected

 The severity of likely injuries that person could suffer
 The likelihood of harm actually occurring
In order to evaluate the risk realistically, it is essential that the hazard be evaluated on the likelihood of
occurrence in relation to the severity of the injury that may actually result. A scoring system is often
used to establish the risk rating.
Risk is a function of the severity of the incident and the probability of occurrence. A simple risk ranking
matrix as a function of severity and probability is given below:
Risk Severity is classified in six levels with weightage ranging from 0 to 5, depending on the potential of
the event to cause the extent of injury, property damage environmental effect and affect to the
reputation of the company with 0 being the least severe and 5 being the most severe. Probability is
classified in four levels with weightage ranging from 1 to 4, depending on the probability of the event
taking place at the facility, company and industry with 4 being the most probable 1 being the least.
When working out likelihood of occurrence it is important to take into account the existing control
measures and their use
Both the severity and frequency can be assessed by using national /international and/or organizational
statistical figures as a form of benchmarking. The industry experience of the persons involved in the
risk assessment process will also help in assessment of frequency and severity rating where statistical
data is not available. At times it may be necessary to call in outside assistance but it is better for
employees to carry out their own risk assessment.
Risk Magnitude is calculated by taking the product of severity and probability weightage.

SAFETY
Risk Magnitude = Severity weightage X Probability weightage
A probability and severity matrix and the screening criteria used presently in ONGC‟s offshore
operations is as follows:
viii. PROBABILITY RATING

Probability
1 2 3 4
Rating
Has Occurred in Occurred several times Occurred several

Has Occurred in
Operating a year in operating times a year in
E & P Industry
Company company location
SEVERITY RATING
Severity
People Asset Environment Reputation
Rating
0 Zero Injury Zero Damage Zero Effect Zero Impact
Slight Effect:
Environmentally
Slight Damage <Rs. Slight Impact limited to
1 Slight Injury recordable event with no
10 Lakhs Installation
agency notification or
permit violation
Minor Effect: Causes Limited Impact

Minor Damage Rs. 10
2 Minor Injury discomfort or acid rain or
Lakhs to Rs. 1 Crore Area wide Impact
causes nausea
Local effect: Kills Marine

Local Damage Rs 1 Considerable Impact
3 Major Injury life or is a resource
Crore to 10 Crores Industry wide impact
consumption
Major damege Rs.10

Major Effect: Human
4 Single Fatality Crores to Rs.50 Major National Impact
Health Effect
Crores
Multiple Extensive Damage Massive effect: Fatal to Major International

5
Fatality .Rs. 50 crores Human life Impact

SAFETY
RISK ASSESSMENT MATRIX
Probability Rating
1 2 3 4
0 0 0 0 0
1 1 2 3 4
Severity Rating
2 2 4 6 8
3 3 6 9 12
4 4 8 12 16
5 5 10 15 20
The overall risk rating score will provide an indication as to the level of risk associated with work and to
prioritize the action to control the risks which pose the greatest hazard.
The acceptance level of a risk depends on an organization‟s risk appetite, i.e. how much risk the
organization can reasonably tolerate. Each organization based on its risk appetite will create it‟s own
risk acceptance criteria. Risks are screened based on the risk acceptance criteria or the screening
criteria of the organization and actions for the risk mitigation are taken.
IX. SCREENING CRITERIA
15 to 20 Extreme Risk - Cannot accept this risk

8 to 12 High Risk - Must implement extensive risk control
4 to 6 Moderate Risk - May require Risk control
0 to 3 Low Risk - Some risk control may still be justified
x. 7.4 Determination of controls
Once the risk magnitudes are determined the high and medium risks are to be reduced by selection of
barriers as control measures. The identification of the effective barriers is to be based on technical
analysis and studies such as Barrier analysis. The barriers selected are to be as per best available
technology and capable of generating most effective results to reduce the risk to the extent possible,
provided associated costs are not significantly disproportionate to the risk reduction achieved. The
selection of the barriers must be reviewed in case of changes in operating envelope through the life
SAFETY
cycle of the facility. Hierarchy of risk reducing measures- prevention detection, control, mitigation and
emergency response is followed while selection and implementation of the barriers.
xi. 7.5 The Hierarchy of Control Measures
The following figure shows the hierarchical process, which needs to be followed when implementing a
control measure.
Normally the hierarchy of control measures to be used should be
1. Engineering Control where hazards are eliminated substituted and or managed through
engineering solutions including change in material, equipment or design. This is the most
effective control measure
2. Administrative Control is used where desirable reduction of risk cannot be achieved through
engineering control cannot. They comprise of safety systems and procedures, alarms, signs
warnings etc.
3. Personal Protective Equipment are accepted as temporary control methods as a last resort where
control of hazards by other controls is not achieved satisfactorily.
If it is not reasonably practicable to implement the first measure, then the next level down should be
tried. The provision of Personal protective Equipment should always be considered as „The Last
Resort’. If complete protection cannot be achievedby using one option, then a combination of measures
can be used if they represent the most effective way to adequately control the risk.

SAFETY
Eliminate the Risk By removing the Hazard

YES
NO
Substitute with something less risky

YES
NO
Control the risk at source YES
NO
Devise Safe System of work

YES
NO
Provide additional training and instruction

YES
NO
Ensure adequate supervision

YES
NO
Supply suitable Personal Protective

Equipment YES END

SAFETY
In deciding which measures to take, the following principles are applied:
 If possible, remove the risk either by elimination or substitution.

 Treat the cause not the effects, i.e if the steps are slippery, treating or replacing the steps is
better than putting up a warning sign
 Where possible try to adapt the work to the individual. Especially where a need arises to
decrease monotonous or repetitive work patterns involved.
 Look at what is available in the marketplace; new technological advances are continually
improving the safety standards by which we work.
 Give priority to those controls, which will benefit the most people, or will protect the whole
workplace.
The selected measures/ barriers can be physical, non physical or a combination of both. The barriers
should be established in several layers in order to reduce the probability of hazards and accidents, and
eliminate or limit their consequences.
When more than one barrier is established they should be designed to ensure that these will not be
impaired or cease to function simultaneously as a consequence of a single incident. While
establishment of barriers, collective measures should be preferred over protective measures aimed at
individuals.
Functional requirements of the barriers should be established and schedule of maintenance and
inspection developed to ensure that the barriers are functional and effective throughout the lifetime of
the workplace. The established functional requirement for effective performance of the barriers should
be known to all concerned personnel.
Policy of continuing operations in the event of impaired barriers, the compensating actions and their
revival should be established.
The controls identified will be of two types namely
a. Preventive Controls
b. Protective Controls
Preventive controls are the controls which are put in place to ensure prevention of the risk generating
event. Protective controls are the controls which are put in place to prevent escalation of the risk should
the preventive controls fail to prevent the hazardous event from occurring.
Taking into consideration the risks identified on the work place and other risk assessment studies like
HAZOP, QRA a list of significant hazards is developed. The master list of significant hazards is kept up
to date.
xii. 7.6 Recording
It is necessary to maintain the records of significant findings of the risk assessment process. The records
must show
SAFETY
 The list of activities at the workplace

 The Identified hazards
 The assessed risk magnitude in terms of severity & probability
 The preventive and the protective controls
 The residual risk
The recording the findings of an assessment which forms the risk register will be as follows:
Risk
Activ Haza Associat Severity Proba Preventiv Protective
S.No. Source rating
ity rd ed Risk (S ) b. (L) e Controls Controls
(S * L)
10. Review and Revision

As all organizations are in a continuous state of change, the risks and results of risk assessment are
likely to change. A regular review period should be set - the higher the risk the more frequent it must be
– and the assessment reviewed and revised where there are any significant changes or the existing
assessment is found invalid
An approved Risk Register in the above format should be maintained at the work place with the HSE
manager. All individuals at the work place should be free to add any hazard which they feel is applicable
with respect to the operations and not included in the risk register. The same is periodically reviewed by
a committee of risk assessors and if found appropriate will be included in the approved risk register
during the review of the risk register.
11. Conclusion
Risk Assessment, apart from being a legal requirement, is an effective method for identifying potential
loss making situations and exercising control over them. It should be seen as another proactive
management tool to minimize losses and increase the ability to satisfy the needs of all stakeholders.

SAFETY
Risk matrix framework (from ISO 17776):

Consequence Increasing probability
Severity People Assets Environ- Reputation A B C D
rating ment
Has Has Occurred Occurred

occurred occurred several several
in E&P in the times a times a
Industry operating year in year at
company the the
operating location
company
0 Zero Zero Zero Zero
injury damage effect Impact
1 Slight Slight Slight Slight Manage for continued
injury damage effect impact improvement (Low risk
hazards)
2 Minor Minor Minor Limited
injury damage effect impact
3 Major Local Local Considera

injury damage effect ble impact
4 Single Major Major Major Incorporate Fail to meet screening

fatality damage effect national risk criteria (High risk
impact reducing hazards)
5 Multiple Extensive Massive Major measures
fatalities damage effect internation (Medium
al impact risk
hazards)
Risk reducing measures in case of low risk hazards include: controls as per general workplace
practices & procedures, based on job safety analysis (JSA). JSA is covered in detail at the end of this
note. Risk reducing measures in case of medium risk hazards include: availability of barriers or controls
for prevention and mitigation of hazards; controls as per workplace practices & procedures based on
job safety analysis (JSA).
Risk reducing measures for high risk hazards should include:
 For each cause of hazard, identify the barriers to prevent the release of hazard.
 For every hazard, identify the barriers to reduce the consequences and/or facilitate the recovery
from the consequences.
 For each identified barrier:

SAFETY
o Identify the critical task / activities required to ensure barriers are in place, working effectively
and their integrity is maintained.
o Identify the resources and competencies required for the barriers to be implemented and
effective.
o Identify where barrier is referred in safety management system.
o Identify any factors that prevent such barriers from being defeated, removed from service or
any reduction or elimination of their effectiveness. Identify any compensatory barriers and
the associated activities, resources, competencies to address such barrier defeating factors.
For guidance on hazard identification and risk assessment refer section 6.1 of OISD-GDN-227.
Hierarchy of risk reducing measures – prevention, detection, control, mitigation and emergency
response should be followed. Safety measures / barriers have to be divided in two categories –
preventive measures and protective measures. Preventive measures have objective of reducing
probability of occurrence. Protective measures (also called residual risk control) have objective of
mitigating the effects of hazard situations. Protective measures should be considered after possible
preventive measures.
Risk reduction measures should include:
I. Preventive measures such as using inherently safer designs and ensuring asset integrity, to
prevent incidents or reduce the probability of occurrence of incidents and to control incidents
– limit the extent and duration of a hazardous event.
II. Mitigating measures to mitigate the effects or reduce the consequences.
III. Measures to recover from incidents taking into account possible failures of the control.
IV. Preventive measures should be emphasised.
In case of failure of barriers provided to prevent occurring of a hazardous event, mitigating measures to
bring the situation to normal are required.
All measures taken following a hazardous event are known as emergency response. For guidance on
emergency preparedness and response refer OISD-GDN-227.
Risk Matrix (based on ISO 17776, as explained above) is suggested on next page, which can be used
for qualitative risk assessment.

SAFETY
Suggested Risk Matrix
Sl. Work Associated Control Probability Consequences Risk Remarks*

No. Activit Hazards measure Level
y s in (Low /
Environment
place Mediu
Reputation
m/
Assets
People
High)
 Remarks should specify, in case of medium and high risk levels, whether these risk levels
are because of inherent hazardous nature of the activity OR because of deficiencies in
control measures. In case of latter, action(s) in hand to remove deficiencies should be
recorded.
It would be pertinent to mention that the risk matrix should include all the emergency scenarios
considered in the “Emergency Response Plan” of the installation.
Risk matrix should be treated as a live document, to be updated periodically to reflect the action(s)
taken related to deficient control measures besides incorporating new hazards (due to change in
process parameters, plant modifications, change of personnel etc.

SAFETY
Chapter – 5
Management of Change

SAFETY
CHAPTER 5
MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE
GENERAL Management program should establish procedures to identify
and control hazards associated with change and maintain the
accuracy of safety info.
CHANGE IN FACILITIES Facility change arises whenever the process or mechanical

design is altered; or as a result of changes in produced fluids,
process additives, product specifications, by-products or waste
products, design inventories, instrumentation and control
systems, or materials of construction.
CHANGE IN PERSONNEL Change in personnel, including contractor personnel, occurs

whenever there is a change in the organization or in personnel
that supervise or operate the facility.
MANAGING THE CHANGES The Management program should establish and implement
written procedures to manage change in facilities and personnel
that are flexible enough to accommodate both major and minor
changes.

SAFETY
CHAPTER 5
MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE
1. Introduction
In an oil and gas facility, the operating parameters can vary with change in time. As
technology continues to evolve, processes and procedures inevitably become
obsolete. Greater demand of oil and gas may call for expansion of existing
facilities. In such situations, change in the process, procedures and parameters are
necessary. But before any change is made, its impact on safety, health
and environment must be evaluated and appropriate controls put in place. The
purpose of this section is to establish the system that will govern any change in
personnel, process, equipment, surface facilities and work methods in ONGC
facilities.
2. Application
A change in design and construction, operating parameters, equipment or procedures
will be carried out in a facility only after thorough assessment that such change does not;
 Increase the risk to safety and health of people,

 Pose negative impact on environment,
 Endanger property.
In order to ascertain the above, ONGC has established a comprehensive Management of

Change procedure which outlines the methodology to be adopted for technically evaluating
the impact of the proposed change at different levels before a final approval is accorded by
the identified competent authority to effect the change.
2.1 Strategic objectives
In pursuance of above, the following strategic objectives are set:
 Use of appropriate techniques would identify hazards due to the proposed

change.
 Risk due to the identified hazards would be assessed systematically. The focus of
assessment would on the areas that present the greatest risk.
 Risk to persons would be reduced to a level as low as reasonably

practicable.
 Management control would be exercised at different levels to

SAFETY
ensure safe implementation of the change required.
 Before the changed system is brought on line, an evaluation would be done

to ensure that change has been done as envisaged.
 Once a change in the engineered system is done, it would be duly reflected

in the P&IDs’ and relevant documents.
 All concerned persons would be informed prior to the change being made
and within 24 hours of the change effected or a soon as is practicable.
3. Types of Change
3.1 Change in Existing Facility
3.1.1 Process Change
The change that requires a change in P&ID e.g., connecting a piping/spool

piece, changing the valve, changing a flange with different rating, re-routing of
lines, adding a connection to flare system/ vent system/drainage system etc. Such
changes are normally necessitated to ensure proper process operations under
changed conditions.
3.1.2 Procedural Change
It includes any change of operating/ maintenance procedure with reference to the

one indicated in operations/ maintenance manual For example:
Start – up procedure, shut down procedure, changing operation from pressurized

mode to stabilized mode, equipment maintenance procedure well testing
procedure etc.
3.1.3 Change in operational Parameters
It includes any change in operating parameters (settings) for the process or

equipment, like pressure, temperature, flow etc. E.g.Changing operating parameters
of separators, changing the settings of trips etc.
3.1.4 Change in surface facilities
In the course of operations, equipment requires major repairs or overhauling. It is

then taken out of the system or substituted with an equipment not identical. Such a
change can affect safety of personnel.
SAFETY
3.1.5 Bypass/ Abort Control
In order to continue operations, at times it may be necessary to make temporary

connections (e.g. chicksan joints), bypassing safety interlocks/ controls / alarm /
trip mechanisms in part or in full in Fire Gas detection systems, Unit Control
Panels etc. till such time that normal operating procedures are restored. These
short-term changes may endanger hazardous situations.
3.2 Change in Personnel
Change in personnel is significant whenever there is change of contractor. Work

and safety cultures of the incoming contractor are key factors in managing the change.
4. Assessment of proposed Change

4.1 Assessment criteria
It is recognized that no industrial activity is entirely free from risk. It is never

possible to be sure that every eventuality has been covered by safety
precautions. In assessment of risk the principle is that the risk to persons should
be reduced to a level “As Low as Reasonably Practicable” (ALARP). This level is
reached when it is found that there would be a gross disproportion between the
cost (in money, time or trouble) of additional preventive or protective measures,
and the reduction in risk they would achieve. In other words, it can be said that
the risks should be low enough for the public to tolerate. This is what risk criteria
attempt to establish.
4.2 What is tolerable
Where an identified hazard is one that is already recognized by the oil

industry, compliance with the standard good practice would be adequate. Where a new
hazard is identified, the risk to persons should be reduced to a level “As Low as
Reasonably Practicable” (ALARP).
4.3 Change Management Team
The OIM/ Installation Incharge must set up a Change Management Team to-
• Assess the risk of proposed change;

• Develop the plan for change;
• Seek approval of the competent authority for the change;
• Oversee implementation of the approved plan;
• Ensure updating of relevant P&ID, change management records and documents.

SAFETY
4.4 Method of Assessment
The main principles of safe facilities design and operation are:

 Minimising the likelihood of uncontrollable release of hydrocarbons and other
hazardous substances.
 Minimising the chances of ignition of flammable fluids.
 Preventing escalation of fire and damage to equipment.
 Providing for protection of personnel and escape.
These principles must be applied in assessment of risk. However, the direction and
level of effort devoted to such assessment should be relative to the inherent risk.
The focus on the areas that present the greatest risk is essential.
4.5 Assessment Criteria for Change in Personnel
A formal assessment of risk is required when a new contractor is hired

for any service related to operations at an offshore facility. The criteria for
assessment are:
• The safety management system of the contractor must be compatible

with ONGC SMS;
• Safety training of contractor’s personnel must be equivalent to that of

ONGC personnel;
• Emergency response system of the contractor must dovetail into

ONGC emergency response system.
• Lost-Time-Incidents in the contractor’s operations in the previous three

years must show a downward trend.
5. Methodology of application
1. A Change Management Team comprising of Process / Maintenance / Electrical / HSE engineers
will assess the impact of change. The focus should be to assess whether standard
procedures are being followed and to identify any problems that may further attention.
2. The Team must examine the output of –
a. Hazards observed by employees

b. Review of past accidents / incidents
SAFETY
c. HAZID study report

d. HAZOP study recommendations and then
i. Describe the change proposed;

ii. Describe the hazard / hazards identified due to the proposed change;
iii. Review the impact on process, mechanical and electrical
equipment, safety and environmental aspects (Use Hazard
Identification Checklist placed at Annex-1).
3. On the basis of assessment made as above, the Team must judge-
a. The acceptability of the risk;

b. Adequacy of existing control measures;
c. Additional risk reduction measures required and its estimated cost.
4. The team must submit its report to competent authority for approval.
5. Management’s decision on the proposed change and risk reduction measure must
be conveyed to the Team.

SAFETY
CHAPTER - 6
OPERATING
PROCEDURES

SAFETY
Chapter – 6
OPERATING PROCEDURES (Standard Operating Procedures)
GENERAL : The Management program should include requirements for written
facility operating procedures designed to enhance efficient, safe, and
environmentally sound operations. Operating procedures, by design,
should directly address human factor issues associated with the
interaction between facilities and personnel.
CONTENT OF OPERATING Written procedures should include:

PROCEDURES a. Job title and reporting relationship or each person (s) responsible for
each operating area
b. Instructions for sound operation of each facility that are consistent
with safety and environmental information for : startup, normal
operations, temporary operations, simultaneous operations, emergency
shutdown and isolation and normal shutdown.
c. Normal operating limits and, for safety and environmental
considerations, the consequences of deviation outside the operating
limits, and the steps required for correcting or avoiding a deviation(s)
from the operating limits.
d. Environmental and occupational safety and health considerations.
PERIODIC REVIEW When changes are made, operating procedures should be reviewed per
the management of change procedure.

SAFETY
Chapter – 6
OPERATING PROCEDURES (SOPs)
(A) Integrated QHSE management system
1. Objectives
To achieve continual improvement by acquiring certification on QHSE management system based on
the latest versions on ISO/OHSAS standards
2. Introduction
2.1. Why QHSE management system?
QHSE management system provides a safe structured path for accomplishment of goals, development
of personnel, improved communication and improvement of business process. It also helps to maintain
consistency in performance.
2.2. What is QHSE management system?
2.2.1. QHSE Management system is based on international standards, ISO 9001, OHSAS 18001
&ISO 14001 and is an integrated approach to develop a hybrid management system for
achieving quality of products and services and addressing health, safety and environmental
aspects at the same time.
2.2.2. The mission of International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is to promote the
development of standardization and related activities in the world with a view to facilitate the
international exchange of goods and services, and to develop cooperation in the spheres of
intellectual, scientific, technological and economic activity.
2.2.3. The key requirements of the integrated QHSE management system are derived from the
following international standards:
 Quality Management system as per ISO 9001: 2008

 Environmental Management system as per ISO-14001: 2004
 Occupational Health and Safety Management system as per OHSAS18001: 2007.

SAFETY
3. QHSE way
3.1. QHSE management system is a cyclic management system maintaining Plan–Do-Check-Act
elements in complete equilibrium and ensures self sustained perpetual performance system.
 Plan : Design or revise business process components to improve results
 Do : Implement the plan and measure its performance
 Check : Assess the measurements and report the results to decision makers
 Act : Decide on changes needed to improve the process
Do
Check
Plan
Act
4. ISO 9001:2008 Quality Management System

This international standard specifies requirements for a Quality Management System where
organization needs to demonstrate its ability to consistently provide products that meet customer and
applicable regulatory requirements and aims to enhance customer satisfaction through effective
application of the system, including processes for continual improvement of the system and the
assurance of conformity to customer and applicable regulatory requirements.
5. ISO-14001:2004 Environment Management System

This international standard covering environmental management is intended to provide organization
with the elements of an effective environment management system that: result in the identification of
their environmental aspects and assessment of their impacts provide for the development of methods
to eliminate/ control environmental aspects and their impacts through setting up of objectives & targets,
programmes, operational control, compliance to legislative requirements to achieve continual
improvement of its environmental performance.
6. OHSAS 18001 Occupational Health & Safety Management System

OHSAS 18001:2007 has been created via the concerted effort from a number of the world‟s leading
national standards bodies, certification bodies, and specialist consultancies & is still not an ISO
standard. This standard is intended to address occupational health and safety. An effective
occupational health and safety management systems should:
SAFETY
 result in the identification of hazards and assessment of risks in the work environment.
 provide for the development of methods to eliminate/ control hazards and risks.
 thorough setting up of objectives & targets, operational control, compliance to
legislative requirements so as to achieve continual improvement of its occupational
health and safety performance.
7. Elements of QHSE Management System

Main elements of Quality management system: ISO 9001:2008
7.1 General requirement:
7.2 Documentation requirement:
 Quality manual
 Control of documents
 Control of records
7.3 Management Responsibility
 Management commitment
 Customer focus / feedback
 Quality policy
 Planning
o Quality objectives& Targets
o Standard Operating Procedures
 Responsibility, authority and communication
o Responsibility and authority
o Management representative
o Internal communication
 Management review
7.4 Resource management
 Provision of resources
 Human resources
o Competence, awareness and training
 Infrastructure
 Work environment
7.5 Product realization
 Planning of product realization

 Customer related process
o Determination of requirements related to the product
o Review of requirements related to the product
o Customer communication

SAFETY
 Design and development

o Design and development planning
o Design and development inputs
o Design and development outputs
o Design and development review
o Design and development verification
o Design and development validation
o Control of design and development changes
 Purchasing
o Purchasing process
o Purchasing information
o Verification of purchased product
 Production and service provision
o Control of production and service provision
o Validation of processes for production and service provision
o Identification and traceability
o Customer property
o Preservation of product
 Control of monitoring and measuring devices
7.6 Measurement, analysis and improvement
 Monitoring and measurement

o Customer satisfaction
o Internal audit
o Monitoring and measurement of processes
o Monitoring and measurement of product
 Control of nonconforming product
 Analysis of data
 Improvement
o Continual improvement
o Corrective action
o Preventive action
8. Main elements of Environment management system: ISO 14001:2004

8.1 General requirements
8.2 Environment policy
8.3 Planning
 Environment aspects
 Legal and other requirements
 Objective targets and programme(s)
8.4 Implementation and operation
SAFETY
 Resources, role, responsibility and authority

 Competence, training and awareness
 Communication
 Documentation
 Operational control
 Emergency preparedness and response
8.5 Checking
 Monitoring and measurement

 Evaluation of compliance
 Nonconformity, corrective action and preventive action
 Internal audit
8.6 Management review
9. Main elements of Occupational Health & Safety Assessment Series: OHSAS

18001:2007
9.1 General requirements
9.2 OH&S policy
9.3 Planning
 Hazard identification, risk assessment and determining controls
 Legal and other requirements
 Objectives and programme(s)
9.4 Implementation and operation
 Resource roles, responsibility, accountability and authority
 Competence, training and awareness
 Communication, participation and consultation
9.5 Documentation
 Operational control
 Emergency preparedness and response
9.6 Checking
 Performance measurement and monitoring

 Evaluation of compliance
 Incident investigation, nonconformity, corrective action and preventive action.
 Internal audit

SAFETY
9.7 Management review
10. Development of QHSE Management System

Development of QHSE management system is an act of integrating the common contents of these
three standards, whereas developing non integral part separately. This involves;
10.1 Development of Manuals and documents
10.1.1 QHSE Management Manual (Apex Manual)

Commitment to comply main elements of the standards along with policy, scope, roles &
responsibilities etc. are contained in this Manual.
10.1.2 Common Procedure Manual.

Only those procedures which are common to more than two standards are covered in this
manual.
10.1.3 Quality Procedure Manual.

Objective &targets and procedures related to quality are listed in this manual.
10.1.4 Safety Procedure Manual

Objective & targets and procedures related to safety are listed in this manual
10.1.5 Environment Procedure Manual

Objective & targets and procedures related to safety are listed in this manual
10.1.6 Operations control procedure Manual

Procedures related to critical operations are listed in this manual
In addition to the above the critical documents which support the QHSE Management System
are
10.1.7 OH & S Risk Register

This document lists all the OH&S hazards associated with the operations, the associated risks,
assessment of the risk and risk mitigation steps to bring down the risks to acceptable level. The
assessment of the risk is carried out based on the probability and severity of the risks and
corporate risk matrix.

SAFETY
10.1.8 Environment Impact & aspect manual

The manual identifies significant environmental aspectstheir impacts and mitigation steps to
bring down the impacts to acceptable level.These aspects can be assessed based on quantity
of waste, legal / regulatory obligation, frequency of occurrence, damage potential, detection and
preventive mechanism
10.1.9 Legal register

All applicable legal and other requirements like OISD standards, Code of safe practices, internal
guidelines on HSE related issues etc. are identified and summarised in this manual.
11. Interpretation of internal customer in QHSE Management System

In most of supply chains and especially in quality management system the customer is on main
focus. The quality management system based on ISO-9001 mainly emphasizes on customer
satisfaction / delight through meeting customer requirements and continually improve the quality of
service through customer feedback and improving the performance of key processes. Therefore it
is imperative to understand the customers (mainly internal customers) and their requirements in
organizational set up.
Customer is the receiver of the output, may be either external or internal
 External customers are those who buy our products/services.

 Internal customers are individuals/ departments who use our output as their input
and we become their suppliers.
12. QHSE Internal Audit: QHSE

Internal audits are to be carried out according to ISO requirement as per check list ( Annexed)
(B) Permit- To- Work (PTW) system management

a. Introduction
The oil & Gas business is a risky activity where many hazards are present. Hence, there exists the
potential for serious accidents to occur. Hence it is essential that work shall be carried out under a safe
system to prevent any untoward incident.
Statistics have shown that the major contributor to accidents is the lack of proper communication
between the various agencies involved in the process. Hence authorization system must be evolved to
regulate such jobs that have potential to cause major accidents. The authorization scheme is
commonly known as “Permit-To-Work” System”.

SAFETY
 A permit:
 defines scope of work
 identifies hazards and assesses risk
 establishes control measures to eliminate or mitigate hazards
 links the work to other associated work permits or simultaneous operations
 is authorized by the responsible person(s)
 communicates above information to all involved in the work
 ensures adequate control over the return to normal operations
 Essential Features
A Permit to work System is a formal Job-authorization system which is used to control certain
potentially hazardous jobs and should have the following essential features:
 Designating a person for job authorization (i.e. issuing the permit)

 Designating a person who will receive the permit on for carrying out the job.
 The levels of on-field supervision needed for the specified job.
 Designating a person responsible for a gas check (e.g. hydrocarbons, toxic gases
etc).
 Underlining the necessity of a Tool-box Talk/training before starting every such
activity.
 Establishing a Procedure for managing the permit system through periodic
monitoring and auditing.
 Objectives and Functions
The Permit-To-work system will have the following broad objectives and functions:
 To ensure the proper authorization of designated work

 To make concerned persons aware of the exact nature, identity and extent of the
job and the hazards involved.
 To make concerned persons aware of the limitation of the authorization and the
time limit
 To specify the necessary precautions to be taken including safe energy isolation or
isolation from hazardous substances
 To ensure that the Unit-In-charge is aware of the job being done.
 To incorporate duration of permit
 To provide for level of supervision depending on the complexity of the job.
 To provide a formal handover procedure in case the permit is valid beyond a
particular shift.
 To provide a formal handover procedure after the completion of the work in safe
condition.
 Applicability
Permit –To-Work system will be applicable to jobs which-
 May adversely affect the safety of personnel, property or the environment.

SAFETY
 Are of non-routine nature and require JSA and control measures for risk mitigation
before starting.
 are intended to be carried out by more than one agencies(e.g. contractors)
 are being transferred from one department to another with change of
responsibilities
 Apart from the above, maintenance work carried out, particularly for safety critical
equipment/systems should be undertaken under the Permit-To-work system.
b. Type of Work Permits
The following types of broad categories of permits may be necessary:
 Hot Work Permit, for work involving Flammable atmosphere and source generaring
energy having potential of ignition ( increase in temp Or generating spark)
 Cold Work Permit for any other hazardous activityconsisting of but not limited to
i) Confined space entry

ii) Electrical isolation and energization permit
iii) Working at height / over water permit
iv) Roof permit
v) Vehicle entry permit
vi) Excavations permit etc.
vii) Load handling/ Load transfer from vessels (Boats)
viii) Radiography
ix) Working on pressurized lines and contaminated areas.
x) Diving
c. Integration of Permits
For on shore operations, there are mainly three types of permits which can either be separate or
integrated and these are:
i. cold work Permit

 The permit may include the jobs like opening process machinery, blinding & de-blinding,
tightening of flanges, hot bolting, crane operation, grass cutting, civil construction,
working on height, confined space entry, inspection, painting etc.
 The Permit shall have three copies clearly identifiable with distinct colours and numbers.
The original should be in color different than the other permits and copies should have the
word "COPY" printed in large letters. Original shall be issued to the receiver, retaining the
duplicate in the book. If more number of agencies is involved, more copies can be printed.
 Specimen copy of the permits can be referred from the Annexure I of HSE Management
System.

SAFETY
ii. Hot work Permit

The jobs may includes
Actual hot works e.g. welding, grinding, gas cutting, burning, shot blasting, soldering, chipping,
excavation, open fire, use of certain non-explosion proof equipment, entry and operation of petrol
or diesel driven vehicles or equipment in hazardous area capable of generating spark (e.g.
megger, gas detectors, flash camera etc.).
(For detailed safety precautions refer the ‘hot work’ safety procedures & Instructions in OISD-STD-105.)
Entry into Confined space(for the protection of personnel entering a confined space such as
Vessels, boilers, storage tanks, large diameter piping or the area having limited ventilation ,
illumination & access etc against hazards such as oxygen deficiency, toxic and flammable
materials, falling objects, power driven equipment etc.) Excavation more than 1.2 meter deep,
entry on floating roof tanks when the roofs are more than 3 meter down from the top, space
located below ground level such as pits, drain channels etc. also fall under the confined space).
(For detailed safety precautions refer to the ‘confined Space Entry’ safety procedures & Instructions in OISD-STD-105.)
 The checklist of composite permit must address all the applicable aspects.
 The permit shall be in minimum three copies. The original should be in color different than
the other permits and copies should have the word "COPY" printed in large letters. Original
copy shall be issued to the receiver, the duplicate to the Fire & Safety Section and
triplicate retained in the book. In units where more agencies are involved, more number of
copies can be printed.
 A specimen of the composite permit for "Hot work" and "Entry to Confined space" is
enclosed as Annexure-II for use for Onshore operations.
iii. Electrical Isolation / Energisation Permit
 Before issuing any work permit, it is essential that the equipment / facility to be worked on
is electrically safe and electrical power is isolated to the extent necessary for the safe
conduct of the authorized work.
 Permit for electrical isolation and energisation shall be in triplicate and in two sections with
tear off facility. (Section-A shall be used for electrical isolation and Section-B for
energisation.)
 The original should be in color different than the other permits and copies should have the
word "COPY" printed in large letters. Original along with a copy shall be issued to the
electrical section for electrical isolation / energisation. Electrical section authorized person
on isolation / energisation of the equipment / circuit shall return the original to the issuer
keeping copy for record. Specimen format for the Electrical isolation / energisation is
enclosed at Annexure-III for onshore installations.
(For detailed safety precautions refer to the „Electrical Isolation/ Energisation‟ safety procedures &
Instructions in OISD-STD-105.)
Electrical Lockout permit as per IS: 5216 (Annexure-IV) may be used at onshore installations, as per
requirement.

SAFETY
d. Procedure for Work Permit System
Following procedure shall be adopted for implementation of Work Permit System:
i. The Work Permit System shall always operate on "Owner-In-charge" concept.
For the job to be carried out by contractors / in house manpower, this could be the department
under which the contractors work. For jobs to be carried out by departmentally, the concerned
department should initiate the permit.
ii. Levels of on-field supervision: There could be 3-4 levels of supervision. The level increases as
the complexity increases. Decision on the actual level of supervision required should be taken
both by the issuer and receiver. If required safety officer shall be involved in the decision
making.
There could be following levels of supervision for on-field activity:

 1 -- Tier (i.e. job to be supervised mainly by contractor‟s supervisor / department‟s
person only)
 2 – Tier (i.e. Job to be supervised by contractor‟s supervisor and a representative
from the respective department )
 3 – Tier (i.e. job to be supervised by contractor‟s supervisor, a representative each
from concerned department and the owner‟s department respectively)
 4 –Tier (i.e. Job to be supervised by contractor‟s supervisor, a representative each
from concerned department, the owner‟s department and the consultant firm).
The concerned management shall issue the appropriate authority levels for various installations
and type of permits based on this concept.
iii. A duly authorized written permit shall be obtained for performing a work in hydrocarbon
processing / handling installation by the designated person other than the operating personnel
of that area for executing the work.
iv. Permits should be in printed form preferably in the form of books with tear off facility. A system
of color coding is recommended to identify the various types of permits. All permits shall be
serially numbered. General instructions applicable to the type of the permit should be printed on
the overleaf.
v. The work permit shall be filled up carefully and accurately in clear writing ensuring that detailed
and complete information is provided in all the sections / sub sections. Sketches should be
attached wherever possible to avoid miscommunication. Additions and alterations on the
original shall also be endorsed on all the copies.

SAFETY
The permit form shall have sufficient space (not less than two lines) against description of work
to give clear and complete description of the work.
vi. Supplementary formats / checklist should be used for working at height, equipment box up, road
cutting, dyke cutting etc for safe execution of the work. "Work at height shall be carried out in
accordance with the provisions of OISD-GDN-192.
Additional checklist items / monitoring parameters / Instructions etc. may also be included in the
work permit format as applicable to meet the statutory requirements. In addition to the regular
work permit, supplementary permits as required by the local statutory bodies are also to be
issued.
vii. No hot / cold job shall be undertaken without a work permit except in the areas pre-determined
and designated by the owner-in-charge. All work permits shall be issued by the authorized
person of the work area. For critical and for long duration works the authorizing level should be
elevated.
viii. The work may be planned to be done either departmentally or through a contractor. In either
case, the work permit should be received and signed by the maintenance / project /construction
supervisor of the company. In small installations where no such independent supervisor exists,
the owner-in-charge may issue the permit to the contractor's authorized supervisor directly and
obtain his signature. Care should be taken to regulate SIMOPs and the permits should have
cross referencing to take extra precautions for such jobs. Refer SIMOPs procedures.
ix. Plot plans of the installation and the operating blocks should be displayed in the Fire Station
and concerned Unit Control Rooms respectively. The site of hot jobs should be indicated on
these plot plans with red pins. This helps the incoming supervisor /s (both in Fire station and
operating departments) to get a quick idea of the hot jobs being undertaken and help in
identifying the areas which require inspection / attention, depending upon the criticality of the
area and the job.
x. The Safety Officer / Fire Officer / Officer authorized should make periodic checks of the work
sites to ensure safe work conditions. At any point of time, if he considers that the conditions are
not safe for the work, he may suspend the work and inform the Work Permit Issuing Authority to
restore the safe conditions of the work.
xi. Issuer should make periodic checks of the work sites. Work shall be suspended in case the
conditions are not safe.
xii. Permit shall be issued only for a single shift. Where the work has to be continued, the same
permit may be revalidated / extended shift wise for a period not exceeding seven calendar days
in the succeeding shifts by authorized person. In instances like plant turn around, work permit of
extended duration may be used with the approval of designated senior management.

SAFETY
xiii. For construction activities to be undertaken in non-operating areas, segregated from the rest of
the operating facilities and properly barricaded, Work Permit of validity not exceeding one month
with periodic checks may be issued with the approval of the designated senior management.
xiv. Gas test for hydrocarbon, oxygen deficiency, toxic gases etc shall be conducted as applicable
as a pre-requisite to issue permit for hot work / vessel entry etc. No hot work should be
permitted unless the Explosive meter reading is zero.
Vessel entry, where no hot work is to be carried out, may be permitted under extra
precautionary measures based on the careful analysis of the potential hazards if combustible
gases are up-to 5% of lower explosive limit (LEL). Entry with an air-supplied mask may be
permitted with LEL of upto 20%. The oxygen level should be at least 19.5 % vol. and the
concentration of toxic gases below the threshold limits.
xv. No person shall be allowed to enter any confined space, until all practicable measures have
been taken to remove any gas, fume, vapor or dust, which may be present so that to bring its
level within the permissible limits and to prevent any ingress of such gas, fumes, vapors or dust
and unless entry permit in writing has been issued based on the test carried out that the space
is reasonably free from dangerous substances.
xvi. A careful analysis should be made of the potential hazards and the operations to be performed
to determine the appropriate safeguards and required personal protective equipment prior to
starting work.
Where gas-free conditions are not fully ensured for the duration of hot work, a system of
monitoring either by automatic or by manual periodic verification shall be resorted to depending
upon the prevalent conditions of the operating area.
xvii. When work requires entry to confined space, the permit system shall address both the hazards
of entry and of doing work inside the confined space.
xviii. While performing welding / cutting jobs in confined spaces, ensure that cylinders (oxygen,
acetylene, nitrogen, argon etc) are kept outside separately and hoses for the gases are in good
working condition. Flash back arrestor should be provided for cutting torch.
xix. For work in close proximity of a public road, public traffic should be diverted as a precautionary
measure.
xx. Welding machine should be located in a non-hazardous and ventilated area and shall be
properly earthed. Before commencing the welding job, ensure that all the cables and earthing
connections are as per the standard welding codes / practices. It should be switched off
immediately on completion of the job.
xxi. Radiography with X-ray machine shall be carried out under hot work permit. Cold work permit
may be used if it is done with radio-active isotopes. Radiography should be carried out when

SAFETY
occupancy is least. Based on the maximum allowable radiation, area shall be cordoned off with
adequate warning signs. Warning lights should be used for night radiography.
xxii. For excavation work regardless of the depth, permission from various sections shall be obtained
with precautions to be taken for the underground facilities viz; sewers, telephone lines, cables,
pipelines etc. Copy of permission for excavation shall be attached to the work permit. A feed
back system shall be in place to inform all the concerned department /section about the
completion of work
xxiii. Work should be stopped if any unsafe condition arises.
xxiv. After completion or stoppage of the job, the permit shall be closed. Receiver shall satisfy himself
about the completion of the job (thoroughly check the area for clearing of debris, removal of
temporary electrical installations & machines etc.) before closing the permit. Similarly issuer
shall satisfy himself regarding completion of the job and that the area has been cleaned before
closing the permit. The permit will be treated "Closed" only after signing by Issuer and the
Receiver.
xxv. Copies of completed / used permits shall be properly filed and kept for at least three months
from the date of completion of work or the successful commissioning of the facility which ever is
later.
xxvi. Any person who is authorized to issue or receive the work permit shall be imparted training for a
period of not less than one day covering various aspects of work permits system. Further all the
person authorized to issue / receive or involved with the work permit shall be given a minimum
of one day training once in two year on the work permit system and records maintained.
Since several maintenance/ construction jobs are often carried out with assistance from
contractors, it is essential to provide sufficient exposure to contractor and his employees as well
on the work permit system.
xxvii. Companies / locations shall develop work practices / procedures for the safe execution of jobs
(hot work, confined space entry, vehicle entry, handling lifting equipment, radiography etc.) in
accordance with the site specific facilities. The work procedure shall be approved by the owner
and adopted for carrying out the work safely under work permit system.
e. Specific Permit-To-Work Procedures for Offshore Installations

For Offshore installations, an integrated work permit at Annexure-V may be used. Please also see
the safety instructions provided on the back page of this permit format.
Some of those instructions are given below:
i. Permit to work to be initiated by the person requisitioning the permit as direct supervisor
responsible for the job (receiver). He shall discuss the intended job with concerned Line
Manager (Issuer) and the OIM and obtain their consent before initiating the PTW.
ii. Issuer of the Permit To Work:
SAFETY
For jobs in the process piping system, process vessels, process

Process Manager
instruments like control valve & PSVs
Fire fighting & life saving equipments, deluge systems. HSE Manager
For jobs on all machinery, pumps, compressors, switch gear rooms,
lights & cables, communication system, F&G systems, generators Maintenance Manager
etc.
For painting, construction, modification and fabrication jobs. Construction Manager
For jobs on well platforms Wellhead Manager
iii. The receiver shall obtain the PTW format from the issuer in triplicate, carry out the preparation
as per the check list for the identified job category and complete the format before presenting it
to the issuer.
iv. The issuer shall verify the preparation for the job in terms of safety and procedure, appoint a
ONGC supervisor and issues the permit.
v. If the job requires isolation of the electrical system, permit shall be taken to the electrical
control room where electrical engineer shall isolate the equipment and carry out physical lock
out at the panel .He shall record the same in the PTW and retain one copy with himself.
vi. HSE Manager shall check all the preparations for the job, record the other operative PTWs for
the day, coordinate Tool Box talks to ensure procedure of the job and associated hazards are
identified and understood and control measures taken before granting permission for the job.
vii. The OIM shall review the job plan and preparation and after satisfying himself of the safe
conditions shall grant permission.
viii. Control Room shall be the nodal point for information and coordination. Control Room I/C shall
carry out
- necessary inhibition of the safety systems and note in bypass register.
- record details of the permit on display board.
- ensure location of the job and wind direction are marked on the displayed layout
After carrying out the above Control Room I/C shall sign the permit and retain a copy in the
control room.
ix. The receiver shall proceed to the work site and review the preparation for the job. If found
satisfactory he shall start the job after informing the control room.
x. The receiver shall ensure that all the persons working are wearing appropriate PPE and
carrying out the job as per safe procedure.
xi. Emergency procedures shall have to be practiced by all the persons working. In case of any
emergency alarm the PTW automatically stands cancelled and work has to stop immediately.
Fresh permission has to be obtained from the issuer and the OIM for resuming the work.

SAFETY
xii. Work has to be stopped at the end of permit validity period, otherwise obtain the extension.
xiii. On completion or suspension of the job, the receiver shall restore the work site to safe
condition and sign off the permit with job completion time.
xiv. HSE Manager shall verify the completion of the job and restoration of site to safe condition
before recommending resumption of normal operations.
xv. Issuer shall verify the completion of the job, restoration of site and in case of electrical lock out
review the possibility of energisation of the electrical equipment. He shall either permit or not
permit energisation of the equipment based on the review.
xvi. The electrical engineer shall remove the lock out and energise the equipment if permitted by
the issuer or else put a permanent tag on the lock with permit number. The same shall be
recorded in the permit and copy of the permit returned to the control room.
xvii. Control room In Charge shall restore the safety system, record it before the issuer closes the
permit.
xviii. Permits can be suspended by the issuer, HSE Manager or the OIM at any time.
xix. If multiple jobs are to be carried out on single equipment then only one permit is to be issued.
In case additional job is to be included a fresh permit incorporating the additional job is to be
made.
xx. In case of incomplete jobs, permanent tags with permit numbers are to be put on the breaker
as well as the equipment. Permits with incomplete jobs are to be filed separately.
xxi. Any clarification and briefing of persons shall be done by the HSE Manager.
xxii. Hot work includes welding, burning, grinding, soldering, chipping, riveting, drilling, camera
flashing, power tool, IC engine operation & open flame.
xxiii. On completion of the job the original copy of the permit shall be filed in the control room, the
duplicate copy will be filed with the HSE Manager and the triplicate with the issuer.
xxiv. Unmanned Platforms: During contract jobs on the unmanned platforms the PTW has to be
countersigned by the ONGC representative on board who will be responsible and empowered
for carrying out the work in safe conditions and stop it if necessary. He shall seek OIM's
permission on Radio before commencement of the work
Note: Use the PTW format as per OISD –STD-105 ( Annexed)
(C) Simultaneous Operations (SIMOPS)
14.1 Objectives
SIMOPS procedures enable carrying out of two (or more) critical operations simultaneously at the
same site under controlled conditions. A decision matrix is prepared in advance to ensure that the
operations are compatible and to identify the necessary precautions to limit the risk of interference.
The purpose of this procedure is to addresses the situation where there is a potential interaction
between simultaneous activities such as production, well operations, construction, maintenance etc.
SAFETY
which may contribute to increased risks. It identifies the possible sources of hazard and describes the
method for ensuring adequate management, including SIMOPS roles and responsibilities.
14.2 General Principles
 To prepare operations matrices to list the works items and identify the possible simultaneous
activities.
 To carry out HAZOP and qualitative or quantitative risk analyses to determine which simultaneous
activities are permissible, not permissible or permissible with special controls, thus ensuring the
risks are as low as reasonably practicable (ALARP).
 To update the bridging documents for safety management systems and emergency procedures.
 To prepare detailed operating instructions for use in installations.
 To conduct training of concerned personnel in SIMOPs.
Note: Please refer Doc. No. ONGC/SIMOPS/1/2008 for offshore operations and OISD-GDN-
186 for Onshore Operations (Annexed)
( D ) Marine Procedure:
15.1 Introduction
ONGC‟s Offshore operations are spread over a wide area both in the west and east coast of India.
Operation for Exploration of Production of Hydrocarbons in the high seas involves a vide range of
Marine operations.
All the vessels operating in the high seas are already governed by various international norms like IMO,
IMCA, UKOOA etc, however it is imperative for safe operation of these vessels and their interaction
with each other that ONGC as an operator develop and implement its own Standard Operating
Procedure for Marine operations within its own domain.
In view of the above ONGC has developed and implements a standard operating procedure for its
Marine Operations in form of a Marine Operations Manual.
15.2 Scope
The ONGC Marine Operations Manual applies to all ONGC sites, operations and marine activities
undertaken for or on behalf of ONGC. It applies to all types of vessels, in all areas, whether performed
directly or through third parties.
15.3 Roles and Responsibilities
The ONGC Marine Operations Manual clearly defines the roles and responsibilities at each level with
respect to the Marine Operations. ONGC top management has the responsibility of approving the
manual and subsequent revisions and modifications if any. The manual also specifically outlines the

SAFETY
roles and responsibilities of Base Operations Manager, OIM, Barge Master/ Engineer/ Supervisor,
ONGC representative on hired vessels and barges, Logistics Managers on platforms, Diving
superintendent, Diving supervisors etc.
15.4 Marine safety Zone
Area within 500mof any oil or gas installation both manned and unmanned is recognized as the Marine
Safety zone. Any vessel entering the Marine Safety Zone needs to obtain OIM‟s permission to do so.
The procedures and safety checks to be carried out while obtaining the permission are listed out in the
Manual
15.5 Instructions
An instruction requires mandatory compliance. It may be based on current legislation, other ONGC
policy statements or where a previous experience has highlighted the requirement for strict controls to
reduce the exposure to risk.
15.6 Contravention of an Instruction
An instruction may only be contravened with the express permission of the Asset Manager / Service
Head of ONGC or his nominated delegate. This permission shall be sought following completion of a
risk assessment and hazard analysis to identify the risks and the measures taken to mitigate them.
15.7 Information
The information included in this document gives additional background knowledge which will assist in
complying with these instructions and guidelines.
15.8 Limitations
Nothing in this document shall supersede the spirit or letter of legislation covering the authority of
Masters of vessels, or supervisory staff responsible for offshore Installations, diving and project activity.
15.9 Requirements
All personnel engaged in offshore marine operations in Indian national waters must be familiar with the
content of this document which shall be used as a reference manual to ensure that a specific marine
activity is being conducted in compliance with an established standard.
 Note: Please refer Doc. No. ONGC/ Marine Ops/ 1/ 2008 for detailed Marine procedure
& other information.(Annexed)

SAFETY
( E) Job Safety Analysis(JSA) :

16.1 Purpose - JSA
A Job Safety Analysis (JSA) is a method that is used for the purpose of the following:
a) To identify and analyze the steps involved in performing a specific job,
b) To identify and analyze the existing or potential safety, health and/or environment hazards
associated with each step, and
c) To identify and analyze the recommended action(s) /procedure(s) that will eliminate or
reduce these hazards and the risk of a workplace injury, illness, or property loss
16.2 Types of Hazard
In general, the following hazards should be considered when completing a JSA:
(a) Impact with a falling or flying object

(b) Confined space entry
(c) Penetration of sharp objects
(d) Caught in or between a stationary/ moving object
(e) Falls from an elevated work platform, ladders or stairs
(f) Excessive lifting, twisting, pushing, pulling, reaching, or bending
(g) Exposure to vibrating power tools, excessive noise, cold or heat, or harmful levels of gases,
vapors, liquids, fumes, or dusts
(h) Electrical hazards
(i) Fire hazards
(j) Other Chemical hazards including H2S exposures
(k) Exposure to radiation (e.g. welding operations, etc.)
(l) Potential of drowning in Fire water reservoirs
The list in no way is an exhaustive one and users may add additional hazards depending on the
type of operations.
16.3 When to conduct a JSA?
A Job Safety Analysis should be conducted in the planning stage well before carrying out any job that
has any potential safety and health hazards associated with it. This should serve as source

SAFETY
information for preparing the Safe Work Procedures for any hazardous job and the same should be
looked into (and be attached) before/ while issuing work permits.
16.4 Responsibilities of Conducting a JSA
(a) It should jointly be done by the Operation person responsible and the Safety (HSE) officer
well before any job is planned to be executed.
(b) Persons supervising the said job must be made well aware of the hazards in the permit
issuing stage itself and also before/during execution of the job.
(c) Safety Officers should cross-check the adherence to these procedures while visits to the job
sites while execution and record and report any deviations from the specified procedures.
(d) All such JSA reports should be recorded and distributed to all concerned including the
contractors responsible for carrying out such jobs.
(e) An inventory of hazards that are evolved following a JSA should be recorded and must be
included in the risk registers.
16.5 Procedures to Conduct the Analysis
(a) Select jobs that is associated with significant risks of a workplace injury or illness.
(b) Identify and record each step necessary to accomplish the task.
(c) Observe the task being performed by any worker and also involve his supervisor in the
process.
(d) Identify all actual or potential safety and health hazards associated with each task.
(e) Determine and record the recommended action(s) or procedure(s) for performing each step
that will eliminate or reduce the hazard (i.e. engineering changes, job rotation, PPE, etc.).
(f) Discuss the analysis results with the concerned and keep record of the observations
( F) Tool Box Talk (TBT):
The Accident / Incident rate, occurrence of ill Health and Environmental damage in the Industry are
serious national problems. Continued training is essential to prevent Accidents / Incidents, ill Health
and Environmental damage.
The TOOLBOX TALK programme, if implemented correctly, can play a major part in our continuing
effort to create an increased awareness of:
a) Hazards present in the industry
b) Precautions which must be taken to eliminate or control themand in doing so will help to
reduce unwanted incidents
SAFETY
Why to conduct TOOL BOX TALK
To minimise the occurrence of Unwanted Incidents. Main Root causes of Unwanted Incidents are:
a) Inactive employees on the job

b) Ignorance about hazards associated with the job
c) Improvident/imprudent employees
The best effective tool to address this problem is Tool Box Talk
Why This Tool Box Talk Programme
An insightful contractor commented that if everyone used their common sense, we wouldn‟t have
injuries or accidents on or off the job. Workers need to be trained in the recognition and avoidance of
unsafe conditions as part of company profitability and professional development. Using common sense
is only part of the solution in preventing injuries or accidents
Objective
Safety issues involved in various operations must have to be thoroughly understood by the persons
involved in those activities. In order to ensure that all the relevant safety issues have been discussed,
reviewed and communicated to all concerned, the role of tool box talks are usually carried out, as a
part of improving safety awareness among the employees and contractors. A safety talk/ exercise
would be beneficial to bridge any gap in the safety understanding of the persons involved so that the
job can be carried out safely.
Tool box talk can be of two types
Periodic
A periodic tool box talk, sometimes known as group meeting is a planned activity aimed at
enhancing general HSE awareness among the workforce. The dates, topics and speakers of the
these talks are planned in advance and circulated among the personnel involved in operations who
are expected to attend the same. The topics address various types of hazards/risks likely to be
encountered during different operations and safety measures to be taken for mitigation of the risks.
They could also cover standard operating procedures, safe work procedures or any other topics
related to HSE management in general. The speaker prepares the lecture on the topic of the day
and delivers a lecture. Attendance and records of such meetings are maintained.
Job specific
Job specific tool box talks are carried out prior to taking up all the jobs under permit to work
system. These are related to the JSA carried for the job. The issuer of the work permit, HSE
SAFETY
manager and all the persons associated with the job and the supervisor are present for this talk.
The work procedure and hazards/ risks associated with the particular job and the control measures
to be taken for mitigation of the risks and all the safety measures to be taken are discussed. Work
is started only after it is ensured that all the persons associated with the job understand the things
discussed during the TBT. The supervisor records the same in the Permit to work. Records of all
TBTs are maintained.
Aspects for Tool Box talks
Although any HSE issue pertaining to the job being performed can form the topic for the talk, there are
certain minimum aspects which should be discussed as a part of the exercise. They are the following:
a) Actual and Potential Hazards associated with the job

b) Safe job steps to be followed
c) Necessary PPEs and other protections required to be used
d) Previous Incident reports and lessons learned
e) Safety Alerts already issued
f) Safety inspection/audit findings pertaining to the area.
g) Other allied issues
Procedures for Planning Tool Box Talks
Agenda should be set for every Tool Box Talk being delivered.
a) As such, the following steps should be followed while planning and organizing a tool box
talk.
b) Plan Toolbox Talks in Advance
c) Select the topics/issues for talks on various safety issues. JSA report should be used for
the purpose.
d) Toolbox Talks Should be Given by a Person Who Normally Delivers Safety Toolbox Talks
and be given with a supervisor oversight
e) Toolbox talks must be under supervision of competent person/persons responsible for job
execution.
f) Schedule toolbox talks should not be less than 30 minutes duration (audio-visual aids
could be used as far as feasible).
g) Oversee individuals assigned to give toolbox talks
h) Distribute toolbox talks materials
SAFETY
i) Collect completed Training Attendance Sheets

j) Enter attendance information for record
k) Generate reports on Tool Box talks Quarterly with Analysis
How to hold an effective Tool Box Talk
Topic for discussion
 Choose a topic that is relevant to your audience; one that will create a discussion; a two-
way communication; use either your own topic e.g. discuss an incident that happened on
site the week before, discuss new work hazards, or one generated from the Toolbox talk
programme. We wouldn‟t want to present “Dressing for winter work” at the start of summer,
its not appropriate to the season, it will result in uninterested workers, a waste of time and
loss of credibility on the part of company management
 These TOOLBOX TALK Topics are free to be used as you see fit. They are here to help
promote a safe work place and to foster the importance of placing SAFETY FIRST in all
day-to-day activities. No project, no matter how critical, is worth a lost finger, a blinded eye,
or tragic loss of life. When safety becomes the primary guideline for progress, all parties
reap the rewards of a job well done and done safely.
Location
Does not have to be an office; a mess-room or workshop area will suffice.
Frequency
Once every weekor before starting a high risk job.
Audience
Between 4 and 10 in number will be the most effective but larger audiences, say in a
contractor's mess-room, are suitable and sometimes the only solution.
Time
Limit the duration to 10-15 minutes - try not to become side-tracked on other issues.
Approach
Use a questioning approach, get the message across and listen to responses.Toolbox
talks are not lectures and are designed to get people to think and talk about Health,
Safety and Environmental issues.

SAFETY
For example:
Typical prompts / questions may be:
i. What do you as a group think the benefits are from this type of discussion?
ii. What are the hazards from the incident described and what are the learning points.
Responsibilities – who supposed to conduct TBT
 Process Incharge / shift incharge should formulate the agenda for tool box talks and
prepare a weekly plan for delivering the tool box talks with names of the persons
designated to deliver the talks.
 The plan should be distributed in advance and may be put on the notice board.
 The details of the topic should be prepared by the person delivering the talk.
 The designated person delivering the talk should take the attendance.
Guiding aspects for conducting Tool Box talks by conductor
 Try to generate interest in the topic with the questions asked - Highlight some key words to
remind you of the points to bring up.
 Avoid just reading the topic - take the topic and try to build up the discussion point by point.
 Try to be a good listener.
 Do not allow the group to get totally side tracked, if it is important and relevant allow a short
discussion then bring them back to the main issue
(G) Handing Over & TakingOver Charge Procedure

Introduction
The oil & gas business is a risky activity where many hazards are present, wherein proper handing
over / taking over is of prime importance, since major accidents in hydrocarbon industry have occurred
during shift change over from one person to another viz., Piper Alfa accident in North Sea, hence
establishing a procedure for handing over / taking over is a must.
Objectives
To have a proper information flow and provide a formal handover after the completion of the work in
safe condition.

SAFETY
Applicability
Handing over / taking over system will be applicable to all the personnel during shift change.
Details of Handing over & Taking over of charges at shift change
 There shall be overlapping during handing/ taking over

 All PTW (Permit to work) closed out as well as open (job still in progress) during the shift
shall be recorded in writing and informed verbally as well.
 Unsafe conditions if any, to be put in writing and informed verbally as well.
 By pass of safety critical instrument/ system during the shift shall be recorded in writing
and informed verbally as well.
 Change of plan of operations with complete procedural instructions
Procedure for Handing over / Taking over
Each work centre shall prepare format (procedure) for handing over & taking over for key in charges
depending on the type of job being carried out. It shall contain details of records which are required to
be maintained for each level, for smooth handing over & taking over. This procedure shall become a
part of QHSE procedure manual. Preparation of procedure and approval methodology shall be as given
below:
Preparation and approval methodology for handing over & taking over Procedures
Key official Procedure preparing Approving Agency

agency
Installation Manager Installation Manager in Surface Area Manager/ Location

consultation with safety Manager in consultation with I/c
officer HSE of Group
In charge Process Installation Manager in Surface Area Manager/ Location

In charge Maintenance consultation with Safety Manager in consultation with I/c
Safety officer officer HSE of Group
Shift In charge
In charge Control Room

SAFETY
Practicing Handing over / Taking over
 Based on the procedure as above, all concerned Incharges shall maintain register for
handing over & taking over and shall be signed by relieving officer as well as relieved officer
and endorsement of the date.
 During internal audit, the effectiveness of the procedure for handing over & taking over shall
be audited.
 Monitoring instruction and open recommendations should be closed effectively or carried
forward on month to month basis
 Suitable instructions shall be issued for repeated activities.
( H) Drilling Rig Inspection Policy

Objective:
To enunciate a policy on inspection for certification of Safety, Reliability and Cost effectiveness
of rig operations for a predetermined period.
Area for operation:
A rig can broadly be divided into five categories of physical assets from the point of view of
inspection surveys.
Dynamic equipment : Rotating and Reciprocating types.
Static Structures : Substructures, mast and other structures like
skids for tankages etc
Pressure vessels, tankages : Which come under relevant and lifting
equipment etc. regulations of Factory Act/ Mines
Safety Regulations like Pressure Vessels,
Diesel tanks etc.
Explosion proof Electrical equipment : Electrical equipment such as explosion proof
motors light fittings and other fixtures for
hazardous area.
Bop Accumulator, High pressure valves & choke manifold, chickson joints & other safety
equipments : As per Mines Act
Inspection Strategies: Inspection of System-
19.3.1. Dynamic Equipment:
 Scheduled inspection based on Manufacturers‟ recommended maintenance schedules.

The equipment is required to be inspected periodically as recommended by
SAFETY
manufacturer and updated as per our experience on the equipment.

 Annual inspections are carried out while conducting technical audit on each rig and will
be augmented by application of condition monitoring equipment for reporting on the
condition and performance.
Static Structure, Rig Floor, Handling Tools and Tubulars:
Mast and sub-structure and other miscellaneous structures-
 During rig building operations, rig crew members shall visually inspect bolted
connections, bent members and welded joints.
 Annual inspection through technical audit: General corrosive condition of members,
components, alignment of Derrick and various structures including tankages will be
reported on.
 Rig floor handling tools and tubular (Drilling) shall be inspected annually or as per
standing instructions.
 NDT inspection by hand held tools: These inspections will be carried out initially after
five years and subsequently once in every 3 t o 5 years.
Pressure Vessels Tankages, Lifting Equipment, & Electrical Equipment/ Lights for
Hazardous areas:
These inspections shall be carried out as per relevant factory/ Mines Safety Regulations .
BOP Accumulator, High Pressure Valves, Choke Manifold, Chickson Joints and other Safety
Equipment:
 Inspection at the time of rig building / installation of BOP.

 Inspection on every change of rams.
 Periodic inspection for operational readiness as per frequency circulated from time
to time.
 Annual inspections with NDT capabilities.
Annual Safety Inspections/Audits:
In additiontothe aboveinspectionscarriedout underthe

relevantFactory/MinesSafetyRegulations, the annualsafety inspections willcoversafety
systems/specialsafetydevicesonequipmentandstructures.High Pressurevalves,
Highpressuremanifolds, Chicksonandother highpressurejoints
forleaksetc.Theseinspectionswillalso coverallsafety equipmentsinstalledon
therigforhandlingemergenciesincludingfire-fightingemergency.
SAFETY
Special Inspections In Exceptional Happenings :
Accident, Blowout, Down Holecomplications,FireNatural calamities,

Inthe eventofone ofthe abovehappenings,theaffectedstructure,equipment/systems
willbesubjectedto thorough checkto sustainthe ratedload/designparameters,onthe
special requestoftheGeneralManager(Drilling)/GM(Ops)Dy.GM(Drilling)/Dy.GM (Ops.)
of the AssetandDIC of the rig.
Authority of Inspection Agency:
In ordertothe ensurethatthe rigismaintainedfitforoperationswith required safety

andreliability andisincompliance withNationalStandardsofSafetyunder theMinesAct
Regulationsas laid down by theDGMS,Dhanbad, the inspection agencywillhavethe
followingauthority.
The advise/recommendationsoftheinspectionagencywillcarrytheauthorityofthe Chief

Drilling Services Whileincaseof technical auditteamswho are responsible
forthecertificationoftherig asa whole,theseteamswillbereporting to Director(T&FS).)
through GM/GGM(EM)and theiradvise/recommendationswill carrytheauthorityofChief
Drilling Servicesforimplementation.
( I) PPE Policy, Standards & Practices

PPE Policy
It is mandatory that all employees including contractual & casual, working in ONGC worksites shall
be properly clothed at all the times appropriate to the work being performed and each employees
(posted or required to visit the sites/installation) will, if necessary be issued with PPE to enable
them to perform their job safely and hygienically. Core PPE is required whenever anyone enters
any potentially hazardous work area. This core PPE includes: Hard Hats, Safety toed footwear,
Overall and Safety Glasses with side shields. It is also mandatory for all the contract persons
working at site / installation or any visitor visiting the site to wear PPE.
PPE issued must conform to National/International standards relevant to type of PPE and also
shall meet necessary statutory requirements. In general, area which requires PPE will be
appropriately displayed with PPE sign of specific requirement.
Guide to use PPE
All employees/ contract persons and visitor to be trained / demonstrated to
 Use PPE properly.

 Be aware of when PPE is necessary.
SAFETY
 Know what kind of PPE is necessary.

 Understand the limitations of PPE in protecting individual from injury.
 Don, adjust, wear and doff PPE, &
 Maintain PPE properly.
Training
 Make sure anyone using PPE is aware of why it is needed, when it is to be used,
repaired or replaced and its limitations.
 Train and instruct people how to use it properly and make sure they are doing this.
 Because PPE is the last resort after other methods of protection have been
considered, it is important that users wear it all the time they are exposed to the risk.
Never allow exemptions for those jobs which take “just a few minutes‟.
 Check regularly that PPE is being used and investigate fully any reasons why it is not.
Safety signs can be useful reminders to wear PPE.
Guidelines for use of PPE / preventive measure to be taken while using some hazardous
chemicals being used in oil industry:
Sl. Name of the chemicals PPE / preventive measures

1 Acetic Acid Rubber gloves, apron to prevent skin contact. Splash proof
goggles or face shields, Safety Shoes. Gas tight goggles to
prevent vapour irritation. Eyewash station and showers,
Respirators.
2. Acetone Face shield and / or splash goggles. Rubber gloves, Apron,
coveralls and safety shoes.
3. Ammonia Rubber boots, safety goggles, self contained breathing
apparatus, gas mask and protective clothing in case of liquid
ammonia.
4. Benzene Avoid contact with liquid or vapour. Use hydrocarbon vapour
canister, hydrocarbon, insoluble rubber or plastic gloves, goggles
or face shield, hydrocarbon – insoluble apron such as neoprene
shoes,.
5. Chlorine PVC gloves, gumboots, rubber overcoat, head mask, self
contained breathing apparatus.
6. Ethyl Mercaptan Rubber hand gloves, protective over- clothing, side covered
safety Goggles / face shield.
7. 2 Ethyl 1 Hexanol Protective gloves, safety glasses, goggles, face shield protective
SAFETY
clothing and respiratory protection.

8. EP Lubricant Chemical safety gloves and or full face shield to protect eyes and
face, oil impervious gloves, impervious clothing (apron,
coveralls). Respiratory protection depending upon air borne
concentrations and safety shoes..
9. Formalin Self – contained breathing apparatus, chemical goggles,
( Formaldehyde) protective over-clothing, synthetic rubber or plastic gloves and
and safety shoes. .
10. Hydrofluoric Acid Chemical protective suit with self contained breathing apparatus,
Face mask, shower and eye wash equipment should be available
easily and safety shoes..
11. Hydrazine Self – contained breathing apparatus, Ammonia like gas mask,
rubber or plastic hand gloves, over clothing, side covered safety
glasses, shoes and safety shower nearby and safety shoes..
12. Hexane Face shield or safety goggles to protect the eyes, plastic or
rubber hand gloves, eye wash facilities and safety shoes..
13. Methanol Rubber gloves, apron, boots and face shield should be used
where splashing may occur, safety goggles, breathing apparatus
and safety shoes..
14. Potassium Hydroxide Close fitting safety goggles / face shield, respirator for dust, long
sleeves cotton jacket, rubber gloves, rubber shoes and rubber
apron and safety shoes...
15. Sulphuric Acid Rubber gloves, safety goggles, acid proof overalls, Provide safety
shower, eyewash Fountain, self contained breathing apparatus
and safety shoes..
16. Sodium Hydroxide Side covered safety goggles, face shield, filter or dust type
respirator, rubber shoes and rubber hand gloves.
17. Toluene Air supplied mask, safety goggles / face shield, PVC hand gloves
and safety shoes...
18. Tri – N. Butyl Phosphate Protective eyeglasses or chemical safety goggles, protective
gloves and clothing to prevent skin exposure and respirators and
safety shoes...
19. Xylene Approved canister or air supplied mask, face – shield, plastic
gloves, boots and apron and safety shoes...

SAFETY
Note: The above guidelines for use of PPE to be used / preventive measure to be taken while
handling some hazardous chemical being used in ONGC is given for the reference only.
However for rest of the hazardous chemicals respective MSDS may be referred to
Maintenance of PPE
 Protective devices are subject to gradual degradation in performance due to aging,

weathering, abrasion and repeated contact with materials through normal use, as well as
catastrophic failures in extreme conditions such as emergencies. Therefore it should be
ensured that PPE is:
 Well looked after and properly stored when it is not being used, for example in a dry, clean
cupboard, or in the case of smaller items, such as eye protection in a box or case;
 Kept clean and in good repair – follow the manufacturer‟s maintenance schedule (including
recommended replacement periods and shelf lives). Simple maintenance can be carried
out by the trained wearer, but more intricate repairs should only be done by specialists.
 Make sure suitable replacement PPE is always readily available.
 To ensure the above, inspectors must routinely check equipments for tears, splits, wear
sports, cracks and leakage prior to use and discard.
Hazards assessment
Eye and Face

Appropriate eye and face protection is required where there is a potential for injury from flying
particles, metal sparks, radiation, chemicals, or any other identifiable or suspected eye or face
hazard. Eye protection shall provide adequate protection for identified hazard.
Respiratory Protection
When engineering and administrative controls cannot effectively control exposure to airborne
contaminants, respirators shall be used.
Head Protection
Personnel shall wear hard hats while in Offshore / Onshore operations, or while performing
construction, or in other areas where an overhead/ tripping hazard is or could be present. In
general, hard hats will be worn outside accommodation or outside office areas at work sites.
Foot Protection
Employees shall wear protective footwear when working in operating areas or other areas
where there is danger of foot injuries due to falling or rolling objects, or objects piercing the
sole, or where exposed to electrical hazards. Adequate and suitable footwear must also be
worn inside offices and accommodation areas, open-toed sandals are not acceptable.

SAFETY
Hand Protection
Employees shall use appropriate hand protection when hands are exposed to hazards such as
skin absorption of harmful substances, lacerations, abrasions, punctures, and chemical or
thermal burns. In general, gloves (lightweight, general purpose) will be worn outside of
accommodation areas or at work sites where ladders or handrails might be used or equipment
is being moved or carried. Suitable gloves will be provided and the specific type to be used will
be included on the work permit or risk assessment.
Hearing Protection
Hearing protection is required in any area where noise exposure is 85 dBA or greater.
Protection is not required in control rooms or maintenance shops under normal conditions. The
company provides a number of different types of hearing protection including ear plugs and
personnel will be able to choose the type of protection they will use. All employees exposed to
noise of 85 dBA or above on the job will be included in the Company Hearing Conservation
Program. Audiometric testing and screening, noise monitoring and employee training will be
conducted in accordance with the company Hearing Conservation Program.
Protective Clothing
Employees shall wear protective clothing, including long sleeved in bright colour (for example
orange) with reflective tapes (in Offshore) as mandated by a workplace hazard assessment.
Chemical protective clothing shall be worn when there is potential for exposure to chemicals
that may cause skin irritation or damage on contact or may exert a toxic effect after absorption
through the skin. For construction activities where there is no hydrocarbon hazard normally
outdoor personnel shall wear long sleeved cotton coveralls and for normally indoor staff short
sleeved cotton coverall could be worn. Coverall clothing for short field visit visitors is optional.
The PPE Directive
The following basic requirements should also be considered while formulating the specifications of
PPEs:
I. It should provide adequate protection against hazard to which the worker is exposed.
II. The construction and performance of the kits and liveries items should conform to the
acceptable standards.
III. It should be light and weight, compatible with protective efficiency and should afford
Maximum comfort to the wearer.
IV. It should be durable and be so designed that its various components could be maintained
or replaced easily to ensure good working order.

SAFETY
V. It should not restrict the essential movement of the wearer.

VI. Apart from this the suggestions from the professionally qualified persons, catalogue/ leaflet
/ literature of reputed firms for the products conforming to the standards should also be
considered while formulating the specifications.
VII. In industrial operations there are many inherent dangers to life, limb and health of the
persons. The hazards arise out of use of dangerous substances and work in certain
processes and environments which expose persons to serious risk of bodily injury,
poisoning or diseases.
Approval of specification
The specifications are to be approved by Chief HSE in consultation with Chief ER. Finalization of
standard specifications for the items of intended quality, attempts is to be made to specify the best
in class items available in the market.
Generally specifications of PPE items will be issued /updated/modified by CHSE time to time. In
case of item specific to a particular work area the respective HSE head will prepare a draft
specification and forward to CHSE for approval.
Responsibilities
 The person who is responsible for an area of activity will ensure that all persons are properly
equipped, trained and wearing prescribed item of PPE during the course of their work, and that
PPE is in a safe and serviceable condition.
 The responsible authority may order out of the working area any person who is not properly
equipped. Each person will be responsible for ensuring all PPE issued to them is kept in a
good condition. Persons may be subject to disciplinary proceedings for misuse of any piece of
PPE. The responsible authority will ensure that all PPE is properly stored when not in use.
( J) Safety Critical System Inhibition (Bypass) methodology ( Offshore)

Introduction
All process areas are equipped with primary and secondary Critical safety systems. While the
function of the primary Safety Critical System is to prevent loss of containment of hydrocarbon by
control of pressure, temperature, level etc., the secondary Critical Systems carry out the detection
and suppression in case of operational upsets and loss of containment and prevent escalation.
These Safety critical systems are interlocked and function automatically. These systems are
sometimes inhibited for the purpose of maintenance activities and adverse weather conditions,
which can trigger their inadvertent operation.

SAFETY
Objective
Objective of the procedure is to define safeguards and operations that are necessary if one wishes to inhibit
any of the Safety Critical Systems.
Procedure
1. The Safety Critical Systems contain a number of interlocks thereby making it an intricate
system; hence the inhibition of the system should only be undertaken by the personnel who
have sufficient knowledge and training for carrying out the job.
2. The inhibitions of the systems are to be carried out for particular areas likely to be affected by
the maintenance jobs.
3. The inhibitions are to be linked to the Permit to Work for the job and recorded in the Permit to
Work document.
4. Authorization in writing is to be obtained from appropriate authority for carrying out any
inhibition of the Safety Critical System.
5. Records are to be maintained in a bound register for all such inhibitions with the period of
inhibition and reason clearly mentioned.
6. In case a Safety critical system inhibition extends beyond a shift the same is to be clearly
recorded in the shift handing over register and the incoming shift in charge is to be informed of
the same.
7. A visual display (board) of the inhibited area is to be maintained at the control room or a central
location.
8. Additional precautions to be taken and recorded for protection of the area where the system is
inhibited till the time the inhibition continues.
9. Authorization for such a bypass shall be based on the duration for which the bypassing is to be
done. Bypassing of a safety critical instrument/equipment for a particular period shall require
approval from the competent authority. Bypasses must have a valid reason for doing so and
must be brought to the notice of all concerned to avoid any mix-up during process upsets or
other emergencies. Due care should be taken to mitigate risk associated with bypass.
10. As agreed by EC a policy document on the subject has been issued.
Refer Corporate Policy for Safety Critical system/ Equipment Bypass (Offshore Assets)
Document No CHSE/ Offshore/Policy/2dated 11.11.2010.(Annexed)

SAFETY
( K) Guidelines on Standard Operating Procedure (SOP)

Introduction
Procedure is the specified way to carry out an activity or a process and shall be documented. The
overall goal of establishing operating procedures is to maintain operational controls, which are
necessary to manage the associated risks, environmental aspects, quality of products/ service and
comply with applicable legal and other requirements.
Operational controls should be established and implemented by each operating unit as necessary
to minimize the likelihood of procedural error due to human factor associated with the interaction
between facilities and personnel.
Details of operating procedures
 Procedures shall give the stepwise specified way of carrying out the particular operation/
process covering the job title of the person(s) responsible for each of the relevant activity of the
procedure.
 Operating procedures shall be developed based on JSA (Job Safety Analysis) and approved
as per Table on the next page. It is recommended that the procedures should be presented in
the format given below.
 Procedure shall be prepared for start up, normal operations, temporary operations,
simultaneous operations, emergency shutdown, isolation and normal shutdown.
 The procedures shall specify the operating criteria to be followed while carrying out the
operations with the consequence of deviation and steps required to correct / avoid deviation.
 Operating procedures shall be developed based on the relevant statutory Acts, Rules and
Regulations, HSE Management System, OISD standards, API Standards, Drilling Manual by
IDT, Production Manual by IOGPT and other relevant manuals by various services.
 The HSE issues/risks thus identified shall be incorporated in the „Risk Register‟ of QHSE
document vice versa. The procedures shall be consistent with the safety and environmental
requirements and guidelines incorporating special precautions required to prevent
environmental damage and personal injury through engineering control, administrative control
and PPE, thereby managing any special or unique hazards.
 When changes are made in facilities, operating procedures shall be reviewed as per the
„Management of change‟ procedure.
 In addition, operating procedures shall be reviewed periodically to evaluate their on-going
suitability and effectiveness. The frequency of review shall correspond to the degree of hazard
associated and shall be carried out as and when necessary, but at least once in every 4 years.
 Relevant procedures shall be communicated to all concerned person.

SAFETY
Table : Preparation and Approval Methodology for Operating Procedures
Installation Preparing Agency Approving Agency
Onshore surface Installations (OIM & other line Managers) Mines manager in consultation
in consultation with Installation with Group HSE
Safety Officer
Onshore Drilling/ Work over (OIM & other line Managers) Mines manager in consultation
Rigs in consultation with Rig Safety with Group HSE
officer
Offshore Drilling/ Work over (OIM & other line Managers) LM(DS) in consultation with
Rigs in consultation with Rig safety Group HSE
officer
Offshore Process Platforms OIM & other line Managers in Offshore Area Manager in
consultation with platform HSE consultation with Asset HSE
Manager
Process Plants Area Incharges Head Operations in

consultation with Head HSE
Geo-physical field parties Party chief in consultation with Area Manager in consultation
safety officer with Group HSE
Note: For other area of operations e.g. logging, surveying, cementing, workshop, labs,
reservoir, logistics etc, similar methodology is to be adopted for preparation and approval
processes.

SAFETY
Standard Operating Procedure

Activity Title : Operating Unit: Responsible Person:
Operating Instructions References:
Start-up procedures HSE Issues/Risks
Consequences:
Control measures:
Normal Operations Operating Limits HSE Issues/Risks:
Consequences:
Control measures:
Temporary Operations HSE Issues/Risks:
Consequences:
Control measures:
Simultaneous Operations HSE Issues/Risks:
Consequences:
Control measures:
Emergency Shutdown & Isolation HSE Issues/Risks

SAFETY
Consequences:
Control measures:
Normal Shutdown HSE Issues/Risks
Consequences:
Control measures:
Mitigation Measures:
a) Engineering Control
b) Administrative Control
c) Environmental Damage Control
d) Personal Protective Equipment
e) First-aid Measures
f) Waste Management
Countersigned by
Prepared by Approved By
concerned HSE official
Note: Standard Operating Procedure ( SOP) for all activities in ONGC are to be referred from the
detailed activitywise SOP/Manuals developed available with user group. However SOPs of different
activities are available in Annexures ( Annexed)

SAFETY
Chapter – 7
SAFE WORK
PRACTICES

SAFETY
Chapter-7
Safe Work Practices
GENERAL The Management program should establish and implement safe
work practices, which should be designed to minimize the risks
associated with operating, maintenance, and modification
activities and the handling of materials and substances that could
affect safety or the environment, taking into account the human
factors. Contractors should have their own safe work practices or
may adopt portions of the operator’s program. In both cases, an
agreement prior to work commencing should be reached.
SAFE CONDUCT OF WORK Safe work practices for all personnel, including contractors,
ACTIVITIES should provide for the safe conduct of operating, maintenance,
and modification activities. Specifically, safe work practices
should cover:
a. Opening pressurized or energized equipment or piping
b. Lock out and tag out of electrical and mechanical energy
sources
c. Hot work or other ignition source work
d. Confined space entry
e. Crane operations
CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS Materials specifications, inventories, separation, confinement,

MATERIALS and handling of toxic or hazmat that can affect safety or
environmental protection should be determined, documented,
and communicated to appropriate personnel.
CONTRACTOR SELECTION During contractor selection, operators should obtain and evaluate
info regarding a contactor’s safety and environmental
management policies and practices, and performance there
under (Ref: API RP 76).
Doc. No. ONGC/CHSE/51/HMS/Ch 10.0 March 2016 Page 109 of 289

SAFETY
Chapter – 7
SAFE WORK PRACTICES
DRILLING OPERATIONS:
1.SAFETY DURING RIG BUILDING/ DISMANTLING SYSTEM
Rig building operations involve dismantling of the structures in old location, transportation and erection
of the same at new location.The job involves handling of heavy loads upto 20-30tons using various
heavy material handling operations, transportation from location to location involves extreme risk
because of the extreme conditions and difficult terrains.
In rigbuilding the risks ofaccident are therefore involvedin :
 Use of heavy material handling equipment.
 Transportation of heavy equipment from one location to another location. Rigging up
operations involve risks associated with work at height, handling tools in awkward
positions, danger of falling object on workers on the ground.
Note: BOP Function & Pressure Test formats as per OISD –RP- 174 are to be followed.
2. SAFETY IN CASING AND CEMENTATION OF WELLS
Casing of wells
As drilling progresses, the well is provided with casing of different length and
diameter. The work of lowering th e casing in a well should be carried out in
accordance with the GTO/ plan.
Casing lowering operations should be done very carefully. The following
recommendations provide guidance in this respect:
i.The rig I/C Tool pusher should familiarize himself with the inspection practices
specified in the standards by the manufacturer.
ii. Casing should be handled at all times on racks or wooden/metal surfaces free of
sand , dirt etc .
iii. Cleaning and visual inspection of casing threads should be done on rack and all
casing pipes should be provided with thread protectors on the rack.
iv. Floating equipments (float shoe, float collar ) should be properly checked
before installation.
v. Every joint should be drifted with a proper go-gauge.
vi. Locking compound should be used for float shoe, float collar and bottom 3-4
singles.

SAFETY
vii. In stabbing, lower casing carefully to avoid damaging the threads.

viii. Stab vertically preferably with assistance of a man on the stabbing board.
ix. Mast should be centered.
x. Slip and tong marks are injurious. Every possible effort should be made to keep such
damage at minimum by using proper up to date equipments .
xi. The length of the back up line of tong should be such as to cause minimum
bending stresses on the casing .
xii. Proper torque practices should be followed. Hydraulic tong should be used
for proper make up/ torquing of joint. The tong should be provided with a
reliable torque gauge.
xiii. In the initial stages of make up, any irregularities of make up or speed of make up
should be observed, since these may be indicative of cross threads or
damaged threads.
xiv. To prevent galling while makingup, the connections should be made up at a speed
not to exceed 25 rpm .
xv. Filling of casing during running in should be closely monitored.
xvi. Casing should be lowered in the well smoothly to avoid surge pressures.
xvii. Mechanical aids should be placed on casing in accordance with the plan .
xviii. Circulating sub with kelly and casing connections should be available at the
rig floor prior to start casing.
xix. Spiders are recommended for long casing strings and for heavier loads ( preferably
load more than 150 to ns).
xx. Last casing pipe on which BOP and safety equipment is to be installed should be
lowered with matching nipple having good threads in order to avoidany gas or oil
leakage.
xxi. Lower last two pipes with mud circulation and with low speed .
xxii. During cementation, if any sign of activity in the well is noticed, appropriate
protective measures should be taken to keep the well under control.
xxiii. A safety clamp should be used when running the first joint of casing.
xxiv. During running of casing, make intermediate circulation and ensure minimumgelation.
xxv. To get a good cement sheath cement slurry should be heavier than mud by 0 .2 to 0. 5
gm/ cc.
xxvi. Reciprocate/ rotate casing string during cementation for perfect uniform cement
bonding.
Pre departure safety check –Cementing Unit
The following checks should be performed before leaving for drill site.
i. Oil level, HSD level, radiator water level , steering oil level battery connections,tyre
pressure etc.
ii. After initial warm up of engine, check oil pressure, air pressure and brakes
application.
iii. Fire extinguishers and spark arrester should be there in all cementing units.

SAFETY
iv. Accessories like lines, valves, corners jet mixers, rubber hose should be clamped and
fastened to avoid loss and third party injury during traveling.
Safety precautions at the time of placement of vehicles and hooking up of HP lines

and preparatory works prior to cemening
i.All cementing personals should wear safety kits.

ii. All cementing units should be placed with can facing away from the rig and wood
en wedge should be placed behind wheels or parting brakes should be
applied to prevent movement of the vehicles during the cementing operation .
iii. The cementing units should be placed at minimum safe distance from well mouth .
iv. Area for placement of cementing units must be cleared from all unwanted material
to avoid obstructi on/injury during laying of HP lines and movement of cementing
personals during cementing oper ation.
v. HP line connections should be properly anchored and avoid crossing of two
discharge HP lines.
vi. All pin ends of the cementing heads should be protected by the use of protectors
during transportation and handling. The cementing head should be tightened
properly to the casing to avoid stripping of head during pressure application.
vii. Safety valves of cementing units/mud pumps should be check ed for operation
at stipulated pressure to ensure safety during operation.
viii. All HP lines should be pressure tested at 1.5 times the maximum pressure
expected during operation.Before testing of HP lines all persons should be vacated
from the vicinity of HP lines .If leakage is observed the pressure should be
released to repair the same.
ix. Entire cementing operation should be controlled by single person (job incharge) to
avoid any confusion during cementing operation.
x. Prior to starting of cementing operation, the job incharge should explain among the
officers and staff engaged in cementing operation about importance and
safety aspects of the job, which involves use of special additives , any expected
problem of the particular job.
xi. During the preparation of mixing water adequate precautions must be taken to avoid
chemical/ additive contact with the skin, eyes or any part of the body. In case of new
chemicals, safety in handling the same should be briefed.
xii. All efforts should be made to avoid execution of the job in night.If cementation job
has to be taken in night adequate lighting arrangement should be made.
xiii. Pressurized lines should not be hammered in any case.
xiv. Prior to dismantling the HP line. Lines must be released to zero.
xv. Transportation of Chicksons HP line valves, cementing head from rig floor should be
done by winch line . Dropping down from rig floor should be strictly prohibited.
Routine testing of cementing equipments
i.All cementing heads, swivels, HP valves, reciprocating hoses and top plugs should be tested

SAFETY
periodically at specified pressure . Date of testing and details should be recorded.

ii. All the fire extinguishers insid the cementing units should be checked for proper
functioning .
Safety in bulk handling plant
i.All cement silos and other pressurized vessel should be pr essure tested at 1.5 times the
working pressure. Safety valves attached to the vessel should be checked for proper
functioning.
ii. Leakage of pressure vessels like silos , loading pot and air reservoir should be
rectified only after releasing the pressure. All valves should be checked for proper
isolation.
iii. The discharge of air dust and cement from vent line should be directed away from
the main are a of operation and preferably in a water pit to avoid air pollution.
iv. Persnnel concerned with bulk handling plant should be equipped with all safety kit like
face mask, dust protectors etc.
v. Air dryer should be used to supply dry air free from moisture to silo which will prevent
checking of lines from lumps.
General safety instruction for cementing discipline
i.Cement mixers should not be moved with more than 12 MT of cement.Bunkers loaded with
20 MT of cement at site should be kept on jack.
ii. All the persons not engaged in the cementing work should be kept away
from cementing operational are a mud/water supply line and main high - pressure
line .
iii. Smoking and light match in the premises of drill site should be prohibited .
iv. While lifting the cabin of cementing vehicles for chassis engine repair, no person
should be allowed to stand underneath the charging pump till the cabin is locke d
and properly clamped in position.

SAFETY
WELL CONTROL
Refer Well Control Manual of IDT, Dehradun.( Annexed)
OTHER DRILLING OPERATIONS:
Refer Drilling Manual of IDT, Dehradun.( Annexed)
WORK OVER OPERATIONS
Work-over operations are carried out on wells for maintaining, restoring or increasing the productivity of
well. Work-over operations should be aimed at protection against damage to human, environment
/natural resource and property and therefore operational safety is the foremost concern on work-over
rigs.
Safe and healthy working conditions, quality of equipment, safe transportation of equipment / personnel
to the well-site, safe operating procedures, proper training, compliance with safety regulations,
company-wide commitment to safety, periodic safety audits, timely inspection and appropriate repair
/maintenance play a major role in safety management and key factors in avoiding accidents. However,
the human factor plays the most vital role as most of the accidents are caused due to human failure.
Refer SAFE OPERATING PRACTICES IN WORKOVER OPERATIONS( Annexed))
SPECIFIC WELL TESTING AND COMPLETION
1.WELL COMPLETION
Once the design well depth is reached, the formation must be tested and evaluated to determine
whether the well will be completed for production, or plugged and abandoned.To complete the well
production, casing is installed and cemented and the drilling rig is dismantled and moved to the next
site.A service rig is brought in to perforate the production casing and run production tubing. If no further
pre-production servicing is needed, the christmas tree is installed and production begins.
Well completion activities include:
o Conducting Drill Stem Test
o Setting Production Casing
o Installing Production Tubing
o Starting Production Flow
o Beam Pumping Units

SAFETY
After production starts, the well may need further servicing.If it's decided that the well will not be
completed, then it will be plugged and abandoned.
Refer SAFE OPERATING PRACTICES IN WORKOVER OPERATIONS ( Annexed)
WELL STIMULATION JOBS

Toinduceandincreaseflowofhydrocarbonsheldinatightreservoir and due to other clogging
aspects, stimulation job is to be carried out. Different types of stimulation activities are being
carried out.
Refer SAFE OPERATING PRACTICES IN Well Stimulation Jobs ( Annexed)
i. SAFETY IN ARTIFICIAL LIFT OPERATIONS

Whenthereservoirisnotenoughfortheformationfluidtoflowbyitselftosurface,artificial means are adopted to
produce oil from the well. The following methodsare usually adopted.
 Sucker Rod Pumps
 GasLift
 Electrical Submersible Pump
i.1. SUCKER ROD PUMPS (SRP)
InthismethodareciprocatingpumploweredonsolidSuckerrodstringtothewellbottomthrough
thetubingandconnectedtothesurfacewithapolishedrodthroughastuffingBox.Thestuffing
boxcontainsrubberpackingswhichsealsaroundpolishedrod.Thepolishedrodishungfromthe
carrierbox,whichinturnisattachedtoHorseHeadbyahangerrope.TheHorseheadthroughan
assemblageofwalking Beam,Sampsonpostequaliserarm,pitmanarmandsetofbearingis
connectedtotheGearBox.Thecompleteassemblyisfittedonaunitbaseandmountedontoa
concretefoundationoraskid.Theelectricprimemovermountedattherearendofunitsupplies
powerthroughVbeltstotheGearbox.Therotativemotionofcrankcranksarmisconvertedinto
reciprocatingmotionwiththecombinationof crankarms,Pitmanarms&walkingbeam and transmitted to the
sub Surface pump through the polished rod and suckerrods.
Inthisoperation,themainhazardisduetomovingpartsoftheunitnamelycrankarms&polished
rodandprimemoverwithV-Belts.Firehazardmayoccurbygasduetosparking.Oilspillage throughstuffingbox
isanotherpotentialhazard to environment.
Thefollowing recommendationsprovideguidanceforsafeoperation.

SAFETY
A. General Precautions
i. TheSRPunitwiththewellshouldbeproperlyfencedsothatnopersonnelorany animalcan approach it
while the unit is in operation.
ii. Proper earthing should be provided to the electric prime mover.
iii. Incaseofanyabnormalnoisetheunitshouldbestoppedimmediatelyandinformtheconcerned
maintenance teams.
iv. Incaseofanyproblemwithstarter/switchboards,thejobstobecarriedoutbycompetentelectrical
supervisors.
v. Anon-returnvalveshouldbeprovidedintheannularline forbleedingof accumulatedGas
periodically.
vi. Ladders/stepsshouldbeprovidedtotheconcretefoundationforeasyapproachtotheprimemover
andcrankendofunit.
vii. Thepolishedrodshouldbeclampedproperlysothatitdoesnothitthehorseheadandstuffing box.
viii. When the horse head is at its lowest position the gap between the rod hanger (carrier bar) and
stuffing box should not be less than 20cms.
ix. The stuffing box should be tested hermetically to its rated pressure at the time of installation.
x. The switchboard/starter should be placed in a closed enclosure at a safe distance from the well.
B. Lowering of SRP subsurface pump
i. While lowering SRP Sub Surface Pump, rotary sleeve should not be gripped on barrel/plunger
of the pump.
ii. SRP BOP should be installed prior to running in or pulling out of SRP (Sub Surface Pump)
iii. All sucker rod joints should be greased prior to tightening.
iv. Tightening should be done with proper size tong against particular type of sucker rod.
v. Average torque applied for tightening should be 450 ft-lbs.
C. Maintenance of SRP unit
The following points should be kept in mind during maintenance of Sucker Rod Pumps:
i. Before attending to any inspection/maintenance jobs, the SRP units should be stopped and the
power supply to the switch board/starter should be cut off.
ii. A periodical greasing and the inspection of all bearings should be carried out viz. central

SAFETY
bearing, Tail bearing, crank pin bearing.

iii. A periodical inspection and the replacement of rubber packings of the stuffing box to be carried
out.
iv. A periodical checking and tightening of all nuts and bolts to be carried out.
v. The level of gear oil should be checked every day and a periodical replacement of the oil to be
done.
vi. In case, it is required to open the stuffing box, it is to be ensured that the SRP stripper (BOP) is
closed and that the hydrostatic head in the well over-balances the bottom hole pressure.
vii. While replacing or changing the position of Crank pin, the unit brake should be locked properly,
the Polished Rod should be unhooked from carrier bar and clamped properly.
i.2. ARTIFICIAL LIFTING OF OIL BY GAS INJECTION
InthismethodHighpressureGasisinjectedintheannulus,throughthereverseflowcheckvalve
andgasliftvalvesintothetubingtoinduceflowofoilfromthewell.Thegasinjectionis regulated at the surface by
Time cycle controller & Diaphragm motor valve or adjustable chokes.
A gas lift installation is usually unmanned and the main hazard is that due to fire. The other hazard
being the failure of pipe line and control valves due to high pressure.
The following precautions are recommended:
A. At the time of installation & commissioning:
 WhileloweringthegasliftvalvefittedtoMandrels,therotaryslipsandtongsfortighteningshouldnotbea
ppliedtothebody ofMandrelor Gasliftvalves.
 Whileunloadingthe well byhighpressureaircompressor forcheckingtheproper
functioningofgasvalves,itshouldbeensuredthattheproperfunctioningofgasvalves,it
shouldensuredthatthedischargelineisanchoredproperly.Alsothecompressorshouldbe
placedatasafedistanceaway from thewell.
 After completion of unloading, the compressed air should be released properly from the
annulus.
B. In case of intermittent gas lift wells:
 The time cycle controller & diaphragm should be placed in a safe encloser and at a safe
distance from well site for easy movement of workover rigs.
 The gas injection line & flow lines alongwith control valves should be tested to a pressure of one
and half times the working pressure before hook up to ensure that there is no leakage in the
lines.

SAFETY
 An area extending upto 15 mts. from the well head should be securely fenced to prevent entry
of unauthorised persons.
C. Maintenance and trouble shooting
Thefollowingprecautionsshouldberecommendedwhilecarryingout maintenance &trouble
shooting :-
 The paraffin chocking of tubing in the gas lift wells should be cleared by use of coil tubing units
through tubing, using suitable liquid. Hot oil circulation & steaming through annulus are not
generally recommended as it might damage the unloading valves.
 While carrying out rocking to rectify stymied valve by using high pressure air compressor, the
flow from the well is to be diverted to a single test separator. The separated air mixed with gas
to be routed directly to flare. For carrying out such operation, the personnel at GGS should be
alerted earlier and should be kept in readiness at the separator.
 For winding to timer clock & checking it's function, the servo gas line should be isolated and
depressurised before hand.
i.3. ARTIFICIAL LIFTING OF OIL BY ELECTRIC SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS (ESP):
InthissystemasetofTendempumps,pumpintake&drivingmotorwithconnectingcableare
loweredinawellontubing.ThesubsurfacecableisconnectedthroughPigTails&minimandrel
ofthewellheadtothesurfacecable andthentoswitchboard.Theinstallationisgenerally unmanned.
Thehazardsinthismethodofliftareduetoelectricityandfire.
Thefollowing precautionsare recommended:-
A. When lowering the electrical submersible pump into the well, it
should be ensured that :
i. Therigmastshouldbeperfectlycenteredforcarryingoutrunningin&pullingout operationofESP.
ii. Theconnectionsofcable tothemotoraremadeproperlyasspecified bythe vendors.
iii. Thecouplings in between the sections of thecompleteassemblyare properlyfitted.
iv. Thespeedofloweringisnotmorethan1.5mtsperminute(onestand/10-12minute).
v. Thecableisclampedtothetubingatevery12-15 ft.
vi. Rotaryslipsandtubingtongs arenotengagedto thecable.
vii. Thecableissuitablyguidedfromthedrumsothatitunwindsuniformlywithoutoverlap
andisnotstretched bythemovementoftheelevatorduringrunning &pullingout operations.
viii. It is to be ensured that no foreign material, particularly the cut piece of cable clamps do not

SAFETY
fall into the well, otherwise this will lead to stuck up during pulling out operation.
ix. When connecting & disconnecting tubings, the electric cable should be safely held by a
metallic hook connected to the derrick/mast.
B. Maintenance and trouble shooting
Afrequentmaintenanceofthismodeofliftisrequiredforsmoothoperations.Thefollowing precautions
are recommendedformaintenanceandtrouble-shootingofthe pump:
i. For rectifyingproblemsofswitchboard,themainpowersupplyshouldbe cutoff.
ii. Competent electrical supervisorsonly toattendsuchelectrical problems.
iii. Theswitchboard(flameproof)withothersurfaceelectricalaccessoriesshouldbeplacedinsidea
safeenclosureat thesafe distanceawayfrom the well.
iv. In caseofaparaffinicwellbesidesregularmechanicalscrapping,useofcoiltubingunitwith
suitableliquidisrecommendedtoclearthetubing choking.
v. In case of circulation by liquid as required the pumping pressure into the annulus should not
exceed 60 kg/cm2. Otherwise, it may damage the subsurface cable connections and mini
mandrel at well head.
i.4. Safety in HOT OIL CIRCULATION JOBS
Hotoilcirculationjobsarerequiredtobetakenperiodicallyinordertoclearthechokedtubings
duetocongealingoftheoilduetoflowcharacteristicsofthecrudeoilparticularlywherethe atmospheric
temperature is low. Theseareessentialroutine jobs to maintain uninterrupted
productionfromwells.Thesafetyprecautionswhiletakinguphotjobsareasgivenbelow.
i. Thehotoilunitshouldbelocatedatadistance of30metersfrom welltowardsupwindside.
ii. Allconnectionsforhotoilcirculationjobsshouldbecheckedthoroughlypriortocommencement
ofthejob.
iii. Firetendershouldbekept standbyduringentire operations.
iv. Theoperatorsassociatedwithsuchjobsmustwearpersonnelprotectiveequipment.
v. Theconnectionsmadeforhotcirculationjobsshouldbedisconnectedonlywhenthetemperature
offlow lines comes down in safe limits aftercompletion of jobs.
vi. Firstaidbox withessentialmedicinesshouldbe availableatsite.

SAFETY
ii. SAFETY IN WELDING AND CUTTING JOBS

ii.1. INTRODUCTION
Hot work is an activity which may produce enough heat to ignite a flammable air - hydrocarbon mixture
or a flammable substance in the oilfield installation. It includes welding, cutting and grinding. Flame
cutting operation, especially when carried out at a height, results in scattering of molten metal over
large area which can lead to ignition of waste material. In this operation the other hazard is from
handling of oxygen and acetylene gas cylinders.
ii.2. QUALIFICATION OF WELDERS
Welders with adequate professional competence and qualification shall only be authorized in writing by
the Manager/ Installation Manager to carry out welding or cutting work. No person other than a
competent welder so authorized in writing shall carry out welding or cutting work requiring use of flame
or electric welding apparatus.
ii.3. HOT WORK PERMIT & PRECAUTIONS TO BE TAKEN DURING HOT JOB
In view of the hazards involved, it is essential that all hot jobs in any classified hazardous area are
regulated by a system of written permits to ensure that safe condition of work are established and
adequate steps are taken to meet any emergency.
i. Permit shall be issued only for a single shift and its validity shall expire at the termination of the
shift. However, where the work has to be continued, the same permit may be revalidated in the
succeeding shift, by authorized person after satisfying the normal checks.
ii. In instances like plant turn around or an activity where work is of continuous nature involving
round the clock activity, blanket Hot Work Permit could be given if the owner-in-charge is fully
satisfied that the conditions are totally safe for the multiple jobs to be performed. But this shall
not be resorted to, especially in highly integrated units.
iii. No welding or cutting work shall be undertaken in hazardous area unless the area is duly
examined and found gas free by a competent person authorized for the purpose. Such
examination shall also be made at frequent intervals during the time welding/ cutting work is in
progress to ensure that the area is kept gas-free. If during any such test, the gas percentage
in the atmosphere exceeds 20% of lower explosive limit (LEL), all welding/cutting works shall
immediately be stopped and the work shall not be restarted till the area is made gas-free.
iv. Before commencing the welding job, ensure that all the cables and earthing connections are as
per the standard welding codes/ practices.
v. During the welding and cutting operations, it shall be ensured that all flammable material, oil
grease, oil-soaked earth are removed from the area.

SAFETY
vi. No matches, lighters, or smoking apparatus or any other source capable of igniting flammable
gas shall be present at or around the place of hot work, except the use of any suitable device
for the purpose of lighting or re-lighting the welding torch.
vii. Adequate number of fire extinguishers and other fire fighting arrangements shall be kept
readily available for immediate use.
viii. Pyrophoric substances may be present in operating area / equipment handling hydrocarbon.
Iron sulphide scale is the most common pyrophoric substance encountered. These shall be
either removed to safe locations or kept wet all the time to prevent their auto-ignition.
ix. After completion or stoppage of the job, the person to whom the permit was issued, shall
thoroughly check the area for clearing of debris, removal of temporary electrical installations
etc. and then shall sign the work permit and return it to the issuer.
x. The issuer on receiving back the permit would satisfy himself regarding completion of the job
and that the area has been cleaned. Then he shall also sign the permit and keep the records
for two years.
ii.3.1. Welding in Confined Space
i. System should be positively isolated from source of hydrocarbon by blind flange or spectacle
blind. The vessel should be thoroughly washed by overflowing with water. The vessel should
also be tagged with process lock out tag.
ii. Adequate arrangement for ventilation and lighting with self-contained portable hand lamps
shall be made.
iii. The welder shall be provided with and use self-contained breathing apparatus, safety belt and
a life line. Entry with an air-supplied mask may be permitted with LEL of up to 20%. The
oxygen level should be at least 19.5 % vol. and the concentration of toxic gases below the
threshold limits
iv. When operations are carried out in confined space, adequate ventilation by mechanical means
is constantly provided to prevent accumulation of flammable gas.
ii.3.2. Welding on piping
Before welding or cutting of piping, which contains flammable liquid or gas, the pipe shall be
disconnected and blinded. A closed valve should not be considered as a positive block.
Pipeline is required to be isolated, drained and purged with inert gas or filled with water before
undertaking hot work. Adequate precautions shall be taken against build-up of pressure in the
line while hot work is in progress.

SAFETY
ii.3.3. Welding Booth (Safety Barrier)

During the welding and cutting operations, sparks and molten spatter are formal which
sometimes fly considerable distances. Sparks have also fallen through cracks, pipe holes, or
other small openings in floors and partitions, starting fires in other areas which temporarily may
go unnoticed. For these reasons, welding or cutting should not be done near flammable
materials unless every precaution is taken to prevent ignition.
Welding Booth:-
 It is a facility, i.e. a room, designed for welding or a temporary compartment of flexible
non- combustible flame resistant curtains. It is used to separate flammables if any in
the surroundings from the welding arcs. It shall act as a Safety Barrier during welding
process.
 Fire resistant curtain is to be used which should be in good & always in wet condition.
Preferably asbestos curtain are to be avoided.
 The lower edges of the curtain walls are spaced at a distance above the floor to allow
free communication of air between the compartments such that outside air may be
drawn into the compartment from the area beneath the curtains. The temporary
compartment is to remain open from top. Thus, air drawn through a compartment will
proceed in an inward and upward direction directly past a work station within the
compartment. The operator within the compartment is protected from inhaling the
fumes present in nearly all forms of welding operations.
Safety Guidelines:-
 Welding sparks can cause fire or explosion and can easily go through small cracks
and openings or spray up to 35 feet to adjacent areas. Remove fire hazards from the
welding area or cover them with a fire-resistant shield if necessary. Do not weld near
unshielded fuel or hydraulic lines.
 Booth construction shall not block access to any fire/life safety equipment and shall not
impede exit access, exit doors or aisles.
 Booth shall be made before every welding job, where presence of flammables in the
surrounding area can not be totally eliminated.
 Cross-ventilation should not be blocked, and welding should not be done in a confined
space without proper ventilation.

SAFETY
ii.4. DOS AND DONTS FOR WELDING & CUTTING OPERATIONS:

Dos
i.Ensure that all flammable material, oil, grease, oil soaked earth are removed from the area
ii.Ensure that no matches, lighters which are not appropriate or smoking apparatus or any other
source capable of lighting flammable gas is present at or around the place of work
iii.Ensure adequate number of foam or dry chemical type fire extinguisher are readily available for
immediate use
iv.Ensure adequate ventilation while carrying out welding/ cutting job in confined space
v.While carrying out operations on pipelines which contained flammable liquid, ensure that the pipe
is disconnected or blinded, the line is isolated, drained or purged with inert gas or water before
welding or cutting job is done. Also take adequate precaution against built up of pressure in the
line.
vi.Ensure those flash back arrestors are fitted at the end of cutting torch & at the Gas cylinder.
vii.Ensure the proper earthing of portable Gen set, if power is used from portable generator during
welding/cutting job
viii.Ensure that pressure gauge on the oxygen & acetylene cylinder is in working condition before the
start of the job.
ix.Check the pressure of oxygen and acetylene cylinders prior to start the job.
x.Always use approved Welding helmet and safety glasses, welding screen, face mask, gloves,
proper safety shoes and overalls while carrying out welding/ cutting job.
xi.Check the Work area, equipment and lines for combustible and/or toxic gas prior to starting the
welding/ cutting job. Gas cutting cylinders should have flash back arresters ( two numbers on
each cylinder total four numbers)
xii.Always close the hot work permit once the welding/ cutting job is completed.
Don‟ts
i.Do not carry any welding or cutting job in hazardous area unless hot work permit is issued by the
manager or installation manager.
ii.Do not carry out welding operation near oil soaked earth.
iii.Do not carry out welding/ cutting job unless you are a competent welder authorized in writing by the
mines manager or installation manager.
iv.Never carry out welding without using proper PPE.

SAFETY
v.Avoid rapid cooling of the weld area.

vi.Never undertake welding/ cutting job in hazardous area unless the area is duly examined and
found gas free.
ii.5. PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT & FIRST AID
i. Welders shall wear fire-resistant protective clothing and equipment such as fire-resistant
gloves, aprons, helmets and goggles, with suitable filter lenses.
ii. When toxic fumes are likely to be produced, the welder shall be provided with suitable
breathing apparatus. It shall be ensured that the welder is adequately trained in the use of
breathing apparatus.
iii. Where persons are likely to be exposed to harmful radiation or heat rays from electric arc
welding, they shall be protected by suitable screens.
iv. During radiography test after welding, persons handling the radiography equipments shall use
protective kits. Other person working there shall remain away (minimum 30 m from the source)
so that they are not exposed to radiation hazard.
iii. SAFETY IN USE OF GAS/ AIR COMPRESSION SYSTEM

iii.1. INTRODUCTION
Compressed air can cause severe personal injures, because of its pressure inside. As such it could
result in:
 Dust, swarf and grit blown into the eyes;
 A burst hose whipping about and can cause severe physical injury.
 If compressed air is applied to equipment not designed to take the pressure, severe
damage can result.
iii.2. HEALTH & SAFETY HAZARDS
Compressed air is dangerous from health and safety point of view. The hazards associated with it are
described below:
i. Air forced into the tissues or blood stream via the skin can cause an air embolism, which can
be fatal if it reaches the heart, lungs or brain.
a. Air can enter the body through the pores of the skin

SAFETY
ii. Inflation injuries of the intestine can be caused by air being directed at the anus. The act of
horseplay can cause death.
a. Air blown into the mouth can, at merely 5 psi, rupture the esophagus, or the lungs
iii. Eye and ear injuries can occur from a blast of air or flying particles. These types of eye and ear
injuries can cause blindness and deafness.
a. The sound from a compressed air hose can reach 120-130 decibels, which is well
above permissible 90 dB permissible exposure limit.
b. 40 psi can blow out an eardrum 4 inches away from the ear, and possibly cause brain
damage.
c. As little as 12 psi can blow an eye out of its socket.
iv. Flying particles can cause cuts and bruises to any part of the body.
iii.3. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
i. All pipes, hoses, and fittings must have a rating of the maximum working pressure of the
compressor. Compressed air pipelines should be identified (psi) as to maximum working
pressure.
ii. Air supply shutoff valves should be located (as near as possible) at the point-of-operation.
iii. Air hoses should be kept free of grease and oil to reduce the possibility of deterioration.
iv. Hoses should not be strung across floors or aisles where they are liable to cause personnel to
trip and fall. When possible, air supply hoses should be suspended overhead, or otherwise
located to afford efficient access and protection against damage.
v. Hose ends must be secured to prevent whipping if an accidental cut or break occurs.
vi. Pneumatic impact tools, such as riveting guns, should never be pointed at a person.
vii. Before a pneumatic device is disconnected (unless it has quick disconnect plugs), the air
supply must be turned off at the control valve and the tool bled.
viii. Compressed air must not be used under any circumstances to clean dirt and dust from clothing
or off a person‟s skin. Shop air used for cleaning should be regulated to 15 psi unless
equipped with diffuser nozzles to provide lesser pressure.
ix. Goggles, face shields or other eye protection must be worn by personnel using compressed air
for cleaning equipment.

SAFETY
x. Static electricity can be generated through the use of pneumatic system. This type of
equipment must be grounded or bonded if it is used where fuel, flammable vapors or explosive
atmospheres are present.
xi. All components of compressed air systems should be inspected regularly by qualified and
trained employees.
iii.4. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Dos :
i. Inspect hoses and couplings before use, discard damaged items. Ensure that 'quick
couplings' are properly locked together.
ii. Ensure before connecting an airline that the equipment is designed to withstand the supply
pressure.
iii. Ensure that contamination of the air supply cannot occur through back flow from plant at a
higher pressure.
iv. Shut off the air supply and bleed off the pressure before disconnecting the hose.
v. Wear proper Personal Protective Equipment:
vi. Use Safety glasses with side shields, and preferably a face shield
vii. Use Hearing protection
viii. Use Respiratory protection, depending on the materials being worked with.
DO NOTs :
i. Improvise with jubilee clips, use only properly designed hose connectors.
ii. Use compressed air to clear up swarf, fillings, dust, etc. even low pressure can blow the
particles into eyes, ear or skin of people nearby.
iii. Dust yourself down with a compressed air line.
iv. Indulge in 'horseplay' with the air hose.
iv. LABORATORY SAFETY & CHEMICAL HANDLING SYSTEM

iv.1. OBJECTIVE
The aim of this topic is to bring out the HSE aspects of “Laboratories of ONGC andguidelines to
take remedial measures”.

SAFETY
iv.2. LOCATION & LAYOUT

i. While selecting the location, due consideration should be given for hazards from nearby plant
facilities assessed through Risk Analysis.
ii. The laboratory should have separately earmarked rooms for storage of chemicals, reagents,
samples, glassware & bottle washing. It is preferable to segregate testing facilities for
hydrocarbons & gases, water and effluents. The layout on the basis of a central corridor or
circulation aisle, with laboratory space/rooms on either side, is a preferred design.
iii. Microbiological section of the laboratory should be segregated and well-ventilated for
maintaining hygienic conditions.
iv. The sitting place for the investigators and other support personnel should be separate from
working area.
iv.3. WORK BENCHES / FUME CUPBOARDS
i. The workbenches should be modular (equal size), moveable and adjustable for height keeping
in view good aesthetics and convenience. Workbenches should be fixture supported by
cupboards & drawers with room for knee space. Bench top should be made of material
resistant to fire and chemicals. Standard bench level height is 90 cm.
ii. Standing or sitting near workbench should neither cast a shadow on the bench nor should one
have to look up into the glare from the window. Workbenches should, therefore, be planned
always at right angles to the window wall and lighting should be accordingly oriented.
Sunscreen shades /films should be provided to minimise glare from windows.
iii. Facilities like shelves, fume cupboard etc. should be laid as per standard engineering practices
to avoid over-crowding. The reagents shelves should be easily accessible and should not be
unduly high. These shelves should be provided with beading to prevent bottles falling off due to
vibration. The shutter pans should be made of shatterproof / reinforced glass. The vent height
of the cupboard should be up to the top of the building.
iv. Floor should be resistant to fire & chemicals and made of anti-skid material. There should be
no fittings on the floor that would hinder / obstruct free movement. Sinks and drains should be
made of chemically resistant material and the drains should be properly trapped and vented.
Labs handling mercury should have black granite flooring and where electrical equipments are
handled flooring should have rubber mats.
v. Each laboratory should be provided with efficient fume cupboards, sufficiently large to permit
complete enclosure of apparatus normally used and provide with a sink for the washing of the
apparatus used for handling toxic materials. For Laboratories where large numbers of
digestions are to be carried out, a separate enclosure equipped with efficient fume cupboard
may be provided. The cupboard should not be too deep to make the access difficult. The
controls of the service connections should be provided outside the cupboard. The fume

SAFETY
cupboard should have corrosion-proof fittings. It should be adequately illuminated. It is

preferable to provide a small window in the front shutter. This facilitates easy manipulation of
samples / equipment inside the fume cupboard, without lifting the main shutter always. The
cupboard should be designed in such a way that there is strong upward draught even when the
shutter is open and there is no chance of any fumes entering the laboratory. This can be
achieved by having baffle at the back. In rooms, where work with extremely poisonous gases is
done, it is advisable to have an air inlet at the bottom (balanced-draught cupboard) so
arranged as to sweep everything to exhaust. For fume cupboard, the exhaust fan should be
able to create a free velocity of 30 meter per minute at normal working height. Cupboard of
highly toxic materials require higher face velocities.
vi. Vapours of heavier hydrocarbons like waxy gas oil, LSHS, Furnace oil samples get condensed
and deposited on the top of the fume hood. RCR /CCR tests, involving naked flame should,
therefore, be carried out in a separate fume cupboard to prevent fire hazard. Hot concentrated
perchloric acid should be handled in separate fume cupboards where its vapour does not
contact any organic matter.
iv.4. VENTILATION
i. Effective ventilation should be ensured for instant removal of hazardous vapours generated
inside the laboratory. Forced ventilation, single pass once-through type should be considered
with about 10-12 changes of whole air per hour, preferably by having in the layout a central
corridor or a circulation aisle. Rooms should be cool, dry and well ventilated. Exhaust ports for
bottom ventilation should be provided, wherever heavier gases are likely to be present /
generated. While designing the ventilation/ exhaust system, the following guiding points
should be taken into consideration:
ii. Exhaust facility should be capable of replenishing continuously fresh air for purging out the
hazardous fumes / vapours.
iii. The location of exhaust facility should be such that the light hydrocarbon vapours do not travel
to exhaust via high temperature side of the bench.
iv. Whenever a new test is introduced, prompt review should follow regarding its impact on the
exhaust system of vapours especially from safety and corrosion angle.
v. Fume hoods should be located in the lab at draught free position.
vi. Bottle washing room should be well ventilated.
iv.5. EMERGENCY EXIT
i. Emergency exits should be provided at strategic locations. If possible, each laboratory room
should have two easily accessible, hindrance free exits.
ii. All exits should be properly displayed and marked with self glowing signage.

SAFETY
iii. Doors to corridors from laboratory should swing in the direction of the exit.
iv. No material/ unused furniture should be stacked blocking emergency exit.
iv.6. STORAGE AND HANDLING OF MATERIAL / SAMPLES
Guidelines are detailed in chapter on „Hazardous Chemicals‟. However, some additional guidelines
are enlisted below:
i. Material Safety Data Sheet provided by the manufacturers should be used as guidelines for
safe storage of any chemical being handled in laboratory.
ii. Storage of hazardous/ inflammable materials should be need-based and limited to bare
minimum for carrying out the Laboratory work and as far as possible it should be stored away
from working area.
iii. The store should be protected from heat and direct sunlight. However, it should be well lit and
ventilated with proper exhaust to prevent built up of the concentration of hazardous/ poisonous
gases/ vapours.
iv. Store room for hydrocarbon samples requires special care due to flammable vapour generated
by low boiling point hydrocarbon. These vapours, generally heavier than air, are likely to build
up concentration at ground level. Bottom exhaust should be provided for release of such
flammable vapours. The racks and flooring should be made of material, which is resistant to
fire. Portable gas detector should be made available and maintained for periodically checking
the presence of hydrocarbon. Smoke detectors should be installed.
v. Electrical fittings as well as electrical equipment in store room where inflammable material is
stored should be flame-proof.
vi. Everyone working in Laboratory should be made aware of the adverse effects of hazardous
chemicals on potential exposure during their working in the laboratory.
vii. Based on the compatibility of chemicals, their storage must be planned. An illustrative list of
Incompatible chemicals is given in Annexure-I.
viii. Each bottle/container, whether big or small, having chemical in it, should be properly labelled
for its clear identification with name of the chemical, the concentration and the hazard colour
code etc. The colour codes for hazards should be in line with chapter no. 5.5 on handling of
Hazardous Materials. Such information from original container should be transcribed on to the
tags on the secondary/smaller containers like spray bottles/ sample bottles.
ix. In case of storage & handling of poisonous substances, a separate stock & issue register
should be maintained and the inventory of poisonous substances should be kept bare
minimum for sustaining laboratory operations.

SAFETY
x. Since water reactive materials react spontaneously when comes in contact with water, it is
hazardous to fight fire in these chemicals using water; instead DCP should be used.. List of
chemicals / materials stored should be displaced at appropriate / prominently visible location.
iv.7. DISPOSAL OF SAMPLES AND CHEMICALS
Safe disposal of hazardous and non-biodegradable waste is legal and statutory requirement. Therefore
a waste disposal procedure should be developed for safe disposal and incorporated in the operating
manual of QHSE document. Waste materials generated in a laboratory can be broadly classified as
„Solid Wastes‟ and „Liquid Wastes‟. These can be further categorized as hazardous, biodegradable and
non biodegradable wastes. While the leftover gas samples like fuel gas should be discharged to safe
height through the fume hood.
A. Solid and Liquid wastes
All solid wastes generated in a laboratory should be carefully screened and segregated based
on their toxic effects to device proper disposal methodology/ procedure.
Segregated Hazardous waste including toxic chemicals, should be properly labelled and
disposed as per the safe disposal procedure meeting the statutory requirements. There are
MoEF guidelines and state pollution control board approved common hazardous waste
disposal agencies for safe disposal of Hazardous and non – biodegradable wastes. The
laboratory should take membership of such agency and dispose Hazardous and non–
biodegradable wastes through them only.
B. E – waste management
If e-waste generated in big quantity is not segregated properly and not disposed off safely, may
create severe environmental problems. The e-waste generated in laboratories mainly consists
of compact discs, empty printer cartridges/ toner cases, magnetic tapes etc. Efforts should be
made to re-use or recycle these e-wastes otherwise it should be disposed off through
authorized agency as per CPCB guidelines. An E-waste policy guideline has been issued by
CHSE, ONGC which may be reffered to:
iv.8. SAFETY IN LABORATORY
A. Safety in geology processing lab
Processing Lab of Geology processes sediment samples for geological studies and uses some
harmful acids/ chemicals. The acidisation of sediment samples should always be done in
fuming chamber. The lab should also have exhaust fans / proper ventilation system so that
fresh air is kept on circulation regularly.
B. Safety in core house
Core house of the geology laboratory is the depository of very much valuable cores collected
from exploratory wells for further geological studies. These require many safety precautions

SAFETY
while retrieving out and/ or putting back after taking certain portion for study. Following safety
precautions should be taken while handling the core boxes and cutting the core plugs:
i. Personnel must use safety shoes, helmet and cotton hand gloves while taking out or putting in
the core boxes from core racks.
ii. They must use wheeled trolley for the movement of core boxes from one place to other.
iii. While handling core boxes ladder safety rules as given below should be adhered.
iv. They must wear ear plugs/ muffs and safety goggles while cutting core plugs if noise level is
beyond permissible limits.
v. Regular pest control treatment should be carried out to control snakes and other pests.
iv.9. SAMPLING / LABELLING / TAGGING
All samples should be properly tagged with date, time, type of product, source and test required.
Proper labelling/ tagging are very essential for maintaining unique identification of the sample.
iv.10. SAFETY BRIEFINGS
Whenever a visitor visits the lab he/ she should be briefed about safety precautions to be taken by him
to avoid any untoward incident.
iv.11. PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
i. The following equipment should be available for personal protection in a laboratory:
ii. Safety goggles and face/fume masks should be used appropriately while handling harmful
fumes/ vapours.
iii. Suitable type of aprons of PVC, rubber or cotton should be used to protect against specific
hazards.
iv. Protective hand gloves made of cotton, rubber, PVC, etc. should be worn while handling sharp
objects or hazardous substances including chemicals, glassware etc.
v. Proper gloves and face shield to be worn while handling extremely low temperature items and
materials like solid carbon dioxide or liquid nitrogen.
vi. Equipment like fire blankets, eye wash devices, safety showers, breathing apparatus, helmets,
first-aid kit and gas masks should be available for specialized protection and all personnel
should be aware of their location and use. Equipment should be checked and maintained
regularly.
vii. Earmuffs/ plugs should be used in noise prone area like Core cutting room.

SAFETY
viii. Oxygen mask/ respirators should be used while handling with experiments which generate
harmful/ fatal gases like Hydrogen Sulphide, Ammonia etc.
iv.12. OTHER RECOMMENDED PRACTICES
i. All chemicals in the laboratory are to be considered harmful. Avoid handling chemicals with
bare fingers. Do not taste, or smell any chemicals.
ii. Check the label on all chemical bottles twice before removing any of the contents. Never
return unused chemicals to their original container.
iii. The entire laboratory should be declared a "NO SMOKING ZONE" and should be prominently
displayed on important places.
iv. No employee should work alone in a laboratory while performing a task that is considered
usually hazardous in nature.
v. Lab may have National Board for Accreditation of Laboratories (NABAL) accreditation.
vi. A new test should be introduced only after review of the associated hazards, associated risk,
documentation and training.
vii. For operating equipment, the recommendations of the original equipment manufacturer should
be followed strictly.
viii. Rubber tubing used inside the laboratory for connecting equipment should be periodically
checked along with the associated valves and replaced, to prevent leakage of flammable
gases. Checking of leakage should be carried out with soap solution periodically.
ix. Report any accident (spill, breakage, etc.) or injury (cut, burn, etc.) to the safety officer/ In-
charge Lab immediately, no matter how trivial it seems. Do not panic. The guidelines given in
Chapter no. 5.15 on “Accident / incident reporting, investigation and analysis” of this HSE
Management System should be followed.
x. If a chemical splash in your eye(s) or on your skin, immediately flush with running water for at
least 20 minutes. Eatable should not be stored in areas where exposure to toxic material is
likely.
xi. Hands should be washed before eating and clothes should be changed immediately if they get
soaked with oil or chemical and affected part of the body should be flushed with sufficient
quantity of water.
xii. Skin contact or inhalation of harmful substances should be avoided.

SAFETY
iv.13. SPECIAL CHARACTERISTICS & INCOMPATIBILITY OF COMMON LABORATORY

CHEMICALS
i. Safe handling of chemicals require careful consideration of relevant characteristics like
spontaneous ignition, flash point, decomposition with catalyst and heat, explosive nature,
reactive, oxidising nature etc.
ii. HSE Audit of laboratory
iii. Periodic audit of HSE performance of lab should be conducted regularly and corrective &
preventive action should be taken on Observations / recommendations given by HSE audit
team. Timely ATR should be submitted on HSE audit observations.
v. MATERIAL HANDLING SYSTEM

v.1. MANUAL LIFTING- SAFETY TIPS
Protect Yourself
 Use the correct hand protection; wear gloves to prevent cuts.
 Wear safety shoes to prevent injury to your feet from a dropped item.
Size up the Load
 Determine if you can carry a load comfortably; tip it on its side.
 Get help if the load is too big or bulky for one person
 Check for nails, splinters, rough strapping, and rough edges.
Lift It Right
 Make sure your footing is solid.
 Keep your back straight, with no curving or slouching.
 Centre your body over your feet.
 Get a good grasp on the object and pull it close to you.
 Lift with your legs, not your back.
 Move your feet to turn. Don‟t twist your back.
Tough Lifting Jobs

SAFETY
 Oversized Loads
 Don‟t try to carry a big load alone. Ask for help.
 Work as a team. Lift, walk, and lower the load together.
 Let one person give the directions and direct the lift.
High Loads
 Use a step stool or a sturdy ladder to reach loads that are above your shoulders.
 Get as close as you can to the load.
 Slide the load toward you.
 Do all the work with your arms and legs, not your back.
Low Loads
 Loads that are under racks and cabinets need extra care.
 Pull the load toward you, and then try to support it on your knee before you lift.
 Use your legs to power the lift.
Power Carrying Tips
 Make sure your footing is firm.
 Ensure enough clearance at doorways to keep your hands and fingers safe.
 Check your route for hazards.
 Take extra care at platforms, loading docks, ramps, and stairs.
 Carry long loads on your shoulders, with front end high.
 Make sure the next person has a firm grip before you hand off the load.
 When you carry with others, everyone should carry the load on the same shoulder,
walk in step, and put the load down as a team.

SAFETY
Back Safety Tips

 Wear the right personal protective equipment for lifting and carrying.
 Lift with your legs, not your back; pivot, don‟t twist.
 Get help with tough lifting jobs.
 Spend a few minutes each day before work on power warm-ups.
 Exercise regularly to keep your back strong and healthy.
 Eat right, stay slender, and cut down on stress to avoid back injuries.
v.2. PERSONAL PROTECTION
Various types of hand gloves could be used while handling variety of materials:
Leather Handling of chemicals
Soft leather Welding work,Handling of ethylene, propylene or L.P.G. (to prevent cold
burns).
Rubber Electrical Work
v.3. MECHANICAL LIFTING
Safe Slinging
 Do not exceed safe working load.
 Select multi-leg slings and hook the slings.
 Use correct pins in shackles.
 All links should be free on hooks.
 Ensure load is stable.
 Ensure there are no sharp bends/kinks in wires.
 Plumb crane over the load.
 Use proper signals and never pass a load over another person's head.
 Do not ride on the load being lifted.
 Unload the load on safe foundation/ground.

SAFETY
Other precautions are:

 Select the right sling for the job.
 Inspect slings prior to use, .
 Remember the effect of sling angles on load capacities.
 Properly store slings when finished to avoid damage.
v.3.1. Safe Use Practices
 Slings should be stored off the floor and hung on racks whenever possible in a clean,
dry environment.
 Never drag slings across the floor.
 Always hook with a “closed hook” arrangement (hooks facing out).
 Never shock load slings.
 Keep loads balanced to prevent overloading slings.
 Always lift loads straight up.
 Never rest a load on a sling, or pinch a sling between the load and the floor.
 Sling should not be pulled from under a load when the load is resting on the sling.
 Make sure the hook is always over the center of gravity of the load before lifting it
 Do not apply a load to a twisted, knotted or kinked chain.
 Do not force or hammer hooks or chains into position.
 Hands and Fingers shall not be placed between the sling and the load while the sling
is being tightened around the load.
 Clean chains regularly as dirt and grit can cause excessive wear at the link bearing
points.
 Never shorten a sling with knots, bolts or other makeshift devices.
 Protect the chain‟s surface from contact with sharp corners, which can cause
permanent damage through gouging or abnormal stress and wear

SAFETY
v.3.2. Safe selection and use of ropes

A. Fibre Ropes
Ropes are of two types, fibre ropes and wire ropes. Fibre ropes are used extensively in
handling and moving materials. There ropes are generally made from manila or nylon.
i. Extreme care must be taken while selecting ropes from its different types, rope condition,
behaviour of ropes affected due to exposure to moisture, acids etc. and depending on the risk
factors to life and equipment or machineries.
ii. Ropes must be selected depending on its working load. But one must be very careful about the
dynamic loading of the rope. Dynamic loading occurs when a rope is used for lifting load and
while doing so the load is stopped, moved on swung. Hence the use of rope in making safety
belts, life lines, towing line etc. may be examined to ensure that its prescribed working load is
not crossed and in such use load it is often subjected to dynamic loading. The effect of
dynamic loading is more on the ropes made from manila than that made from nylon.
iii. Inspection procedure for ropes should include thorough checking of the ropes for any damage
or defect before being used. The inspection should be done on the entire rope length. Ropes
while subjected to regular use should be inspected once every month if used for normal lifting
purposes. But ropes used to hang sling scaffolds or any other use where dynamic loading is
possible, should be checked more often. The typical rope conditions for inspection could be a
wear, an abrasions, broken or cut fibres, displacement of strands, discolouration, rolting or size
variations etc.
iv. The ropes exposed to acids should not be used for any critical use. While in use, it is to be
seen that the fibre ropes are not dragged on ground to avoid any damage to the fibres due to
abrasions.
v. The most dangerous deteriorating condition of fibre rope is the “Kinking”. Kinking may stress
the fibres beyond its limit. So to avoid kinking of fibre rope while uncoiling it, rope should be
laid on ground with the bottom end up and should be unwounded anti-clockwise by pulling the
bottom end of rope.
vi. It has also been noticed that sharp bends over a cone surface can cause much rope tension
on fibres. It is for this purpose advisable to use round object for fastening the rope. If rope is
twisted, the twist must be retained in handling. In joining the ropes, help of splicing technique
should be used and in no case a knotting should be done, as it has been seen that splicing can
retain rope strength upto 100% , whereas knotting retains only 50% of its strength.
vii. Ropes, while not in use, should be stored in a dry place away from moisture and acid fumes.
Use of metal cladded ropes can be dangerous if used near power line.
viii. The most severe deterioration of fibre rope occurs when the rope is subjected to wetting and
drying alternately. Such conditions must be avoided for better use of rope.

SAFETY
B. Wire Ropes
Wire rope has greater strength and has been more durable than the fibre rope. Wire rope does
not change its physical characteristic in conditions of moisture and acid fumes and in other
environment.Wire rope is composed of steel wires, strands and core. Wire rope can also
deteriorate due to various causes. These are:
i. Corrosion: It can occur when a rope is subjected to wetting and in presence of acids.
ii. Wear: Wear of rope is possible on the crown or outside wires.
iii. Kinks: Kinks is possible due to improper winding of a new rope.
iv. Fatigue: Fatigue can be caused by bending stresses from sheaves and drums of small
radii, due to vibration or torsion etc.
v. Lubrication dry out: Lubrication dry out can occur when the wire rope is subjected to heat
or pressure.
vi. Overloading: This is most dangerous cause of wire rope failure. Overloading occurs when
a wire rope is subjected to dynamic loading, as discussed earlier.
vii. Mechanical causes: Mechanical causes also deteriorate the wire rope condition. These
occurs due to careless handling (e.g. dragging on ground or on abrasive surface) of wire
ropes.
viii. Over winding: Over winding occurs when the length of the wire rope is more than the drum
can accommodate in one layer.
The above mentioned deteriorating causes for wire ropes must be eliminated for safe use of
rope.
v.3.3. Hook, Shackles, Eyebolts and Chains
i. Use crane hooks with sling within an angle of 900.
ii. Use a 'D' or 'Bow' shackle to connect more than two thimbles.
iii. Check that the angle of the slings is connected before lifting.
iv. Use a shackle or ring and a pair of shackles when fitting slings to a hook.
v. Fit a shackle between lifting hook and eye bolts to reduce strain on the hook.
vi. Always tighten eyebolts to the correct position.
v.3.4. Lift Trucks (LT) i.e. Cranes/Fork Lifts etc.

SAFETY
i. Consult and observe manufacturer's safe operating procedures for Lift Trucks.
ii. Take stock of unladen weight, capacity, load, centre distance and maximum lift height,
before operating lift trucks.
iii. Never add to counter weight.
iv. Never run over cables as flexible pipes etc.
v. Do not allow persons to walk under loads.
vi. Travel slowly and carefully down slopes.
vii. Do not leave lift truck on gradients unattended.
viii. Never use L.T. as a working platform.
ix. Check L.T. before use every day.
x. Maintain the backward tilt of the mast (enough to stabilize load).
xi. Keep the jerk low (4 to 6 inches from the ground) and backward tilt, to aid stability of Fork
Lifts when laden.
xii. Get someone to guide on ramps.
xiii. Look in the direction of travel - for obstructions etc.
xiv. Avoid sudden starts, stop and turns.
xv. Watch backward when turning.
xvi. Check for weak floors, soft ground, pot holes and skid patches like oil, loose sand and
gravel etc.
xvii. Use extra care on high stacks and watch for unstable loads.
xviii. Park cranes/LTs with hand-brakes on, control forks flat on ground, ignition/power switched
off and key removed.
 While parking LTs, do not obstruct access to roads, working areas and
railways etc.
v.3.5. Chain-Pulley Blocks
i. Portable chain hoists are used for lifting purposes to raise or lower materials. But the chain
hoist should be hooked on a monorail trolley or originally fabricated with the trolley. Chain
hoists can be of spur- geared type, differential geared type and screw geared types.

SAFETY
ii. Spur geared type of chain hoists facilitates easy pick up of load. But the problem with this
type of hoist is that it is free running and load can come down easily, if not stopped by an
automatic braking arrangement in order to hold back the load from coming down rapidly. In
this case also, periodic inspection of hooks, chains, brakes should be carried out.
iii. All lifting tools and tackles must be checked as per applicable regulations, codes &
requirements. The SWL should be marked on the chain hoist body. All such chain hoists
should be checked for wear, malfunctioning and damage.
v.3.6. Mobile Cranes
i. Accidents of different types, starting from hitting by the boom or load to over turning of
cranes or overrunning have occurred. Hence, adequate precautions must be taken for safe
use of mobile cranes. A crane boom should not be swung too fast so that it can cause
upset of crane and the swinging load may hit a person or an object. Cranes should not be
moved or operated on a soft ground or sloppy ground. Care for crane movement adjacent
to an excavated area should necessarily be taken, as it may cause trench or excavation
collapse.
ii. While lifting the load, the hook should be positioned at the centre of the load so that
swinging is avoided while lifting it. Cranes when operated at a high angle with the boom,
there is possibility for the load to hit the boom and damage it. Hence in such situation,
adequate care is to be taken by the operator.
iii. While operating the crane near any overhead power lines, extreme care should be taken to
see that the crane does not operate and the boom does not come within the safe
clearance from overhead lines. Such type of electrical accidents occurred in past. The
minimum safe clearance from electric power line is depended on the voltage. For example
for a 50 KV line, the minimum safe clearance would be maintained at least 3 meters.
iv. Another important aspect in safe crane operation is that the essential crane signalling
should be done by a competent person as any wrong signalling is bound to invite
accidents. While continuing the discussions on cranes being used near overhead power
lines, operator must be trained to act in the event of any accidental contact of the crane
boom with the overhead lines. It is advisable for the operator to stay on the crane only and
not to panic in such situation till he is rescued by others.
A. Operator‟s Responsibility
Operators of cranes should be experienced and should meet the following requirements:
i. Be able to read and understand operating instructions.
ii. Be able to understand the load charged.
iii. Be able to understand about the functioning of the safety devices.

SAFETY
iv. Be able to understand hand signal code used.

v. Have eye sight and hearing that are normal and have no known physical deficiency
such as epilepsy or heart condition that would be detrimental to safe operation of
cranes.
vi. Have proper muscular co-ordination, depth perception and reaction time.
B. Initial Inspection And Testing
All new or substantially repaired or altered cranes should be inspected by a competent person
and tested to ensure that they comply with manufacturers load rating and are operationally
satisfactory. The crane should be put to use only when the test results are satisfactory. The
results of every such inspection and test should be recorded in a register by the person making
the test.
C. Safe Working Load
Safe working load on the crane at each radius of the jib should be not more than 90% of the
test load, but in no case should the rated capacity loads be exceeded. The safe working load
of the crane should be legibly marked on it. A scale or weight indicator should be available
which can be used to determine weight or unknown load to be lifted.
D. Safety Features
i. Every crane should be provided with a ready means of escape from its operating cab.
ii. The crane should be equipped with audible warning system.
iii. A dry chemical power type fire extinguisher should be provided within easy reach of the
operator.
iv. First-aid-box with medicines should be available in the operators cabin and lights should
be provided on the crane boom/support structure.
v. Safety limit switches must be available in working condition in all the cranes and all
controls shall be operative.
vi. Couplings and gears shall be provided with adequate guards.
vii. The spark arrester is to be fitted in the exhaust silencer wherever applicable.
viii. Slings which are to be used for lifting should be checked and inspected whether any
damage, torn or twist.
ix. Wooden logs/planks used for jacking up should be pre-selected to withstand load.
E. Inspection & Maintenance

SAFETY
Daily Inspection
The following items of crane should be visually inspected daily or before its use if not used
everyday, to ensure that the crane is in safe working order:
i. All controlled mechanism for mal-adjustment interfering with proper operation.
ii. All safety devices inspected for mal-function.
iii. Leakage in air or hydraulic system.
iv. Crane hooks for deformation or cracks.
v. Electrical apparatus for mal-function.
vi. Crane booms and running ropes to make sure they have not been accidentally damaged.
vii. Wire ropes and rope slings for excessive wear, broken wires and kinks.
Monthly Inspection
A complete inspection of each crane, its foundation and drive track should be made every
month and the results recorded in a register. The manufacturers' recommendation should be
kept in view. The following items should be carefully looked for:
i. Deformation cracked or corroded members in the crane structure, foundation and boom.
ii. Loose bolts or rivers.
iii. Cracked or worn sheaves and drums.
iv. Worn, cracked or distorted parts such as pins, bearings, shafts etc.
v. Excessive wear on brake and clutch system.
vi. Load hooks, for deformation and cracks.
vii. Excessive wear of chain drive sprockets and excessive chain stretch.
viii. All ropes for compliance with manufacturers' specifications, reduction in diameter due to
corrosion of wear.
F. Capacity of the crane
Capacity of the crane along with load testing date is to be displayed in bold letters on the boom
and super structure on both sides and front and rear of the crane.

SAFETY
G. Training
i. Training should be imparted about the crane operation and maintenance for crane
operators and technicians and supervisors at field site every year for safety awareness.
ii. The lifting capacity of the cranes should be periodically checked.
iii. A periodical human physical ability test may be conducted for the driver and the crane
operator through reputed institute e.g. National Labour Institute or any other.
v.3.7. Offshore Crane Operations
The offshore crane operation and maintenance shall be governed by the API RP 2D.
General Safe Operating Procedures
A. Pre – use checks
i. Before starting the crane operator should verify the following:
 The Pre-use(pre-start up) inspection has been completed
 All controls are in the „Off‟ or „neutral‟ position
 All personnel are away from the area.
ii. For mechanical cranes, Operator should operationally test the breaks each time a load to
be lifted is nearer to the rated load.
iii. Prior to lifting exposed breaks should be warmed and rusted surfaces on the drums
cleaned by raising and lowering the boom and load lines under slight pressure.
iv. Load should be within the operator‟s range of vision.
v. Operator should respond to signals from authorized signaller only.
B. When left unattended for a prolonged period
i. Land any attached load
ii. Disengage the master clutch, where applicable
iii. Set all locking devices
iv. Put controls in the „Off‟ or „Neutral‟ position
v. Stop the prime mover
vi. Ensure no hindrance is caused by crane for helicopter operations

SAFETY
vii. Cranes should not be operated during helicopter landing and take offs.
C. In case of power failure
i. Set all breaks and locking devices
ii. Move all clutch to “off‟ or „neutral‟ position
iii. Lower the load in a control manner
D. Sling use guidelines
i. Prior to use, all sings should be inspected
ii. Protection should be given between sling and the sharp surfaces of the load
iii. Proper storage to be provided, i.e. away from heat, corrosive conditions and loss of
lubrication.
iv. Slings should never be choked in the splice
v. Sharp kings or knots should not be permitted in wire rope slings
vi. Loads should not be lifted with one leg of multi-leg sling until the unused legs are secured
E. Moving the Load
i. Prior to lifting, ensure that the load is secured and properly balanced in the appropriate
sling.
ii. The path for lifting is clear from all obstructions
iii. Before starting to lift ensure that-
 The proper sling is selected for the load to be lifted.
 Load is free to be lifted
 Multiple part lines are not twisted
 The hook is brought over the load with minimum swinging
 Fix any slack rope condition
iv. While lifting ensure that -
 Speed control is made smooth
 Shock loading (caused due to lowering at high speed) is avoided.
 Any part do not come in contact with any obstruction
 Controls are engaged smoothly to avoid excessive stress on crane machinery

SAFETY
 Sudden stats and stops and excessive swinging are avoided when rotating the
crane.
F. Personnel Transfer
While making personnel lift, ensure that –
i. All hooks used for support of personnel have an operable latch.
ii. Hooks designed to prevent the personnel basket sling from coming off the hook
accidentally should only be used.
iii. The load is under control in both up and down directions
iv. All personnel to be lifted on a basket using approved Personnel floatation Devices (PFDs)
when being lifted or lowered over water.
v. While using net type personnel basket, personnel standing on the outer ring facing inward.
vi. No over loading of basket
Direct transfer of personnel:
i. In fine weather, if the installation has a boat landing platform, personnel should transfer
directly, passengers must hold on to the "swing rope" fixed to the landing platform and
should wear life - jackets
ii. In case of the crew boat, the transfer should take place from the stern side of the boat after
it is tied on to the platform mooring bits. One can then easily step on to the landing
platform.
iii. Boat landing, swing ropes and rope ladders should be inspected and tested at regular
intervals to ensure that these are in good working order.
Personnel transfer by basket
The following precautions should be taken during transfer:
i. Permission should be obtained from the tool pusher/ FPSOIM and master of the vessel
before the transfer starts.
ii. One person should be designated to be the sole in charge of the operation; he should
have an over all view of the crane, basket and the vessel, through out the operation.
iii. All persons riding on the basket should wear life jackets.
iv. The passengers on the basket should stand on the outer rim of the basket and hold on
ropes tightly. The centre of the net is for light luggage only.

SAFETY
v. Passengers should position themselves so that there is even distribution of load around
the rim of the basket.
vi. No smoking rule should be strictly observed by the passengers.
vii. Each basket is designed for certain number of persons; in no case should this limit be
exceeded.
viii. The crane operator should raise the basket only high enough above the deck of vessel to
clear obstructions, swing it out over the water, raise it to a position slightly above landing
deck level, swing the basket over the landing area and gently lower it to the deck. The
same method should be followed while transferring personnel from the installations to the
vessel.
ix. In order to ensure that the crane hook does not injure the basket passengers, there should
be a suitable sling sufficient length and strength between the hook and the basket.
x. After use, the basket should be stowed at a safe place so that it does not suffer
deterioration. It should be inspected periodically and also each time before use by the
person in-charge of the operation. Only baskets in perfect condition should be used.
xi. All people being transferred should feel confident for using basket transfer
G. Transfer of material
i. No transfer of material should be undertaken unless necessary permission has been
obtained from the master of the vessel and the tool-pusher/FPS of the installations. The
operation will depend on the sea condition wind and operations in progress on the
platform.
ii. There should be one supervisor on the deck of the installation and another on the vessel
before any transfer operation begins. The supervisor should see that:
 The loads are properly placed on the landing net/pallets and correctly slung before
they are picked up and suitably stowed once they are on board.
 No one stands underneath the loads or suddenly comes underneath during
movements.
 Loaded landing net/pallet/pipe is not raised or lowered directly over vessel or deck;
if the crane cannot, for some reason swing the load, net clear of the vessel, the
latter should be moved away in order to protect persons on board, should the
loaded net be dropped accidentally.
iii. Personnel taking part in the transfer operation should be able to communicate with one
another by use of suitable equipment (megaphone / walkie-talkie sets).

SAFETY
iv. If the work situation exposes personnel handling material to the risk of falling into the sea,
every person so exposed should wear a life jacket or work vest.
vi. HELICOPTER SAFETY SYSTEM

vi.1. GENERAL
The permission to fly helicopters and their flight plans are regulated under the Aircraft Rules 1937 and
CARs issued by DGCA from time to time. The Directorate General of Civil Aviation is the competent
authority in INDIA for this purpose.
Aviation by itself is not hazardous but it never forgives incompetence, care free attitude and
negligence. Thus, it becomes everyone's moral and legal obligation to give due regard to the
practices, procedures,
Note: Refer Aviation Safety Manual available with Offshore Logistic division(Annexed)
vii. WORKING OVER & NEAR WATER

vii.1. HAZARDS
There is a definite hazard of person(s) falling in the water during working over or near water in
offshore installations. Examples of such operations are:
 Painting
 Repair of structure
 Platform and piping modifications
 Installing a BOP for new wells
vii.2. REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimum Requirements:
I. All the work over water, where the hazard of the worker falling in to the water exists shall
be carried out under Permit to Work authorized by competent person.
II. Work over water within 3 meters of the water can be done using a work vest. However, a
stand-by person with a life ring must be present there to provide immediate assistance.
III. For work over water above the 3 meters level, acceptable safety nets, use of type I
flotation devices, safety harnesses and life lines or other acceptable alternatives measures
should be adopted.

SAFETY
IV. The standby vessel should be put on alert and be ready to provide immediate assistance
during any work over water.
V. Employees working over or near water, where the danger of drowning exists, shall be
provided with approved life jacket or buoyant work vests.
VI. Prior to and after each use, the buoyant work vests or life preservers shall be inspected for
defects which would alter their strength or buoyancy. Defective units shall not be used.
VII. Ring buoys with at least 90 feet of line shall be provided and readily available for
emergency rescue operations. Distance between ring buoys shall not exceed 200 feet. .
VIII. A safety net is to be provided wherever possible while a person is carrying out work over
water
B. Skill Requirements
The persons who require carrying out work over or near water should develop certain skills
for survival at sea in an emergency: Certain requirements are:
I. The skills of emergency water survival, how to use a personal floatation device if they fall
into the water;
II. The ability to inspect life vests for defects; to properly select a personal floatation device
and how to size, adjust and don the device.
III. The ability to explain and demonstrate how to swim/ maneuver about in the water
IV. How to use life rings and rescue bags to perform simple shore based rescues
V. How to use applicable communications equipment to summon emergency services to
render medical assistance
VI. How to employ special techniques to minimize injury if falling from a height into water
viii. CRANE OPERATION SAFETY

viii.1. GENERAL
Thesafepracticesgivenhererelatetocranesusedfordoorliftingandhandlingheavyequipment
andtubulargoodsonland.
viii.2. CRANE OPERATOR
Operators ofcranesshouldbeexperiencedandshouldmeetthefollowing requirements:

SAFETY
i. able to read and understand operating instructions.

ii. able to understand the load charged.
iii. able to understand about the functioning of the safety devices.
iv. able to understand hand signal code used.
v. have eye sight & hearing that are normal and have no known physical deficiency such as
 epilepsy or heart condition that would be detrimental to safe operation of cranes.
 have proper muscular co-ordination, depth perception and reaction time.
viii.3. INITIAL INSPECTION AND TESTING
i. All new or substantially repaired or altered cranes should be inspected by a competent person
and tested to ensure that they comply with manufacturers load rating and are operationally
satisfactory. The crane should be put to use only when the test results are satisfactory.
ii. The results of every such inspection and test should be recorded in a register by the person
making the test.
viii.4. SAFE WORKING LOAD
i. Safe working load on the crane at each radius of the jib should be not more than 90% of the
test load, but in no case should the rated capacity loads be exceeded.
ii. The safe working load of the crane should be legibly marked on it. A scale or weight indicator
should be available which can be used to determine weight or unknown load to be lifted.
viii.5. SAFETY FEATURES
i. Every crane should be provided with a ready means of escape from its operating cab.
ii. The crane should be equipped with audible warning system.
iii. A dry chemical power type fire extinguisher should be provided within easy reach of the
operator.
iv. First-aid-box with medicines should be available in the operators cabin and lights should be
provided on the crane boom/support structure.
v. Safety limit switches must be available in working condition in all the cranes and all controls
shall be operative.
vi. Couplings and gears shall be provided with adequate guards.
vii. The spark arrester is to be fitted in the exhaust silencer wherever applicable.

SAFETY
viii. Slings which are to be used for lifting should be checked and inspected whether any damage,
torn or twist.
ix. Wooden logs/planks used for jacking up should be pre-selected to withstand load.
viii.6. DAILY INSPECTION
Thefollowingitemsof craneshouldbevisuallyinspecteddaily orbeforeitsuseifnotused everyday, toensure
that thecrane is in safeworkingorder:
i. All controlled mechanism for mal-adjustment interfering with proper operation.
ii. All safety devices inspected for mal-function.
iii. Leakage in air or hydraulic system.
iv. Crane hooks for deformation or cracks.
v. Electrical apparatus for mal-function.
vi. Crane booms and running ropes to make sure they have not been accidentally damaged.
vii. Wire ropes and rope slings for excessive wear, broken wires and kinks.
Incaseanydefectordamageisnoticed,itshouldbeimmediatelybroughttothenoticeofthesuperiorofficerandap
propriateremedialaction betaken.
viii.7. PLANNING TO EXECUTE OPERATION
Most accidents can be avoided by careful job planning. Person Incharge, must have a clear
understanding of the work to be done, consider all danger at the job site, develop a plan to do the job
safely and then explain the plan to all the concerned.
i. What is the weight of the load to be lifted, the lift radius, boom angle and the rated capacity of
the crane?
ii. How will the signal man communicate with the operator?
iii. Are there gas lines, power lines or structures which must be moved or avoided?
iv. Is the surface strong enough to support the machine and load?
v. How can the crane be positioned to use the shortest boom and radius possible?
viii.8. OPERATIONAL PRECAUTIONS
Operator must be alert physically fit, free from influence of alcohol or medications that effect his eye
sight, hearing or reactions. Always avoid over loading of cranes, over loading would result by

SAFETY
 Lifting of load more than rated capacity at the particular radius.

 Booming down and increasing load radius.
i. Crane should be placed on jackets with proper wooden logs.
ii. While doing pick and carry operations keep the load as low the ground as possible.
iii. It should be ensured that while operating a crane person should be clear of having load.
iv. Ensure that enough room is available for rotation of the cranes.
v. Ensure that load being lifted is not stuck frozen or attached to something else which may
cause accident.
viii.8.1. OPERATION
i. The code of hand signals adopted for use should be understood and observed by the
crane operator and his signal man.
ii. The crane should be properly jacked on a firm foundation and secured before lifting heavy
load.
iii. The crane operator should sound the audible warning before lifting any load.
iv. Suitable hooks or rope slings attached to the load should only be used for lifting loads.
v. Crane should not be used for dragging load on ground.
vi. The operator should ensure that during lifting of load, persons remain at a safe distance.
vii. The crane operator must not allow any person to ride on suspended load or remain under
a suspended load.
viii. There should be at least two wraps of cable of the drum at all times when operating the
crane to obviate the line load being applied to the fastening clamp at any time.
ix. Crane operator should ensure that no part of the crane approaches within three metres of
any electric transmission line.
x. When not in use, the hook of the crane should be firmly secured to the boom.
viii.9. MONTHLY INSPECTION

Acompleteinspectionofeachcrane,itsfoundationanddrivetrackshouldbemadeeverymonth
andtheresultsrecordedinaregister.Themanufacturers'recommendationshouldbekeptinview.
Thefollowingitemsshouldbecarefullylooked for:

SAFETY
i. Deformation, cracked or corroded members in the crane structure, foundation and boom.
ii. Loose bolts or rivers.
iii. Cracked or worn sheaves and drums.
iv. Worn, cracked or distorted parts such as pins, bearings, shafts etc.
v. Excessive wear on brake and clutch system
vi. Load hooks, for deformation and cracks.
vii. Excessive wear of chain drive sprockets and excessive chain stretch.
viii. All ropes for compliance with manufacturers' specifications, reduction in diameter due to
corrosion of wear.
viii.10. CAPACITY OF THE CRANE
Capacity of the crane is to be displayed in bold letters on the boom and super structure on both sides
and front and rear of the crane.
viii.11. TRAINING
Training should be imparted about the crane operation and maintenance for crane operators and
technicians and supervisors at field site every year for safety awareness.
Thelifting capacityofthecranesshouldbeperiodicallychecked.
Aperiodicalhumanphysicalabilitytestmaybeconductedforthedriverandthecraneoperator through reputed
institutee.g.NationalLabourInstitute orany other.
ix. H2S PROTECTION

ix.1. INTRODUCTION
The d an ge r of exposure to H2S can not be eliminated altogether but the potential of danger can be
minimized by:-
i. Providing adequate safety equipments on location.
ii. Proper training to personnel before posting.
iii. Establishing strict operating and emergency procedures.
iv. Creating general awareness of potential HAZARDS OF H2S.

SAFETY
ix.2. HAZARDOUS DESCRIPTION

 Sources and occurrence.
 Characteristics and properties.
 H2S effect on personnel.
 Toxicity
 Essential medical standards for working is H2S environment.
 Detection
 Planning Requirements for H2S working
 Breathing air requirement for different activities and conservation of air.
 Emergency rescue.
 First Aid, artificial respiration
 Dangers associated with its product of combustion.
 Effects on metal.
 Breathing protection and Rescue equipment.
 Safety during operation and maintenance.
 Safety in sampling.
ix.2.1. Different names of H2S
Hydrogen Sulphide gas in referred to in Industry by a variety of names:-
 H2S
 Stink Damp
 Sulfurated Hydrogen
 Rotten Egg Gas
 Hydro sulphuric Acid
 Sulphur Hydride
ix.2.2. Characteristics and Properties of H2S
i. H2S gas is toxic, irritant and asphyxiates. It is colorless, which at low concentrations is
accompanied by rotten egg odour.
ii. Detection of H2S, solely by smell is highly dangerous as sense of smell is rapidly paralyzed by
H2S.
iii. It is more toxic than carbon monoxide and almost as toxic as Hydrogen cyanide gas.

SAFETY
iv. Heavier than air, specific gravity 1.189. Vapours may travel considerable distance to a source
of ignition and forms an explosive mixture with air in concentration between 4.3 and 46 % by
volume.
v. It has Auto ignition point of 260 degree centigrade.
vi. Burns with blue flame and evolves S02, which also is very toxic.
vii. Threshold Limit value - Time weighted average - 10 ppm.
viii. Threshold Limit value - Short Term Exposure limit - 15 ppm
ix. Corrosive to all electro-chemical series metal
x. Soluble in water, alcohol, petroleum solvents and crude petroleum
xi. Agitation or temperature increase produces toxic liberation.
xii. Melting point (-) 85.5 Degree Centigrade, Boiling point (-) 60.4 Degree centigrade.
xiii. Molecular weight: 34.08: Heat value: 3820 Cal/Kg.
ix.2.3. Effects of H2S on personnel:
It depends on:-
a) Duration
b) Frequency
c) Intensity
d) Individual susceptibility
H2S goes in to the blood through lungs – To protect itself, body “ Oxidizes “ the H2S , which
body can not oxidize, builds up in blood and individual becomes poisoned. The nerve centers
in the brain which controls breathing are paralyzed. The lungs stop working and the person
asphyxiated. Other lower levels of exposure may cause the following symptoms individually or
in combination:
 Headache
 Dizziness
 Excitement
 Nausea
 Coughing
 Drowsiness
 Dryness and sensation of pain in nose, throat and chest.

SAFETY
ix.2.4. Toxicity of H2S and effects:

10 ppm = 1/1000 of 1% - can smell, safe for 8 hours exposure
100 ppm = 1/100 of 1% - Kills smell in 3 to 15 mins, may sting eyes and
throat.
200 ppm = 2/100 of 1% - Kills smell shortly, stings eyes and throat.
500 ppm = 5/100 of 1% - Loses sense of reasoning and balance
- Respiratory paralysis within 30 to 40 mins.
- Needs prompt artificial Resuscitation.
1000 ppm = 1/10 of 1% - Unconsciousness at once.
- Permanent brain damage, if not rescued
promptly.
H2S is more deadly than carbon monoxide (CO) and almost as toxic as hydrogen cyanide
(HCN) gas, which is used for the execution of criminals in some countries.
1. Threshold Limit Concentration at which it is believed that all workers may be

repeatedly exposed day after day without adverse effects.
2. Hazardous Limit Connection that causes death.
3. Lethal Concentration Concentration that will cause death with short term exposure.
4. Threshold Limit (H2S) 10 ppm - 1972 ACGIH (American Conference of Governmental

Industrial Hygienists)
Sudden exposure to concentrations above 150 ppm, or continued exposure to lower
concentrations may retard or arrest the ability to detect the odour.
ix.2.5. Essential medical standards for working in H2S area:
Employees working in areas, mentioned earlier, where H2S may be present or could
conceivably be likely to be found should be medically examined by a doctor to ensure that the
employees has no medical defects that might endanger his health or performance during a
possible H2S exposure. The examination should include heart, blood pressure, lung condition,
existence of performed ear drums, standards of health or mental anxieties.
Caution: H2S may pass through a perforated ear drum and enter the lungs.
Special problems in use of breathing apparatus (b.a) sets:
a. facial hair : can prevent effective sealing to the wearers of b.a. sets.

SAFETY
b. contact lenses : contact lenses are a definite hazard and should not be worn while
wearing a respirator in a contaminated atmosphere.
ix.2.6. Detection:
Philosophy of detector location is governed by
 where leaks are most likely to occur and
 where gas accumulations are most likely to be the greatest.
Knowledge of limitations and capabilities of leak and testing etc. high concentration of gas may
be encountered. Following are some of the common detection devices:
A. Fixed monitoring systems:
Sensors monitor H2S concentrations continuously at various locations. Alarms are actuated
when concentrations reach preset values. The H2S concentration is continuously indicated on
the analog digital display at the control room.
B. Personal electronic monitors:
The unit is hand held or attached to dress, to warn at preset values, when attended with
dosimeter, stores the individuals exposures to H2S and gives a print out, when required.
These can also be provided with system to relay the exposure levels to control room for
information and record.
C. Lead acetate ampules or coated strips:
These change of color (usually turn brown or black) in the presence of H2S. They should be
used as alternate method of detection.
D. Short term measurement with tube detectors:
The system consist tubes, the bellow pump and a scale that gives a reading of H2S presence
and amount of H2S on the tube is shown by length of colour change on the tube.
 Do not rely on your nose to detect H2S the sense of smell is not reliable
detection method.
 Know the cross sensitivities of gases with reference to your measuring devices.
ix.2.7. Planning requirement for working in H2S environment
Working in a H2S or possibly contaminated H2S environment requires painstaking accurate
planning to insure maximum protection of human lives.
Planning considerations should include:-

SAFETY
i. Contingency plan.
ii. Diagnosis of the work – site.
iii. Adequate and proper placement of safety equipments.
iv. Personnel training programme.
v. Personnel drills.
vi. Responsible supervision.
vii. Knowledge of working conditions.
viii. Emergency of working conditions.
ix. Adherence of all safe work practices etc.
Additional safety measures
When approaching the job site it is necessary to take the following precautious to ensure safe
entry:
i. Observe for audio/ visual alarms.
ii. Check for wind direction.
iii. Look for personnel and their activities.
iv. Enter job site slowly.
v. Look for the escape route.
vi. Continuous detection.
vii. Gas ignition hazards must be eliminated and “No smoking“
regulations strictly enforced.
viii. Reduce H2S exposure.
ix. H2S awareness training programme and regular drill are a must.
x. Continued observation of wind indicator is a must (In HGPC wind
direction changes many times a day, and seasonally too).
xi. During atmospheric contamination by H2S, move upwind or cross
wind from source, not down wind: as such you have to make yourself
always away from source.
xii. H2S is heavier than air, therefore avoid low lying area.

SAFETY
xiii. Maintain and observe warning signs.

xiv. Maintain reliable communication systems.
xv. Know the emergency preparedness plan of HGPC.
ix.2.8. Breathing air requirements for different activities:
Activity Cubic feet per minute Litres per minute

Sleep 0.2 6.0
Rest 0.3 9.3
Light work 0.7 19.7
Medium work 1.0 29.2
Medium Heavy work 1.4 40.0
Heavy work 2.1 59.5
Maximum work 4.6 132.0
ix.2.9. How to conserve breathing air

i. Excitement, emotions and fears will cause the wearer of the B.A. Set to consume air at a
needless rate. The wearer must remain calm and relaxed in any and all situation to help
conserve air and to react and think logically.
ii. Work should be accomplished at a steady pace so as not to over exert and spend too much
energy and waste air.
iii. When BA Set not needed, the face piece can be removed.
iv. In depth training with the BA Set is an essential element.
Breathing air quality
As per API-RP-49, the requirements of breathing air quality shall be as follows:
 Oxygen content 19.5 % - 23.5%
 Hydrocarbon content – 5 mg/m3 of air or less
 Carbon Monoxide(CO) content – 10 ppm or less
 Carbon di-oxide(CO2) content - 1000 ppm or less
 Lack of noticeable odour

SAFETY
ix.2.10. Emergency rescue in H2S:

The most important part of any rescue attempt at any time and especially in toxic H2S
environment is to protect yourself before attempting a rescue. A successful rescue can only
be accomplished by first being prepared for such an emergency.
Be prepared:
i. Make sure the proper respiratory equipment is being used.
ii. Check the air supply in the supply in the cylinder to ensure that there is sufficient air to
make the rescue and escape with the victim to a safe area.
iii. Before entry into the contaminated area, check the seal of the mask (negative pressure
test).
iv. Observe wind socks to determine where you will take the victims – UPWIND- SAFE AREA.
v. Always use the “Buddy system” when making a rescue.
Aids to be used:
i. If at all possible, at least two people should aid in a rescue.
ii. Make use of all rescue equipment that may be on location, Safety harness, ropes, slings,
stretchers etc.
Removing the victim:
i. If a victim is unconscious or is incapacitated, when wearing BA Set, drag the victim to
safety or use stretcher,
ii. If a victim is unconscious due to inhalation of lethal amounts of H2S, time is important.
The victim must be taken immediately to a safe area upwind from the contaminated area.
ix.2.11. First aid for H2S poisoning:
Contact with Eyes:
i. Eye contact with liquid and/or gas containing H2S will cause painful irritation.
ii. Keep patient in a darkened room.
iii. Apply ice to eyes and put ice on forehead.
iv. Take him to a doctor.

SAFETY
Contact with skin:

In case of skin contact, the affected area should be thoroughly washed.
Inhalation:
i. Get the victim to fresh air as quickly as possible.
ii. Keep him at rest and chilling should be prevented.
iii. If respiration is stopped, give artificial respiration (Mouth to mouth to mouth).
iv. Call a doctor/ take victim to a doctor.
v. If the stomach rises, gently press on it to remove air, it is recommended that the victim‟s
head be turned to one side before doing this.
vi. Watch the victim‟s chest. When you see it rise, stop blowing. Raise your mouth and turn
your head to the side the listen for exhalation. Watch the victim‟s chest to see that it falls.
When the victim‟s exhalation is finished, repeat the blowing cycle. As the victim attempts
to breath, co-ordinate your blowing with his breathing.
vii. After reviving the victim, watch closely and treat for shock. NEVER LEAVE THE VICTIM
ALONE; have some one else contact a doctor.
Note: A person properly trained in artificial respiration can save a life.
viii. The medical centre should have Anti-dot for H2S poisoning.
Occupational health monitoring:
 Occupational Health Monitoring of employees should be carried out periodically (every 6
months for exposed personnel) apart from pre employment and pre placement check ups.
 The employees working in H2S and other vulnerable locations should be monitored from
health point of view.
Dangers with the product of combustion:
When H2S is burnt, Sulphur dioxide (SO2) is produced. This gas is also toxic, but does not
suppress the sense of smell.
Here are some of characteristics of Sulphur Dioxide (SO2) gas:
 Molecular weight: 64.06
 Physical properties:
 Colorless gas, pungent odour,

SAFETY
 Boiling Point: -10 degree centigrade

 Vapour density: 2.264 (air)
 Solubility: Water, Ethyl alcohol, methanol ether, and Chloroform.
 Chemical properties:
 Reacts with water and with steam and produces toxic and corrosive fumes.
 Safe Exposure Limits: 5 ppm
 Route of entry to the human body: Inhalation, Ingestion and skin contact.
 Effect: Conjunctives, respiratory paralysis, in 6-12 ppm concentration, it causes
immediate irritation of nose and throat.
Emergency First Aid procedures:
 In halation - Keep in fresh air upright and move to doctor.
 Skin - Remove contaminated clothes, rinse skin with plenty of water or
shower and send to a doctor.
 Eye - First rinse with plenty of water, transport to a Doctor.
 Injection - Use 5% solution of Sodium carbonate ( Na2Co3) as aerosol for
Stomach wash, but under medical supervision only.
Breathing protection and rescue equipment:
Working in an H2S area requires availability of following types of Breathing Protection &
Rescue equipments. For smaller installations and rigs requirements can be further minimized.
 BA Set (30 mins. & 20 mins.)
 ELSA (Emergency Life Support Appliances) 10 mins.
 Cartridge type Escape mask.
 Airline Trolley.
 Auto Resuscitator or Manual air Resuscitator.
 Portable oxygen inhaler.
 Oxygen cylinder assembly
 Stretcher.

SAFETY
ix.2.12. Operation & maintenance H2S environment/ entry in to equipment in H2S

area:
i. Where possible, entry into area / vessel which contains H2S should be avoided.
ii. For all entry situations, procedures for escape and rescue should be established prior to
starting the work.
iii. Entry into vessels, hole pits or drains which contained H2S (and may still contain H2S or
H2S contaminated residue) shall be undertaken only after a vessel entry permit (confined
space entry permit) has been issued.
iv. The equipment shall be depressurized completely to atmospheric pressure.
v. For pressure vessels and other fully enclosed equipments draining of all free liquid from
the equipment is essential.
vi. Positive isolation of the equipment must be achieved.
vii. The equipment is purged to a safe location with inert gas, steam or water and then air
(until the concentration of H2S is below detectable level and that of oxygen is above 20%
by volume).
viii. Any possible residues, which may be pyrophoric be kept water wet.
ix. A flow of fresh air be established through the equipment.
x. A means of communication is established between the person entering the equipment and
coworkers.
xi. The person entering the equipment and the coworker shall wear full face self contained
breathing apparatus.
ix.2.13. Maintenance in H2S environment / opening of equipment containing H2S
i. Established work-procedure is to be followed.
ii. Where the equipment can not be totally depressurized, (e.g. connections to flare headers),
the pressure be reduced to and maintained at the lowest practicable level.
iii. Any cleaned material from vessels/tanks handling H2S or sulphide compound e.g.
mercaptan etc.) shall be suitably disposed in wet condition, as these materials can catch
fire in dry condition.
iv. It should be noted that equipment which has contained H2S may contain iron sulphide.
This is known as „Pyrophoric Iron Sulphide Fire‟. As this has auto-ignition temperature
almost equal to the ambient temperature, in the dry state, iron sulphide can spontaneously

SAFETY
ignite in an oxygen containing atmosphere and appropriate precautions ( like keeping it

water wet etc.) need to be taken.
ix.2.14. Precautions in sampling:
i. Before proceeding for sampling, control room and other operating personnel shall have to
be informed.
ii. While sampling, stand in the upwind direction.
iii. Protective clothing shall be worn to avoid any spillage on body.
iv. Breathing protection (e.g. Escape mask i.e. ELSA shall be used.)
v. Look before hand for the escape route.
vi. In case of any leakage, the isolation points shall be found out before hand for quick
isolation of the sampling point.
vii. Any other measures as per established practice shall be followed for specific areas.
ix.2.15. H2S Protection in Drilling Operations
A. Detection and alarm system
The system comprises of H2S sensors located at predetermined points. The location should
satisfy the following rules.
 In air conditioned or ventilated areas, detector should be installed at the fresh air inlets
(duct, entrance ways etc.)
 Outside, detectors should be installed on gas carrying equipment (well nipple, shale
shaker, mud, pits drillers stands etc.) These should be located near potential leaks, such
as the shaft gland connection, flanges etc. It is pure alarm system with two warning stages
and cannot trigger emergency shutdown alone. The two levels of alarm are as follows:
o 10 ppm H2S low level alarm triggers a light signal but does not indicate
danger for all. Persons are required to stand by to check the installation after
announcement on public address system (PA) by the tool pusher, otherwise,
to proceed to the upwind side.
o 20 ppm H2S high level triggers a sound alarm and also red light on the control
panel. Emergency alarm is sounded by two short rings of bell intermittently.
This requires breathing equipments to be used immediately and the hazard
area to be vacated unless announcement on Public Address System (PA) by
the tool pusher provides other instructions.

SAFETY
B. Visual Warning Signs

 In case of high level H2S alarm, the following warning signs should be displayed to alert
helicopter and vessels in the vicinity of the drilling rig.
 Red flag 90cm X 60 cms on each side of the rig.
 Danger boards painted yellow with black lettering 30 cms high indicating "DANGER H2S".
C. Muster stations and escape routes.
Since H2S is heavier than air, it is likely to settle down at lower levels particularly in still air or in
light winds and cut off the natural escape route to the boat landing; this situation gives rise to
the following requirements:
 Sufficient stair cases on the upwind side of prevailing winds for escape route up the stairs
or down to the lifeboat.
 Muster stations for operating personnel in the event of gas alarm, areas in the open on the
upper deck which can be kept free of H2S by the wind.
D. Ventilation
Forced air ventilation to disperse any accumulation of H2S should be provided by fans (bug
blower) at the following points:
 Mud shaker
 Working platforms
 Control rooms
E. H2S Kick control
The control of H2S kick may be achieved either by bulldozing gas back into formation or
circulating it out. The actual method to be adopted will depend upon the condition of the well.
When a gas kick occurs, estimate the quantity of H2S present taking adequate precautionary
measures of wearing self contained breathing apparatus (SCBA). The following procedure
should be adopted:
 Close BOP, monitor SIDPP, SICP & pit gain.
 If the concentration is high and cannot be circulated out due to H2S hazard in atmosphere,
bulldoze the gas into formation by pumping through kill line.
 Raise mud wt. and PH as required.
 Load H2S scavenger like zinc carbonate and ironite sponge as may be necessary in the
active mud pit.

SAFETY
 Circulate the gas through choke and degasser and burn off the gas.
The following factors should also be kept in view:-
 All persons on the drilling floor, shale shaker area, mud pump and tank should put on self
contained breathing apparatus when the kick is to be circulated out.
 Persons who are not required for the control operation should be withdrawn to a safe area,
where adequate ventilation is arranged.
 Frequent checks with portable H2S gas detector should be made.
 Supply vessels (in case of Offshore) should stay upwind on power and maintain
continuous radio and visual watch.
Note: The document "Contingency plan for drilling H2S well" issued by the Mumbai Region
is recommended for detailed guidance.
F. Specific well site checks
 Check The Presence Of H2s
 Wind Direction Indicators
 Monitors And Alarms
 Placement Of Breathing Apparatus
 Placement Of Fire Equipments
 Appropriate First Aid Equipment
G. Minimum Aspects for H2S Training
Any Training on H2S safety should include the following minimum aspects:
 The hazards and characteristics of H2S and its product of combustion(SO2)
 Sources of them
 Use of detectors
 Understanding and Response to the warning signals
 Symptoms of H2S and SO2 exposures
 Rescue techniques
 First-aid procedures
 Proper use and maintenance of Breathing apparatus

SAFETY
 Wind direction awareness

 Confined space and other work-permit procedures
 Emergency response procedures
 Locations and use of safety equipments
 Escape routes
 Safe briefing areas(assembly points)
x. SAFETY IN WORKING WITH PRESSURIZED SYSTEM

x.1. INTRODUCTION
If pressure equipment fails in use, it can seriously injure or kill people nearby and cause serious
damage to property. Examples of pressure systems and equipment are:
 Boilers and steam heating systems
 Pressurized process plant and piping
 Compressed air systems (fixed and portable)
 Heat exchangers and refrigeration plant
 Valves, steam traps and filters
 Pipe work and hoses
 Pressure gauges and level indicators
 Gas Cylinders
x.2. MANAGING THE RISKS - SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
To reduce the risks you need to know (and act on) some basic precautions,
x.2.1. Provide safe and suitable equipment
 When installing new equipment, ensure that it is suitable for its intended purpose and that
it is installed correctly.
 The pressure system should be designed and manufactured from suitable materials as per
applicable codes.
 Ensure the system can be operated safely without having to climb or struggle through gaps
in pipe work or structures. For example, be careful when repairing or modifying a pressure

SAFETY
system. Following a major repair and/or modification, the whole system should be re-
examined before allowing the system to come back into use.
x.2.2. Know the operating conditions
 Know what liquid or gas is being contained, stored or processed (e.g. is it
toxic/flammable?)
 Know the process conditions, such as the pressures and temperatures.
 Know the safe operating limits of the system and any equipment directly connected to it or
linked to it.
 Ensure there is a set of operating instructions for all the equipment and for the control of
the whole system including emergencies.
 Ensure there is a set of operating instructions for all the equipment and for the control of
the whole system including emergencies.
 Ensure that appropriate employees have access to these instructions, and are properly
trained in the operation and use of the equipment or system
x.2.3. Fit suitable protective devices and ensure they function properly
 Ensure suitable protective devices are fitted to the vessels, or pipe work (e.g. safety valves
and any emergency tripping devices which cause shutdown when the pressure,
temperature or liquid or gas level exceeds permissible limits).
 Ensure the protective devices have been adjusted to the correct settings.
 If warning devices (alarms) are fitted, ensure they are noticeable, either by sight or sound.
 Ensure protective devices are kept in good working order at all times.
 Ensure that, where fitted, protective devices such as safety valves and bursting discs
discharge to a safe place.
 Ensure that, once set, protective devices cannot be altered except by an authorized
person.
x.2.4. Carry out suitable maintenance
 All pressure equipment and systems should be properly maintained. There should be a
maintenance program for the system as a whole.
 Look for signs of problems with the system, e.g. if a safety valve repeatedly discharges,
this could be an indication that either the system is over pressurizing or the safety valve is
not working correctly.

SAFETY
 Look for signs of wear and corrosion.

 Systems should be depressurized before maintenance work is carried out.
 Ensure there is a safe system of work, so that maintenance work is carried out properly
and under suitable supervision.
x.2.5. Have the Pressurized System checked by a competent person
 Have a detailed examination scheme and include the equipment/systems to be examined
 Chose a competent person
 Ensure that ultrasonic thicknesss measurement of pressurized vessel is done before
conducting the periodic hydro test to check whether the metallic thickness of vessel is
within permissible limit or not.
 Carry out checks
x.2.6. Make provision for appropriate training
 Everybody operating, installing, maintaining, repairing, inspecting and testing pressure
equipment should have the necessary skills and knowledge to carry out their job safely.
 Training should include all new employees, who should have initial training and be
supervised closely.
 Additional training or retraining may be required if:
o The job changes;
o The equipment or operation changes; or
o Skills have not been used for a while.
x.2.7. Do‟s & Don‟ts
Do‟s
 Make sure pressure has been released before a pressurized system is opened.
 Make sure any fittings added to a pressurized system are of the correct type and
rating.
 Make sure screw threads used in pressurized systems are clean and in good
condition, and are fully engaged when done up.
 Report immediately any defects you may notice.

SAFETY
Don‟ts
 Subject equipment under pressure to shock loads, such as hammering or being
dropped.
 Apply heat to equipment under pressure, and never weld anything to such
equipment, whether under pressure or not, without proper approval.
 Use pressurized equipment as a step or as a support for scaffolding and other
working platform.
 Cut into any pipe work without first checking it is not part of a system under
pressure.
 Not to close any valve of the pressurized system without prior knowledge.
 Isolate safety valves.
 Go near pressure testing operations unless part of the testing team.
xi. SAFETY IN WORKING AT HEIGHT

xi.1. INTRODUCTION
This procedure deals with working at height including the erection and control of scaffolding structures
and ladders.
xi.2. WORKING AT HEIGHT
Working at heights of 1.8 meters above the ground cannot proceed unless:
 A fixed platform or scaffolding is used with guard or hand rails, verified by a
competent person(s) or
 Fall arrest equipment is used that has:
o a proper anchor mounted, preferably overhead
o full body harness using double latch self locking snap hooks at each
connection
o synthetic fibre lanyards
o shock absorber;
 Fall arrest equipment will limit free fall to 1.8 meters or less.
 The swing radius of fall shall be restricted in order to protect personnel from hitting
against structures/ equipment in case of a fall.

SAFETY
 A visual inspection of the fall arrest equipment and system is completed and any
equipment that is damaged or is taken out of service
 Person(s) are competent to perform the work.
 Work permit has been issued for the job.
xi.3. SCAFFOLDING
xi.3.1. Roles and Responsibilities:
The Site In-charge shall appoint a competent person to inspect and certify scaffolds as safe to
use.
Appointed Competent Person shall have prime responsibility for ensuring the following:
i. All scaffolding works must be carried out under the Permit-To-Work System.
ii. Ensure only competent scaffolders are used to erect, modify and maintain scaffolding
structures.
iii. All scaffolding is erected in accordance with the appropriate codes and standards
iv. Materials used are in good condition and of an acceptable standard.
v. A register is maintained of all scaffolds erected and dismantled.
vi. Maintain a record of the inspection of all scaffolding structures.
vii. Maintain inspection records of all ladders on the site.
viii. Undertake weekly inspections of all erected scaffolding structures and report all deficiencies
ix. Carry out a detailed toolbox talk with all personnel involved in the erecting and dismantling of
any scaffold structure. Refer „Tool Box Talks‟ for details.
Safety representative of contractor shall have the responsibility for:
i. Periodically auditing the scaffoldings, ladders and the associated permits and records to
ensure compliance with this procedure.
ii. Emphasise at safety meetings and toolbox talks the purpose and operation of the scaffolding
procedure to site personnel
iii. Safety representative of contractor shall be available at site during the working period.
ONGC HSE officer shall have the responsibility:
i. to ensure necessary permits have been issued;

SAFETY
ii. to randomly inspect to ascertain safety aspect

xi.3.2. Prior to Erection
i. The job site shall be inspected to determine ground conditions or strength of supporting
structure and for proximity of electric power lines, overhead obstructions, wind conditions, the
need for overhead protection or weather protection coverings. Special care is needed when
scaffolding is to be erected on fill or other soft ground. These conditions must be evaluated and
provide inputs for JSA.
ii. A Job Safety Analysis as per JSA procedure shall be undertaken for all scaffolding operations
being undertaken.
iii. Consideration to access and egress shall be given and where practical two means of safe
egress shall be provided.
iv. Frame spacing and mud sill size can only be determined after the total loads to be imposed on
the scaffold and the strength of the supporting soil or structure are calculated and considered.
This analysis must be done by a qualified person.
v. All equipment must be inspected to see that it is in good condition and is serviceable.
Damaged or deteriorated equipment shall not be used.
vi. Wooden planks shall be inspected to see that they are graded for scaffold use, is sound and in
good condition, straight grained, free from saw cuts, splits and holes. (Not all species and
grades of timber can be used as scaffold plank).
vii. The scaffold assembly must be designed by a competent person to comply with job
requirements. Manufactures load carrying information shall be used for design calculations.
viii. Suspended scaffolding or scaffolding designed solely for load bearing purposes shall be
subject to independent design and approval.
xi.3.3. Inspection and Tagging
i. A competent person shall inspect scaffolding before it is first used and then at least once every
week. It shall be inspected following any alteration and also if it has been exposed to weather
conditions likely to affect its strength or stability. Details of inspections shall be recorded.
ii. “Scaffold tags” shall be used on all scaffold structures, whether complete or part complete/
dismantled to indicate that the scaffolding is or is not safe to use. Tags must be positioned
prominently at access points to scaffold structures. The erection, dismantling and alteration of
scaffolding must be carried out by competent workmen under competent supervision.
iii. When scaffolding is incomplete (whether partly erected or dismantled) or considered to be
unsafe for any reason, display the red „Do Not Use‟ tag. In addition, access to the scaffold
shall be barricaded.

SAFETY
xi.3.4. Use of Scaffolding

i. Competent person as authorized shall inspect the scaffold assembly before use to ensure that
it is assembled correctly, level and plumb, base plates are in firm contact with sills, bracing is in
place and connected, platforms are fully planked, guardrails in place, safe access is provided,
properly tied and/or guyed and that there are no overhead obstructions or electric lines within 4
meters of the scaffold assembly. He shall also check the correct scaffold tag( RED/GREEN) is
in place.
ii. All PPE identified in the Permit to Work or JSA shall be worn at all times during the scaffolding
operation.
iii. Safety belt with full body harnesses shall be used in conjunction with lifelines when working
above 1.8 metres.
iv. Loose articles and materials must be kept to an absolute minimum on scaffolding platforms. All
necessary precautions must be taken to prevent objects from falling from scaffolds, e.g. by use
of toe boards.
v. During erection scaffolding clips and equipment shall not be thrown. During dismantling of
scaffolding, poles and fittings shall not be dropped to the ground but always carefully lowered.
Poles shall be stacked flat and clips and fittings collected into bags or containers.
vi. The use of “quick erect” aluminium scaffold systems can be used subject to local controls such
as restricting use to non-hazardous areas and appropriate storage.
vii. No visible scaffolding Red tag means No Access.
viii. Use only the safe means of access that is provided. Do not climb bracing or frames not
specifically designed for climbing. If such access is not provided, insist that it be provided.
ix. Climb Safely
x. Face the rungs as you climb up or down& always three point touches to ladder.
xi. Use both hands.
xii. Do not try to carry materials while you climb.
xiii. Be sure of your footing and balance before you let go with your hands. Keep one hand firmly
on frame or ladder at all times.
xiv. Do not work on slippery rungs.
xv. Do not overload platforms with materials.
xvi. Do not extend working heights should by planking guardrails or by use of boxes or ladders on
scaffold platforms.

SAFETY
xvii. Do not remove any component of a completed scaffold assembly except under the supervision
of a qualified person. Any component that has been removed should be immediately replaced.
xviii. At any given point of time at least one safety line has to be secured to a support while moving.
xi.4. LADDERS
xi.4.1. Portable Ladders
 Ladders are potentially dangerous. Most accidents occur through ladder slipping.
 Ladders may be used as a short-term alternative to scaffolding or as a mean of access to
scaffolding.
 Before using a ladder, it shall be ensured that it is the correct type for the job in hand and
that it is in good condition.
 Ladders shall be inspected and maintained by an authorized competent person. The
record of inspections shall be registered.
 Aluminium ladders must not be used in hazardous areas (danger of sparks generating).
 Any ladder that is defective in any way must be taken out of service immediately.
xi.4.2. Rules for Safe Use of Portable Ladders
i. Inspect ladder prior to EVERY use.
ii. Always place a ladder on a firm base, set the angle near to 70-75 i.e., 30cm out for every
1.2m up.
iii. Make sure the ladder projects well above the level at which the user stands. Remember it must
extend at least 1metre above the landing or workplace
iv. Ensure sufficient overlap between stages of extension ladders.
v. Do not use ladders with structural defects.
vi. Every ladder shall have rungs equally spaced
vii. Properly tag defective ladders with "Do Not Use" and withdraw from service.
viii. Carry ladders parallel to the ground.
ix. Tie ladders down securely when transporting.
x. Maintain ladders free of oil, grease, and other hazards.
xi. Do not load ladder beyond maximum intended load.

SAFETY
xii. Use only for the purpose for which the ladder was designed (refer to manufacturer's labelling
and recommendations).
xiii. Barricade traffic areas in vicinity of ladder use, and lock, barricade, or guard doorways in which
a ladder is placed.
xiv. Keep area around the top and bottom of ladder clear.
xv. Do not move, shift, or extend ladder while occupied. NEVER 'WALK' A LADDER.
xvi. Safety belt with full body harnesses shall be used in conjunction with lifelines when working
above 1.8 metres, secured to a safe point.
xvii. Use only non-conductive ladders around live electrical equipment.
xviii. Do not use top or top step for standing/ stepping.
xix. Do not stand on cross bracing.
xx. Always face the ladder when ascending or descending.
xxi. Always maintain 3 points of contact with the ladder (2 feet/1 hand or 2 hands/1 foot should be
in contact with ladder at all times).
xxii. Carry tools in pouches around waist; use a rope to raise or lower large items such as tool
boxes or materials.
xxiii. Do not overextend sideways. Use the belt buckle rule: keep your belt buckle positioned
between the side rails at all times, which will maintain your centre of gravity.
xxiv. Never allow more than one worker on the ladder at a time.
xxv. Do not erect ladders on sloping surface, leaning to one side or at to steep an angle.
xxvi. Do not erect ladders for use as a plank or bridge.
xxvii. Wooden ladders must not be painted, as paint could conceal any defects.
xxviii. Make certain that no overhead power lines are within your reach or within reach of the ladder.
Metal ladders must not be used where a there is a risk of accidental contact with live electrical
apparatus.
xi.4.3. Fixed Ladders
The rules for correct and safe use of portable ladders apply equally when climbing or working
on fixed metal ladders. In addition:
i. Every derrick shall be equipped with a ladder arrangement ensuring safe access to all elevated
walking and working platforms.

SAFETY
ii. Access from ladder to working platforms shall be properly secured with railings and toe-boards.
iii. The top end of each ladder section shall extend not less than one metres above the platform.
iv. Landing platforms or cages shall be provided on ladders of more than 6 metres to a maximum
unbroken length of 9 metres.
v. All landing platforms shall be equipped with railings and toe-boards so arranged as to give safe
access to the ladder.
vi. All ladders leading from derrick platform to monkey board shall be provided with fall prevention
device or other such device to prevent persons from falling.
vii. Every person who works above the first girt of a derrick shall be provided with approved type of
safety belt and lifeline and shall use the same unless he is otherwise protected against the
danger of falling from height.
viii. No person shall work or travel from where he is likely to fall for more than 1.8m unless he is
protected by approved type of safety belt and lifeline and shall use the same whilst at work.
xii. SAFETY WITH PORTABLE TOOLS

xii.1. HAND TOOLS
xii.1.1. Hazards
Hand tools are non-powered. They include anything from axes to wrenches. The greatest
hazards posed by hand tools result from misuse and improper maintenance.
Some examples:
 Using a screwdriver as a chisel may cause the tip of the screwdriver to break and fly,
hitting the user or other employees.
 If a wooden handle on a tool such as a hammer or an axe is loose, splintered, or cracked,
the head of the tool may fly off and strike the user or another worker.
 A wrench must not be used if its jaws are sprung, because it might slip.
 Impact tools such as chisels, wedges, or drift pins are unsafe if they have mushroomed
heads. The heads might shatter on impact, sending sharp fragments flying.
 The main causes of most injuries involving hand tools are the use of unsuitable tools, their
incorrect use or their incorrect storage.

SAFETY
xii.1.2. Safety Instructions

DOs
i. Use the correct tool for the job - never use a spanner as a hammer.
ii. Use spanners that fit the nut or bolt head properly.
iii. Keep your hands behind the cutting edge when using cutting tools.
iv. Keep unsheathed knives, chisels and other sharp tools in a safe place, not in your pocket.
v. Keep your tools clean and in good condition. Protect the edges of sharp tools, both when
carried and in store.
vi. Wear eye protection when chipping, scaling, dressing stone or concrete, fettling and cutting
rivets or whenever there is a danger of flying particles-remember others, as stated in the
section on PPE.
DO NOT
i. Use damaged or worn tools: hammers with loose heads, files with loose or split handles,
chisels with "mushroom" heads, spanners or wrenches with splayed jaws.
ii. Use a file without a handle-file tangs are dangerous.
iii. Place small tools on open grating floors - they may fall through and hit someone. Return them
to your toolbag after use
xii.2. POWER TOOLS
xii.2.1. Hazards
 Employees using electric tools must be aware of several dangers; the most serious is the
possibility of electrocution.
 Among the chief hazards of electric-powered tools are burns and slight shocks which can
lead to injuries or even heart failure. Under certain conditions, even a small amount of
current can result in fibrillation of the heart and eventual death. A shock also can cause the
user to fall off a ladder or other elevated work surface.
xii.2.2. Safety Instructions
DOs
i. Make sure before using a portable electric tool that it is in good order-look for signs of
overheating, loss of speed and irregular running noises. Also inspect the cable for signs of
damaged insulation and connections. If in doubt as to the safety of the tool, report to your
supervisor.

SAFETY
ii. Use the right tool for the job.

iii. Keep electric cables away from water, oil, heat and sharp edges. If left in gangways, cables
may be cut or cause someone to trip-whenever possible they must be carried overhead.
iv. Ensure you have the correct length of electric cable or compressed air hose serving the
apparatus- if it is too short get a proper extension.
v. Check for tightness all joints in air hose to tools.
vi. Check with your supervisor whether it is safe to use a portable grinding machine that has been
dropped accidentally-damage may have been caused to the wheel, resulting in breakage when
it is brought up to speed.
vii. Wear suitable ear/eye protection when using power tools.
viii. Store tools, hand lamps, cables and hoses in a safe and tidy fashion.
ix. Use gloves and appropriate safety footwear when using electric tools.
x. Store electric tools in a dry place when not in use.
xi. Keep work areas well lighted when operating electric tools.
xii. Ensure that cords from electric tools do not present a tripping hazard.
xiii. Remove all damaged portable electric tools from use and tag them: "Do Not Use."
xiv. Use Double-Insulated Tools.
xv. Keep cords away from heat, oil, and sharp edges (including the cutting surface of a power saw
or drill).
xvi. Disconnect tools when not in use, before servicing, and when changing accessories such as
blades, bits, etc.
DONT‟S
i. Carry a tool by the cord.
ii. Yank the cord to disconnect it from the receptacle.
iii. Avoid accidental starting. Do not hold fingers on the switch button while carrying a plugged-in
tool.
iv. Use electric tools in damp or wet locations unless they are approved for that purpose.
v. Lift or drag power tools by their cables.

SAFETY
vi. Attempt to change or dress an abrasive wheel unless you are authorized and competent to do
so.
vii. Force a portable grinder against the work as dangerous flat spots on the wheel may develop.
viii. Take your eyes off the job.
ix. Alter, adapt or interfere with the design function of the tool.
x. Another potential hazard is using extension cords with portable tools. In construction, these
cords suffer a lot of wear and tear. Often, the damage is only to the insulation, exposing
energized conductors. When a person handling the damaged cord contacts the exposed wires
while holding a metal tool case or contacting a conductive surface, serious electrical shock can
result, causing a fall, physical injury, or death.
xi. Since neither insulation nor earthing protects from these conditions, use other protective
measures. One acceptable method is a ground-fault circuit interrupter (GFCI).
xiii. SAFETY FROM DROPPED OBJECTS

The activities primarily responsible for causing dropped objects and materials are:
 While working at height
 While using portable tools
 While carrying out material lifting operations
 Equipment failure
 Loose fittings
 Rig Jack up / Jack down
Procedures for all the above mentioned activities can be referred for specific safety precautions to be
taken for them
xiii.1. MANAGEMENT OF DROPPED OBJECTS
All work centers of ONGC need to carry out a dropped-objects survey and management program
should be formulated. The following aspects should be looked into in order to manage this high
potential accident causing factor:
i. Use of proper PPE
ii. Identification of problems

SAFETY
iii. Inspection programmes

iv. Examination procedures
v. Means of continuous improvement, etc.
vi. Hand tool logbook
vii. Training of personnel
viii. Awareness campaigns
ix. Inclusion in toolbox talks, work permits, safety meetings, etc.
x. Poster campaigns
xi. Inventory of equipment
xii. Securing methods identification
xiii. Control of manufacturers' bulletins and alerts
xiv. Risk assessments for dropped objects
xv. Maintenance procedures
xvi. Records of modifications
xvii. Control of third-party equipment
xviii. Control of use of air hoists, operating procedures, etc.
xix. Continual improvement of control methods
xx. Incident reports
xxi. Identification of redundant equipment
xxii. Identification of risks associated with equipments
xxiii. Collision management
xiv. ELECTRICAL SAFETY

xiv.1. INTRODUCTION
Use of electricity not in a proper way can result in personal injury, even death, fire and explosion and
ultimately results a disaster. There it is mandatory and essential that electricity is used as per standard
code, rules & regulation. The observance of all provisions of Indian Electricity Rule, OMR and
petroleum rules is statutory requirement. The use of electricity in hazardous, explosive environment
needs a clear understanding of the subject.
The presence of flammable products in air in the form of gas or vapour can occur due to any leakage
from gaskets valves etc. or during normal operations like venting or bleeding. These released gas/

SAFETY
vapour could pose a fire hazard in any process plant, by acquiring any ignition source from light fittings,
electrical equipment e.g. motors, generators etc. and sometimes also due to static electricity or a
lightning.
The extent of risk would depend on the concentration of flammables in the area and the potential of the
ignition source. It is therefore, necessary that in the event of a gas leak, the LEL level of a particular
gas should not be allowed to reach by way of dilution of the atmosphere or if it is not possible at least
all ignition sources should be removed.
Note: Refer Guidelines on Electrical Safety document ( Annexed)
xv. HAZARDOUS AREA AND ITS CLASSIFICATION

A hazardous area may be defined as an area in which an explosive atmosphere is, or may be
expected to be, present in quantities such as to require special precautions for the construction,
installation and use of electrical apparatus.
Area classification is a method of analyzing and classifying the environment where explosive gas
atmospheres may occur so as to facilitate the proper selection and installation of apparatus to be used
safely in that environment, taking into account gas groups and temperature classes.
The main reasons for classifying the installation into hazardous areas are as follows:
i. To ensure that sources of ignition are segregated from sources of flammable gas or vapor
ii. To assist in the appropriate location of air inlets and outlets for ventilation systems or
combustion equipment
iii. To define the extent of flammable gas level from vents
iv. To ensure that life saving appliances, radioactive stores and emergency control points are
located in non-hazardous areas,
v. To determine the location of flammable gas detectors
vi. To determine the maximum allowable surface temperature for particular areas,
vii. To assist in the location of escape routes
xvi. SAFETY IN WELL LOGGING OPERATIONS

xvi.1. GENERAL
Onceawellisdrilledinanoilfield,itisnecessarytocollectinformationaboutcharacteristicsof
theformations,locationandthicknessofoilsands,typeandnatureofhydrocarbondepositsetc.
Theinformationisobtainedbyfieldgeophysicalparties.Specialwellloggingtoolsarelowered
bywirelineintothewellandtheseareoperatedandcontrolledelectrically fromaninstrument
truck,radioactivesubstancesarealsousedforlogging.

SAFETY
Loggingisdoneeitherinanopenholei.e. whencasinghasnotbeensetorinawellwhichis alreadyproducingoil.

Whiletheformerisknownasopenholelogging,thelatteriscalled productionlogging.
Ineithercase,ofcourse,thepurposeisthesame,i.e.toobtaininformation aboutoilbearingsand
zonesandotherformationparameters.
Inwelllogging,themainhazardsareduetohandlingofheavyandlongloggingtools,whichareof3-
6metreslongandweighupto100kgs;otherhazardsareduetoblowout,useofelectricityand
radioactivesubstances. Inproductionlogging,thereisfire hazardalso.
Note: Refer Safety Guidelines on well Logging Operations( annexed)
xvii. SAFETY IN GEOPHYSICAL SURVEY

xvii.1. GENERAL
Geophysicalsurveysarepartofexplorationforpetroleumresources.Inthisprocess,shotholes ofabout
100mmindiameteraredrilleduptodepthsof2-60mtrsbelowgroundorminiholepatternsor1m
orlessaredugandexplosivechargesarefiredtogenerateelasticwaveswhicharereflectedfrom
differentinterfacesbeneaththesurface.Thesereflectedwavesarepickedupassignalswiththe helpofgeo-
phonesplantedinthegroundandrecordedwithadigitalseismographmountedina
vehicle.Seismicsurveysarethuscarriedoutinwidelyvaryingterrainconditionsthroughoutthe country
bygeophysical parties.
Thefieldpartiesoperatefromcamps,whichareoftensetupinremoteareas.Apartyhasitsown
fleetofvehiclesforexplorationwork.Propermaintenanceandsafeoperationofvehiclesarevery important.
Thefieldpersonnelmustberegularlytrainedinrenderingfirstaidtoinjuredpersons.Besidesa
monthlyfirstaiddrillwillkeepthefieldpersonnelreadytohandleeffectivelyanemergency
situationwarrantingfirstaid.
Note: Safety Guidelines on well Logging Operations
xviii. EXPLOSIVE & RADIO ACTIVE MATERIAL

xviii.1. EXPLOSIVES:
xviii.1.1. Introduction
All explosive materials are hazardous of nature and required to be handled with utmost care.
It is therefore, imperative to identify areas of concern regarding handling (storage,
transportation and usage) of explosives in Geophysical and Logging operations. It is also
intended to reflect and adopt the international practices in handling explosives. The
personnel responsible for managing and handling explosives must follow the recommended
safe practices mentioned in this HSE Management System.

SAFETY
xviii.1.2. Objective
The basic objectives of this document are:
i. To create awareness among the personnel regarding various aspects of safety and security
while working / attending the explosives related activities.
ii. To assist in understanding the hazards involved in the explosives related activities and
setting/ensuring standard safe practices.
iii. To create awareness towards safe working and elimination of accidents related with
explosives.
iv. To provide all information required for getting licenses and documents required to be
maintained for storing, transportation and usage of explosives.
v. To put up the enforcing procedures to ensure the safety precautions and regulatory
requirements.
vi. To establish and maintain the highest safety standards in handling explosive materials, during
all phases concerned i.e. transportation, storage, and use.
Note: Refer Safety Manual for Handling of Explosives( Annexed).
xviii.2. RADIO ACTIVE MATERIAL
xviii.2.1. International classification of hazardous substances
Radioactive materials are covered under class 7 of International classification of hazardous
substances
xviii.2.2. Radioactive Materials:
All explosives and radioactive materials are hazardous in nature and required to be handled
with utmost care. The recommended dose limits of exposure / radiation by Health, Safety and
Environment Group of Bhabha Atomic Research Centre is given in Table - 1. Industrial and
medical uses of radiation do not present substantial radiation risks to workers provided the
safe practices are followed. The industrial workers should not lead to radiation exposures in
excess of such recommended level of the radiation dose. Otherwise, accidents may lead to
higher exposures and subsequently lead to biological hazards.
Note: Refer ONGC safety manual for handling of Explosives & Explosive rule 2008 &
BARD guidelines( Annexed)

SAFETY
xix. PIPELINE SAFETY

xix.1. GENERAL
Inanoilfield,transportationofcrudeoilandnaturalgasbypipelinesfromwellsuptorefineryor
primaryconsumerpointconsistsofthreedifferent typesofpipelines.
Firstlytheflowlines, theseare60to114mmdiameterpipelineslaidfromwellsto group
gatheringstations.Secondly,thecollectorlineswhichare125to212mmdiameterpipelines,laid
fromgroupgatheringstationtocentraltankfarm.Thirdly,theturnlineswhichare300to350
mmdiameterpipelineslaidfromcentraltankfarm torefinery orprimaryconsumerpoints.
Whileflowlinesandcollectorlinesarelaidoverlengthsof10to30kmswithintheoilfield,thetrunklinesare
crosscountrypipelinesandrunover severalhundredkilometers.
 Collectorlinesare150mmto200mmi.e.6"to8"ND.
 Trunkpipelinesare300mmto600mmi.e.12"to24"ND.
Note: Refer Standard Operating Procedure on Pipeline ( Annexed)
xx. FIRE SAFETY

xx.1. INTRODUCTION
In hydrocarbon industry, the risk of fire is always present right from exploration, drilling, production, and
processing to distribution. The fire hazards are ought to be controlled by better methods of supervision; use of
rapid detection system coupled with sound and safe operating practices but there remains always a possibility
for occurrence of a fire. Any small fire at initial stage may lead to a major disaster. Therefore all persons
deployed in oil and gas installations are to be individually responsible for fire prevention and should be capable
of giving alarm and simultaneously taking necessary emergency action in case of fire. This means that every
person engaged in hydrocarbon industries has to be a "fireman" and must receive information and training to
tackle fire emergency at once.
Note: Refer Guidelines on Fire Safety document ( Annexed)

SAFETY
Chapter – 8
TRAINING

SAFETY
Chapter -8
Training
GENERAL The Management program should establish and implement

training programs so that all personnel are trained to work
safety and are aware of the environmental considerations and
responsibilities. Training should address operating procedures
(Section 6), safe work practices(Section 7), and the emergency
response and control measures(Section 11)
INITIAL
Training
Certain training elements should be provided for the basic well-
being of personnel and the protection of the environment. For
example:
a. Orientation training
b. Non-operating emergencies (i.e., rescue and fire-fighting
c. Circumstantial training (i.e. hotwork, confined space entry,
lockout/tagout)
d. For applicable government regulations
Qualification criteria should be developed and implemented for

operating and maintenance personnel, as applicable, to ensure
they possess the required knowledge and skills to carry out their
assigned duties and responsibilities, including start up and
shutdown.
PERIODIC TRAINING Refresher training should be provided to maintain understanding

and adherence to current operating procedures. Periodic drills
should be established to verify retention of required knowledge
and skills.
COMMUNICA-TION The Management program should require personnel to be

trained or otherwise informed before they are expected to
operate the facility when changes are made in operating
procedures (Section 6), safe work practices (Section 7), or the
emergency response and control measures (Section 11).
CONTRACT-OR TRAINING

SAFETY
General :
Chapter – 8
TRAINING
1. Introduction
ONGC is an organization dealing with high risk multifaceted activities being carried out by its
employees and contractors. In order to ensure that these activities and tasks are carried out
in a productive and safe manner it is necessary to equip the personnel with adequate set of
skills. The competency matching of the personnel to the competency requirement for the
assigned job is carried out through a defined recruitment, hiring and training policy.
2. Objective
To impart training,and develop competence for personnel to enhance their knowledge and
skills and to ensure that the personnel joining the organization fresh, on transfer or on
contract are competent to carry out the responsibility assigned to them in safe and efficient
manner.
3.Recruitment and Orientation and hiring

Alltherecruitment ofONGCpersonnelisdonebyONGC’scorporate office as per the
“recruitment andpromotionpolicy” ofthecorporation.The transfers are
alsodoneonrequirementbasisaspertheguidelinesframedbythecorporate office.
PersonneljoiningONGC,prior to theirdeploymenttothe work centre are given a familiarization
cum orientation training at ONGCAcademy, Dehradunandatvarious work centres ofONGC.On
deployment totheplace of workafreshorientation/familiarization isgiventothe personnel
to make him aware of the operations.
ONGC has a defined competency criteria for hiring of contractual personnel for different
kinds of work. The competency criteria is based on minimum qualification and experience
requirement for specific jobs for which the contractual persons are being hired. Like the
regular employees contractual personnel are also imparted orientation/familiarization for
making them aware of the operations.

SAFETY
4.Familiarization/ Charge handing over and taking over.

A personwhojoins fresh orontransferfamiliarizes himself oftheongoingworkswitha procedure of
chargetakingover by interactingwiththe person whomheisgoingtorelieve or his
superiors.Onarrivingattheworkplacethe person goesthrough a process of orientation.Thisconsists of
familiarization with relevant regulations and the QHSE Management System adopted by the
organization and his roles and responsibilities within the system. Thesafety officer briefs the
individual about the safety system at the work placeand general safety rules, systems and
procedures.The individualisbriefedabout any other specificjobrelated procedures or
rulesbythe departmental inchargeofthedepartmentinwhichheisposted. The person on taking over is
thus filly equipped to handle his assignment.
Toascertainthatthe employeeunderstands the briefing,hecanbetestedeither orally or in

writing during the orientation.
The knowledge of the employees on board regarding safety procedures and rules is tested
from time to time by conducting tests and quizzes.
A. Mandatory Safety Training

ONGC has identified the following training programmes as mandatory for all ONGC
employees / contractual persons.
For offshore going personnel
1. Survival at Sea
2. Basic First Aid
3. Fire fighting and Fire protection
4. Helicopter Underwater Escape Training
For personnel working in onshore fields

1. Mines vocational training
2. First aid.
IADC approved well control training is also mandatory for Installation Managers, Shift in
charges and Asst. Shift in charges on the rigs.
B. Imparting Training
ONGC Academy, Dehradun, Institute of Petroleum Safety, Health
andEnvironmentManagement, GoaandRegionalTrainingInstitutes in each region, School of

SAFETY
Maintenance Practice, Vadodraaresomeofthenodalagencieswhoconductandcoordinate

training forONGCpersonnel. They havespecializedfacultiesonsafety,
qualityandenvironmentmanagementbesidesrequirements of company’s other functional
areas. They also have MOUs with specialized training and management institutes like MDI,
Gurgaon, different IIMs, ISB Hyderabad and ASCI, Hyderabad for areas where they do not
have the requisite faculty.
The identification of knowledge and skill training needs for all ONGC personnel is carried
out centrally by ONGC Academy, Dehradun which is the specialized training arm of ONGC.
ONGC Academy carries out detailedanalysisofvarious
kindsofactivitiesintheorganizationandmakes
anassessmentoftheskillsandknowledgenecessary foralltheemployeesto carry out their jobs
efficiently as well as to keep up with the technological developmentsaround the
world.Mostofthesetrainings fortheexecutivesare conductedatAcademy premises. However,
professional trainings offeredbysome agencieslikeIIMs, MDI Gurgaon,ASCIHyderabad
oragenciesbasedoutside India may be conducted at the trainer’s premises or elsewhere.
ONGC hasitsownRegional Training Institutes where the knowledge and

skilldevelopmenttraining programmes fortheemployeesareconducted.The Regional Training
Institute located at Panvel caters to the training requirements of employeesof Neelamand
Heera Asset.
The identification of safety, environment and Health training needs for all ONGC personnel
is carried out centrally by Institute of Petroleum Safety Health and Environment
Management, Goa which is an institute of ONGC specializing in Safety, Health and
Environment Management. Most of the training programmes for all ONGC personnel are
conducted at IPSHEM Goa, either with the help of internal faculty or with external faculty.
Agencies like British safety Council and DNV who specialize in imparting HSE trainings, also
conduct their training programmes at IPSHEM for the ONGC employees. Some specialized
HSE training are conducted at places other than IPSHEM also.
After identification of training needs, both ONGC Academy and IPSHEM publish yearly
training calendar. Work centre managements identify the suitability of training from the
available calendar for personnel working under their control and names are forwarded to
the HR department. The HR department nominates the identified persons for the
respective trainings. The needs are identified keeping in view the job being carried out by

SAFETY
the individual, his qualifications, his experience on the job and training undergone in the
past. A training matrix is prepared listing the identified trainings for personnel at different
levels and discipline.
The HR departmentmaintains the records of the training.
C. Specialized Training Programmes

In casethe work centre management feelsthat all the training required bythe engineers are
not coveredinthetraining calendarthentheycanapproach any outside agency, which can give
the required training. The concerned engineeris
thennominatedtothesaidprogrammeand thecompetentauthority approves the
nominationfor that programme.
Whenever somenewequipmentorsystemisbeingintegratedwiththe
existingsystemappropriate personnel are trainedbytheequipmentsuppliers at their premises
in operation of the equipment or the system. ONGC’s School of Maintenance Practice also
imparts training to its employees on maintenance and operation of all equipment being
used in the organization.
Technical competence of the contractual workforce deployed at the platform is ensured by

clearly defining the competence requirement of the personnel to be hired for the specific
jobs during the hiring process.
On arrival at the platforms the contractual personnel are familiarized with systems and
procedures of ONGC through briefing carried out at the platform. In addition to this specific
pre job briefing is provided to the contractual workers before they take up any job.
The HR section takes financial sanction and approval for nomination from competent
authority.
All ONGC personnel arerequiredtosubmita“feedback form”onthetraining course undergone

after they return from a training programme. The immediate superior of the person
ensures that the person has acquired the necessary skills for carrying out the work assigned
to him by taking either a written or oral test.

SAFETY
Chapter – 9
QUALITY ASSURANCE
& EQUIPMENT SAFETY
INTEGRITY

SAFETY
Chapter – 9
QUALITY ASSURANCE & EQUIPMENT SAFETY INTEGRITY
GENERAL The Management program should develop and implement

procedures so that critical equipment is designed, fabricated,
installed, tested, inspected, monitored, and maintained in a
manner consistent with service requirements, manufacturer’s
recommendations, or industry standards.
INSTALL-ATION Appropriate checks and inspection procedures should be

established and implemented before start up to verify the
installation of critical equipment is consistent with design specs
and manufacturer’s instructions.
MAINTEN-ANCE Maintenance programs that include appropriate inspection and

testing should be established and implemented for critical
equipment to sustain ongoing mechanical integrity.
TESTING AND INSPECTION Testing, inspection, calibration and monitoring programs for
critical equipment should be established. These programs
should include:
a. A list of critical equipment
b. Testing and inspection procedures
c. Documentation of completed testing and inspections

SAFETY
Chapter – 9
QUALITY ASSURANCE & EQUIPMENT SAFETY INTEGRITY
1. OBJECTIVES
The purpose of safety systems is to protect personnel, facility and the environment from the
consequences of upsets of process operations. These upsets are nothing but the undesirable events
that may arise due to the inability of operators to operate the process within design limits. It is thus
essential that all such undesirable events are identified and reliable protective measures are provided
which will prevent those or minimize the consequences, apart from helping in bringing back the process
operations to normalcy.
Safety Analysis is one technique that should be used to carry out the task.
2. WHAT IS INTEGRITY?
Integrity is the ability of critical safety equipment to prevent any release of hydrocarbons from process,
which is the basic threat to safety of personnel, plant and the environment, or minimize its adverse
consequences. These safety critical items are provided on various static (e.g. process vessels, tanks,
pipelines, rigs, hulls, tanks, High Pressure lines etc.) and rotary equipments e.g. pumps, Compressors,
gas turbines, Draw works etc) either to act as primary or secondary protection systems. There will be
certain other auxiliary services (e.g. Fire Pumps, fire and Gas detection and fire suppression systems)
that help in the process control.
3. SCOPE
The guidelines are prepared based on API-RP-14C, API-RP-14J and API-RP-14G.
It is intended to provide basic guidelines on how to ensure safety integrity through carrying out safety
analysis for identification of the undesirable events in process operations and to list safety critical items
and logics in the “SAFE Chart”. Also testing procedures to ensure safety integrity of all those safety
critical items would be suggested.
4. GENERAL INTEGRITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS

Every production installation including offshore platforms, process plants shall develop installation
specific safety integrity assurance procedures and include all the identified safety critical items.
An inventory of all primary, secondary and auxiliary safety critical items meant for preventing process
undesirable events, shall be identified through a „Safety Analysis‟ and recorded on a Safety Analysis
Table (SAT).

SAFETY
A „SAFE Chart‟ can be prepared and be used to depict all the safety critical instrumentations and logics
The Integrity assurance procedure shall include schedules for integrity checks for the inventory of
safety critical equipment/items.
The Integrity assurance procedure shall have provisions for periodic reporting of the schedule integrity
checks and troubleshooting.
The Preventive maintenance schedule shall include all such critical items and should get priority.
5. STEPS TO CARRY OUT SAFETY ANALYSIS

Describe the process by a detailed flow schematic and establish the operating parameters.
From the Safety Analysis Tables (SATs), verify the need for basic safety devices to protect each
process component viewed as an individual unit.
The Safety Analysis Checklist (SAC) for individual components is then used to justify the elimination of
any safety device when each process component is analyzed in relation to other process components.
Using the Safety Analysis Function Evaluation (SAFE) chart, logically integrate all safety devices and
self-protected equipment into a complete platform safety system.
6. PROTECTION CONCEPT
The safety protection system should provide two levels of protection to prevent or minimize the effects
of process equipment failures. One is of highest order i.e. primary and the next is secondary protection.
There could be other systems that provide additional protections are the fire & Gas detection and
suppression systems.
Besides, the two levels of protection should be in addition to the normal process control devices and be
independent of each other.
7. SAFETY ANALYSIS
The safety analysis of each process component highlights undesirable events (effects of equipment
failures, process upsets, accidents, etc.) from which protection should be provided, along with
detectable abnormal conditions that can be monitored for safety surveillance. These detectable
conditions are used to initiate action through automatic controls to prevent or minimize the effect of
undesirable events.
8. SAFETY ANALYSIS TABLE (SAT)

The safety analysis outcome is presented in a table, known as SAT Table. The table incorporates the
causes and consequences (effects) of each undesirable event and the detectable process parameters

SAFETY
which will be monitored. The table also mentions the primary and secondary protections to be provided
and maintained to eliminate or prevent the chances of the undesirable condition to occur. Examples of
SAT table have been shown in Table- 1 & Table -2 in subsequent pages.
9. USE OF SAFE CHART

The Safety Analysis Function Evaluation (SAFE) chart, is used to relate all sensing devices, SDVs,
shutdown devices, and emergency support systems to their functions. The SAFE chart should list all
process components and Emergency Support Systems with their required safety devices, and should
list the functions to be performed by each device. Any alternate device should also be shown on SAFE
chart. Completion of the SAFE chart provides a means of verifying the design logic of the basic safety
system.
10. INTEGRITY TESTING REQUIREMENTS

Performance testing provides a practical method of confirming the system‟s ability to perform the
design safety functions.
On initial installation, tests should be conducted to verify that the entire system, including the final
shutdown valve or control device, is designed and installed to provide proper response to abnormal
conditions.
Thereafter, periodic operational tests should be performed, at least annually, to substantiate the
integrity of the entire system, including process station or platform shutdown, if necessary.
Specific test procedures for individual safety devices are to be carried out. A reporting method should
be developed to provide for orderly accumulation of test data that can be used for operational analyses,
reliability studies, and reports that may be required by regulatory agencies.
Note: Refer IRR document of ONGC
Note: Refer Approved document on Incident Reporting, Investigation and Analysis

with Annexures ( Annexed)

SAFETY
Chapter – 10
PRE STARTUP REVIEW

SAFETY
Chapter 10
Pre-start up Safety Review
The Management program should require that the

- commissioning
Requires a commissioning process
process for include
new and a pre-startup
safety and environmental review for new and
significantly modified facilities
significantly to confirm
modified the Criteria
facilities.
requirements are:
following:
a. Construction and equipment within
GENERAL specifications
b. Safety, environmental, operating, maintenance
a. Construction and
andemergency
equipmentprocedures
specifications.
are in place
c. Safety and environmental
b. Safety, environmental, operating, maintenance, info is current
d. Hazard analysis recommendations have been
emergency procedures
considered and are in place.
implemented
e. Operating personnel training completed
c. Safety and environmental info is current
f. Program to address management of change
d. Hazard analysis recommendations implemented
e. Training of operating personnel completed
f. Programs to address MOC in place.
Criteria for Pre-start up

SAFETY
Chapter 10
Pre-start up Safety Review
Introduction
Objective
Pre-start up safety review is done before the start up of a new process unit/equipment and/or after a
modification/turn-around in the process unit/ equipment, and/or introduction of a new chemical to the
process. This is required to ensure that any new hazards cropped up in these cases are noted and the
necessary safeguards are taken before starting a process unit/ equipment/ machinery etc. The central point
in the whole exercise usually is to ensure that the responsibilities for the discipline-wise reviews have been
fixed in order to bring authenticity into the review process so that safe start-up actions can be taken
Scope & Requirements

The procedure shall be applicable to any change proposal in both Onshore as well as Offshore operations.
The minimum requirements are that the Pre-start-up Safety Review shall address the following issues:
 Construction and equipment are in accordance with design specifications;
 Safety, operating, maintenance, and emergency procedures are in place and adequate;
 For new facilities, a PHA has been performed and recommendations resolved or implemented;
 Modified facilities meet requirements;
 Management of change; and training of each employee involved in the process has been
completed
Pre-start up procedures
Conditions under which Pre-Start up Safety Review is a must:
1. Flammable liquids are located or dispensed in a building, room or area

2. Any of the following are used as protective elements in connection with an apparatus:
 Safeguarding devices that signal the apparatus to stop, the control systems, tripping
systems etc.
 Barrier guards that use interlocking mechanical or electrical safeguarding devices
3. Materials, articles or things are placed or stored on a structure that is a rack or stacking structure

SAFETY
4. A process involves a risk of ignition or explosion that creates a condition of imminent hazard to a
person's health or safety.
5. The use of a dust collector involves a risk of ignition or explosion that creates a condition of
imminent hazard to a person's health or safety
6. The construction, addition, installation or modification relates to a lifting device, travelling crane or
automobile hoist
7. A process uses or produces a substance that may result in the exposure of a worker in excess of
any occupational exposure limit set out in Statutory Regulations.
General Procedures
.
1. During the pre-start-up, there are several aspects which are to be considered in every important
discipline of the operational activities, e.g. process, mechanical and electrical maintenance,
instrumentation, Health & Safety, environmental issues etc.
2. In some cases suitability of the existing equipments, vessels and pipelines are required to be
assessed to cope up with the changes being made.
3. It is to be ensured that a PHA has been done to assess any additional hazards.
4. It also necessitates that the emergency procedures are reviewed to accommodate such scenarios.
5. Any changes in the process must be brought to the notice of the working population through
awareness programs and the available skills may have to be upgraded through MOC training
courses.
Specific Steps and Responsibility
1. Every Installation/process plant/platform shall develop a „Pre-Start-up Safety Review format‟ for the
purpose based on a sample one given in Format - 1 & 2, which are generic and may be modified
according to the type of plant/equipment/facility etc.
2. For every start-up operation, a multidisciplinary „Pre-start-up Safety Review/PHA Committee‟ shall
be constituted. Of course, there could be one standing review committee for all installations within
a mine area / process plant/platform.
3. In addition to carryout checking using the „Pre-start-up Safety Review format‟, a PHA (Process
Hazard Analysis) in form of HAZOP/HAZAN/ HAZID shall be required, , to assess any additional
hazards.
4. Depending on the complexity of the process or equipment, such PHA could be done by the Pre-
start-up Safety Review/PHA Committee through a simple safety assessment or refer the same to
IEOT.
5. Based on the outcome of the PHA, the Review Committee shall update the existing Emergency
Response Plan to accommodate such additional scenarios and put up to the Mines
Manager/Operations head/OIM for start-up approval.

SAFETY
6. Installation Manager/Process I/C shall be responsible to carry out awareness programs/training to

bring the issues to the notice of the affected working personnel.
7. In case the need be, the skill level of the start-up personnel shall be enhanced through specialized
training.
Pre - Start - up Process Responsibility
Start - up Request
Initiator for Request

Proposal Review/ forwa r ding
Installati on Manager/
Pre -Start -up Safety Review
Pr ocess I/C
Approval for Start - up
Pre - Start - up Safety

Review /PHACommit tee
Updating of Emergency Plan
Training/Awareness of Person s Mines Manager /Plant

Operations Head/OIM
Start - up
Fig.: Pre-Start-up Safety Review Process and Responsibility

SAFETY
Format -1
PROCESS UNITS/FACILITY PRE-START-UP SAFETY REVIEW
PLANT/PROJECT:
Process Unit: Sour Gas Unit Location:
Unit No.: Date of Checking:
Sr Items to be checked  Comments
1 All the Hydro-test blinds are removed
2 All flanges are boxed up with correct rated gaskets

3 All control valves/other equipment like level /pressure/temp. switches
are on line
4 All hydrocarbon and H2S gas detectors are on line
5 All LG/LT/PT/FT etc. transmitting impulse tubing are properly
connected with no loose tube fittings
6 All thermo wells are boxed up
7 All correct PSVs are lined up

8 All open vents and closed drains are either closed or blinded
9 All temporary hose connections which were fitted during shutdown
are removed
10 All the pipe line blinds which were fitted/removed during isolation are
fitted with proper spacers before hydrocarbon entry
11 Oil level checked for bearing in the HT motors
12 The units are properly inertized and system fit for gas intake
13 All the control valves are stroke checked and rectified for mismatch
14 Leak check of the system is performed using inert gas at the

SAFETY
available pressure
15 All sampling and draining points are properly closed/isolated

16 Coupling guards of all compressors and pumps are fitted
17 Earthing connections are checked and are Ok
18 Checking of modules and mongering from substation ends are done
19 All Flame proof fittings are checked and Ok
20 All lockouts are released and lock out permits closed
21 All un-necessary scaffoldings and wooden planks are removed

(except few for further job, if any)
22 The unit area is free from all obstructions

23 All necessary safety instruction boards are in place
24 All fire extinguishers are in their original places
25 Eye wash showers are working

26 All life saving equipments are in their original places
27 All the water sprinklers on pumps and other equipment are in line
28 All the steam hoses(steam lancers) and compressed air hoses are in
their places and not lying on ground
29 All nitrogen trailers, maintenance tools, contractor‟s equipment are

removed
30 Over all House keeping is adequate
31 Pending items, if any, to be made ok before actual start-up :

1.
2.
3.
4.
32 The unit is fit for start up and all aspects mentioned above are
checked and found Ok.

SAFETY
33 Others
Pre-start checks by*: ______________
_______________
Date:
(* Multidisciplinary Team Members)

SAFETY
Format -2
EQUIPMENT PRE-START-UP SAFETY REVIEW
PLANT/PROJECT:
Equipment Name/Tag: AIR Handling Unit Location:
System/Area Served: Related Equipment:
ITEM  COMMENTS
Commissioning lock-out procedures reviewed

Operation and maintenance information
Mounting/support system and vibration isolation
Seismic restraints
Equipment guards
Alignment & V-belt tension
Freedom of rotation
Lubrication
Plenums clean and free of loose material
Temporary start-up filters
Fire & balance dampers positioned
Duct system tested and cleaned
Access doors, Insulation and interior lights
Local valving/piping (steam, condensate, drains)
Drain pans
Heating and cooling coils
Outside air, return air and mixed air dampers

SAFETY
Humidifier
Building & fan room cleanliness
Electrical wiring complete
Overload protection (sized correctly)
Disconnect switch (tested)
Instrumentation (temperature, volume, pressure &
humidity )
Control system - point to point checks complete
Pre-start checks by*: ______________
_______________ Date:
(* Multidisciplinary Team Members)

SAFETY
Chapter – 11
EMERGENCY
RESPONSE & CONTROL

SAFETY
Chapter – 11
EMERGENCY RESPONSE & CONTROL
Criteria for - Requires that emergency response and control plans are
Emergency in place and validated by drills per SEMS program
Response and schedule. Plans must include:
Control
a. Emergency Action Plan that assigns qualified persons at
facility
b. Emergency Control center for facility
c. Training and drills, which have realistic scenarios, and

also incorporate evacuation procedures. Analysis and
critique of each drill.

SAFETY
Chapter – 11
EMERGENCY RESPONSE & CONTROL
1. Objectives
The Oil and Gas Exploration & Production Activities are inherently dangerous. Though built-in safety systems
at the design stages greatly reduced the probabilities of worst disasters, it can not totally eliminate the
chances of failures and the resulting disaster situations from occurring. That is why, it is intended to anticipate
the worst that could happen to ONGC facilities and operations and to adequately plan for mitigating the
consequences of such disasters by mobilizing the internal and external resources. ONGC management also
intents to bring back the situation to pre-disaster level as soon as possible and strive for maintaining business
continuity.
2. Scope
This code is applicable to all Oil & Gas E&P activities including process plants. Separate chapter has been
added for offshore ERP requirements, containing specific guidelines to be followed for offshore process
complexes.
The guidelines are concerned to mainly the Onsite Disaster (Emergency) Planning, which is the responsibility
of the industry management. Certain guidelines are given for providing inputs to the Offsite-
Disaster(Emergency) Planning aspects also, which is the prime responsibility of the District Administration
under The Chemical Accidents(Emergency Planning, Preparedness and Response), 1996.
3. General Requirements:
3.1. Legal Requirement
For Onsite Emergency Planning

Section 41-B(4) of the Factories Act, 1948 (Amended 1987) requires that every occupier of a hazardous
factory shall draw up an on site emergency plan and detailed disaster control measures for his factory and
make known to the workers and the general public in the vicinity, the safety measures required to be taken in
the event of an accident taking place. Also Rule 13 of Manufacture, Storage and Import of Hazardous
Chemical Rules 1989 (Amended in 1994) requires that occupiers prepare an onsite plan for the factory.
Similarly, clause-72 of Oil Mines Regulations (OMR), 1984 requires the Mines owner to formulate a
contingency plan for fire and clause-64 requires development of an emergency plan for petroleum pipelines
specifying actions to be taken in the event of fire, uncontrolled escape of petroleum from pipelines, bursting or
damage to the pipelines. Also, Clause- 45(3) requires preparation of emergency plan for blow-out of oil and
gas wells. Similarly, Rule no. 58 of Petroleum & Natural Gas ( Safety in Offshore Operations ) Rules, 2008

SAFETY
requires establishing emergency preparedness strategy against situations of hazard & accident including
health emergency.
For Offsite Emergency Planning

Statutorily, as per Rule-14 of MSIHC Rules, it shall be the duty of the concerned District authority to prepare
and keep up-to-date (an adequate off-site emergency plan containing particulars specified in schedule 12 and
detailing how emergencies relating to a possible major accident on that site will be dealt with. In preparing the
plan the concerned authority shall consult the occupier and such other persons as it may deem necessary.
The rules on "Chemical Accidents (Emergency Planning, Preparedness and Response),1996 compliments the
set of rules on accident prevention and preparedness notified under the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 in
1989 entitled "Manufacture, Storage and Import of Hazardous Chemicals Rules" and envisages a 4-tier crisis
management system in the country
3.2. Other Requirements

i. Each installation shall prepare an ERP based on the emergency scenarios envisaged in the Risk
Register.
ii. Each asset/Plant shall prepare and maintain an Onsite DMP, Offsite DMP and installation specific
ERPs appropriate to the scope, complexity and associated HSE risks (identified through a Risk
Analysis) for facilities and activities, including identification of maximum credible accident(crisis)
scenarios and their potential impacts.
iii. Each Onshore Installation (whether Surface, Drilling or work-over) shall prepare installation –specific
ERP, and an Onsite DMP with information of offsite emergencies, shall be prepared at the Asset
Level.
iv. Process Plants may include unit-specific ERPs within its Onsite DMP as one document, as the
process units are within the same complex.
v. All relevant portions of DMPs and ERPs shall be communicated to the employees, contractors‟
personnel, statutory agencies and other interested parties and stakeholders.
vi. Periodic Mock-exercises shall be undertaken to ensure that all concerned personnel are aware and
prepared to respond to such crisis situations.
vii. Updating of DMPs and ERPs shall be an ongoing process. All lessons learned from past incidents
and drills shall be incorporated.
viii. All emergency response equipments, facilities and other appliances shall be maintained based on a
pre-planned schedule and shall be kept in working order to meet these ends.
3.3. Specific Requirements & Responsibilities
Installation Level / Process Plant unit level / platform level / Rigs:

i. Installation manager/process incharge shall prepare an ERP based on the emergency scenarios
envisaged in the Risk Register, identified through a Qualitative Risk Matrix and/or a QRA.
ii. The ERP shall be evaluated by the MSO/Group HSE/Plant HSE/platform Safety officer.

SAFETY
iii. The ERP shall then be approved by the Mines Manager/Plant Operation Head/OIM (Offshore
Installation Manager)
iv. The ERP shall be practiced in the periodic mock-drills (not later than a month) by the Installation
Manager along with his team. More frequent drills could be done at the installation level.
v. The lessons learned in each such drill shall be recorded in the mock drill format (Format-II) and
reported to Group HSE /Plant HSE monthly.
vi. Installation manager/Mines Manager/Unit Process Incharge shall arrange implementation of the
measures towards bridging inadequacy found during mock-drills.
vii. ERP shall be reviewed yearly based on the „lessons learned‟.
4. Guidelines for Preparation of ERP & DMP
The primary purpose of the emergency plan is to equip ourselves with required resources and information for
prompt implementation of the actions. The Plan must be able to ensure that in the event of an emergency, the
source of hazard is controlled promptly and the damage to human life and property minimized.
The overall objective of a sound disaster plan is to reduce the possible consequences of the emergency by:
 preventing fatalities and injuries

 minimizing damage to buildings, materials, and equipment and
 hastening of the resumption of normal operations.
Disaster planning process should include the following steps:
 Assess the Risk

 Identify Requirements
 Mobilize Resources
 Develop Incident Command System(ICS)
Disaster Management deals with the following aspects:
 Command, Control, and emergency communications

 Safety of people and other livestock
 Protection of company properties and plant
 Recovery and Restoration of industrial activity
 Administration and Logistics supports
 Dealing with community concerns
Other issues are:
 involving the community

SAFETY
 entering into mutual aid agreements

 arranging community services
 providing public information and
 communicating with the media
5. Contents of an ERP
An ERP shall be prepared installation-specific and for Level-1 responses and shall include the following
aspects, at minimum in the sequence as mentioned:
i. Introduction and Details of the installation/Unit

ii. Installation Siting Details (location maps)
iii. Installation layout details
iv. Brief Description of Processes and information on storages with built-in control measures.
v. Process hazards and the control measures
vi. Based on Risk assessment and HAZOP,overall risk picture of the installation
vii. Description of the emergency scenarios based on Risk Analysis.
viii. Scenario-specific emergency actions or responses to prevent escalation.
ix. Emergency Alerting Procedures(1st and 2nd alerts) & Communication Hierarchy (see annexure-1 & II)
x. Evacuation Plan, Access Routes and Assembly Points
xi. Roles and Responsibility of Emergency Controllers/Coordinators, Key personnel of the installation
with their contact details.
xii. Details of “mutual-aid scheme” with turnout methodology, and Procedures for external support.
xiii. Details of the proposed actions to be taken in case the emergency extends to the outside of
premises.
xiv. Procedures to effect rescue and evacuation and to account for the injured and casualties.
xv. Re-entry and resumption of work procedures on normalization of emergency
xvi. Procedures for „All Clear” proclamation.
6. Contents of an Onsite DMP
The scope of an on-site Disaster plan is to contain aspects that will help avert such emergencies and put the
industry back to normalcy very quickly after the emergency ceases.
The contents of the Onsite DMP may somewhat vary based on the Acts under which an installation operates
e.g. Mines Act‟1952/Oil Mines Regulations,1984 or The Factories Act,1984(as amended 1987).

SAFETY
As such, an Onsite DMP shall be prepared for level-II responses and in general, should contain the following
33 categories of information at minimum in sequence:
i. Introduction and Details of the Asset/Plant

ii. Plant Siting Details (location maps)
iii. Plant layout details
iv. Brief Description of Processes and information on storages with built-in control measures.
v. Process hazards and the control measures.
vi. Other hazards (mechanical, electrical and biological) and control measures with Hazardous Area
Classification.
vii. Details of the Risk picture(Qualitative and/or Quantitative) based on risk analysis i.e. Frequency-wise
and Consequence-wise)
viii. Credible Emergency Scenarios identified and its description of consequences including evacuation
distances.
ix. Scenario-specific emergency actions or responses
x. Evacuation Plan and Assembly Points
xi. Emergency Alerting Procedures(1st and 2nd alerts) & Communication Hierarchy (see annexure-I & II)
xii. Roles and Responsibility of Emergency Controllers/Coordinators, Key personnel with their contact
details.
xiii. Emergency Control Room, its Staffing and Facilities
xiv. Resources availability for Onsite Disaster
xv. Details of First-aid and Medical facilities
xvi. Emergency Alarm and Siren Details
xvii. Emergency Transport Arrangements
xviii. Details of other essential facilities
xix. MSDS Information
xx. Pollution Abatement and Control Measures
xxi. Information on Waste Disposal
xxii. Weather Details and Atmospheric Conditions
xxiii. Internal & External Communication facilities and procedures
xxiv. Offsite Emergency Information and sparability of resources(Communication flow-chart at Annexure-
III)
xxv. Mutual-aid Schemes and resources availability
xxvi. Declaration of Onsite Emergency(Responsibility & Procedure)(Format-3)

SAFETY
xxvii. Procedures to inform authorities including Statutory Authority

xxviii. Procedures to provide authoritative and verified information to the news media.
xxix. Procedures for Treatment of injured, identify the fatalities and to inform and help relatives.
xxx. Procedures to assess damages and the Insurance claim.
xxxi. Procedures to ensure safety of the works before personnel re-enter and resume work to maintain
business continuity.
xxxii. Procedures to preserve records, equipment etc. and to organise investigation into the cause of the
emergency and to suggest preventive measures to stop its recurrence
xxxiii. Procedures for periodical rehearsal of the plan.
xxxiv. Procedures for Updating the Plan
xxxv. Procedures for dissemination of Emergency information to all interested parties e.g. employees,
contractors‟ personnel, visitors etc.
7. Contents of Offsite DMP Information
District Authorities are responsible for the preparation of Offsite DMP for the entire district taking information
from all the industries situated in the district. The offsite information that an industrial installation/process unit
of ONGC shall provide to the District Authorities, have to be included in the Onsite DMP also.
Hence while preparing the Offsite DMP information; following shall be detailed in a sequence:
i. Description of the unit within the installation/plant that has been identified to cause an Offsite
emergency scenario with the built-in protection system available to make it unlikely i.e. ALARP.
ii. Description of the Scenarios likely to cause an offsite emergency with their consequence distances
taken from the Risk Analysis report.
iii. The scenarios shall be depicted on the location map of the area where the installation/plant is
located.
iv. The population data in and around the installation shall be mentioned taken from the latest censer
data.
v. Details of Response actions that would be taken by the installation/Asset/process plant
vi. Details of actions supposed to be available from District Authorities are to be spelt out.
vii. The resources that can be spared by the installation/Asset/Plant for the Offsite emergency.
viii. The details of resources available under the Mutual-aid scheme entered by the
installation/asset/plant.
ix. The names of the responsible Emergency coordinators from the installation side with their contact
details.
x. The Contact details of the district public departments from where assistance might be sought.

SAFETY
xi. The details of the offsite emergency information which are to be shared with the neighbouring
populations/villages and the Do‟s and Don‟ts for them to adhere, to save themselves from such a
situation.
8. Guidelines on „Mutual-Aid Scheme‟
Under an Onsite DMP, the response requirements and resources are supposed to be mobilized from within
the organization itself, i.e. the installations/Assets/Plants of the Company. However, experiences suggest that
in actual situation, the size of the disaster may normally be expected to be so big that the company‟s
Asset/Plant may have to go for external help. This is why „Mutual Aid Agreements‟ are necessary.
A Mutual Aid Agreementis a pre-arranged agreement developed between interested parties to render
assistance to each other at the time of crisis. It can be an MOU (Memorandum of Understanding) or a non-
judicial agreement.
Mutual aid arrangements should be worked out in the Onsite plan to facilitate additional help in the following
areas:
 fire fighting
 rescue operation
 manpower support
 medical aid or
 Rescue, fire and life saving equipments etc.
For an effective mutual aid scheme, the following exchange of information is considered essential among the
mutual aid members:
The types of hazards in each plant and fire fighting measures.
 The type of equipment, that would be deployed and procedures for making the replenishment of
resources used in controlling emergency.
 Written procedures which spell out the communication system for help and how it will be responded.
This is also required to get acquainted with operation of different fire fighting equipment available at
Mutual aid members and compatibility for connecting at users place.
 Joint orientation program for staff, joint inspection and mock drills.
The agreement should bring out the areas of cooperation in such a way so as to augment the capabilities of
each other. Issues to be discussed and recorded are:
i. Fire Fighting and other equipment available

ii. Fire fighting equipment which can be spared

SAFETY
iii. PPEs available / can be spared

iv. Number of experts and trained personnel available
v. Types and No. of antidotes available / can be spared
vi. Quantity and types of decontamination substances available / can be spared
vii. Gas detectors and other equipment availability and separable quantity
viii. Number of ambulances and other vehicles available / can be spared
ix. Number of public warning system available / spared
x. Number of medical equipment and life saving drugs available / can be spared
xi. Other equipment like cranes and portable generators etc.
Consideration should be given to the turn-out methodology of external help that could be adopted for
emergency response at the time of crisis. This should be based on the capability and the type of help needed
by the affected industrial unit. Travel distance by the responder should be the key factor for such a decision.
Making an agreement with an industry unfavourably situated wind direction wise should also be weighed and
additional partners may be needed.
 Periodicity of the meeting of all mutual-aid member industries should be fixed and conducted
accordingly.
 Any exercise or an actual handling of emergencies should be detailed as far as the „lessons learned‟
is concerned, for the benefit of all members.
 Periodic visits to each other‟s locations would help in familiarizing and assist in quick response.
 A list of core-competency (list of experts) for different types of disasters should be drafted and be
utilized as the need arises during emergency operations.
 Mutual aid emergency team should be well aware about the hazards & risk of plant operation &
building area
9. Guidelines on Conducting Mock-exercises
Regardless of the type of disaster plan (ERP, Onsite DMP or an Offsite one), its imperative to continually
review and exercise what the plan is supposed to accomplish i.e. the all-round preparedness to deal with any
disaster.
There are various ways to practice a plan starting from a close-room desk test (or a Table-top exercise) to a
full scale on field mock exercise, to test the preparedness and thereby enhancing the response capabilities of
the installation, plant or an Asset.
The following should be considered for conducting a successful Mock-exercise:

SAFETY
1. A yearly plan (Format-I)should be prepared for conducting and recording the mock-exercises for the
various identified disaster scenarios with a clear mention of whether a particular drill would involve
mutual aid agencies or not.
2. The scenarios for such exercises should be selected from the high risk-areas and near real
approach of actual fire fighting / evacuation operations should be undertaken
3. Every such on-field mock-exercises should be preceded with a Table-top exercise involving identified
Emergency Coordinators and other key personnel.
4. Table-top exercise could be dramatized to bring in the near-actual seriousness among the
coordinators, as is expected in a real emergency situation. Knowledge of individual responsibilities
should also be evaluated through paper tests or personal interviews during safety competitions and
internal inspections.
5. The system of posting the observers during various mock-exercises should be implemented. The
critical areas where „Observers‟ could be posted include Emergency Control Room, Central Process
Control Room, site control room, Mustering stations /Assembly points/Evacuation centres etc.
6. There shall be Siren Sound Code for Emergency Alerting for different types of emergencies e.g. Fire,
explosion, toxic release etc. and the same shall be used during Mock-exercises also. Siren Codes as
mentioned in Table-1 should be followed, which has been devised in line with OISD-STD-116. Siren
codes shall be displayed in all the prominent locations in the installation/plant and should be the part
of all safety briefings and training programs.
7. The mock-exercises should be planned in such a way to include both during and after office hour
situations, as well as during late night and early morning hours.
8. The mock-exercises may be broadcasted in advance keeping certain elements secret e.g. exact
timings, location of the exercise etc. Total surprise exercises may be resorted to only after taking into
account the complexity of the operation and the level of integration between process units.
9. Every Mock-exercise shall be followed by a “Post-Mock-drill meeting” and all the emergency
coordinators including the Incident Controller and other key personnel shall be present. The
observers shall describe their findings at the meeting. Both Note-worthy points and the shortcomings
shall be discussed.
10. The lapses including those corresponding to the responses, identified during all such exercises shall
be recorded in a prescribed format (Format-II) and the results should then be used to revise the plan
to address those inadequacies, and the cycle should then be repeated until the preparedness
reaches the adequate and acceptable level.
11. The preparedness should also be checked through periodic auditing from time to time initially through
frequent checks and pre-checks (both regular and surprise) and mainly through such Mock-
exercises.
12. Training of Emergency Response Teams should also be necessary to perform adequately in an
emergency

SAFETY
13. Internal & External Emergency phone numbers to be displayed at prominent places & intranet of that
region.
Note: Refer approved ERP/DMP/CDMP documents & Refer ERDMP of PNGRB for
facilities under PNGRB ( Annexed)

SAFETY
Chapter – 12
INCIDENT REPORTING,
INVESTIGATION &
ANALYSIS

SAFETY
Chapter – 12
INCIDENT REPORTING, INVESTIGATION & ANALYSIS

GENERAL: Procedures for investigation of all incidents with serious safety or environmental
consequences. A corrective action program should be established based on the findings of
the investigation.
The investigation of an incident should include:

INVESTIGATION a. The nature of the incident
b. The factors (human or other) that contributed to the initiation or
escalation of the incident
c. Recommended changes identified
FOLLOW UP
The investigation findings should be retained for 5 years for
possible use in next hazard analysis update.
Management should establish a system to determine and

document response to each finding to ensure agree-upon actions
are completed
Companies should implement system whereby conclusions of

investigations are distributed to similar facilities and/or appropriate
personnel

SAFETY
Chapter – 12
INCIDENT REPORTING, INVESTIGATION & ANALYSIS
1. General:
The purpose of this procedure is to define methods of reporting, investigating and analyzing incidents
(accidents and near misses) so that corrective actions can be taken to prevent recurrence. It also
references methods of distributing lessons learned.
Incident investigation is done to:

(a) determine underlying deficiencies (root cause) and other factors that might be
causing or contributing to the occurrence of incidents;
(b) identify the needs for corrective action;
(c) identify opportunities for preventive action;
(d) identify opportunities for continual improvement;
(e) communicate the results of such investigations to prevent recurrence;
(f) raise the overall QHSE awareness in the workplace.
2. Definitions
2.1 Incident: work-related event(s) in which an injury or ill health (regardless of severity)
or fatality occurred or could have occurred.
NOTE 1: An accident is an incident which has given rise to injury, ill health or
fatality.
NOTE 2: An incident where no injury, ill health, or fatality occurs may also be
referred to as a “near-miss” or “dangerous occurrence”.
NOTE 3: An emergency situation is a particular type of incident.
2.2 Health: Identifiable, adverse physical or mental condition arising from and /or made
worse by a work activity and/ or work-related situation. (Source OHSAS
18001:2007)
Note: Refer Approved Incident Reporting & Investigation Matrix ( Annexed)

SAFETY
Chapter – 13
HSE AUDIT
PROTOCOL

SAFETY
Chapter – 13
HSE AUDIT PROTOCOL

GENERAL The operators (and contactors with SEMPs) should establish and
maintain an audit program with procedures for periodic audits of the
safety and environmental management program to determine
proper implementation and maintenance of program elements.
SCOPE The scope of the audit should:
a. Determine if program elements are in place
b. Determine if program elements incorporate the required
components
c. Test the system to evaluate the program including a review of
records and documentation.
d. Identify areas of potential program improvement
AUDIT COVERAGE Facility audit selection should consider common features (i.e., field
supervisors, regulatory districts, facility design, systems and
equipment, office management, etc) to obtain a cross section of
practices for the facilities operated.
AUDIT PLAN A written plan should be developed that is designed to be flexible in
order to permit change based on audit information gathered and
also permit effective use of resources. The plan should include:
a. Objectives and scope
b. Audit criteria
c. Identification of audit team
d. Identification of facilities to be audited
e. Identification of program elements to be audited
f. Procedures to be used in the audit
g. Confidentiality requirements
h. Report contents and format with expected date of issue and
planned distribution.
AUDIT FREQUENCY The first audit should be accomplished within 2 years of initial
management program implementation. Audit intervals should not
exceed 4 years.
AUDIT TEAM Personnel from within/without the organization may be used. The
audit should be conducted by one or more persons knowledgeable
in the process involved and other specialties as necessary.
AUDIT REPORT An audit report should be prepared that addresses topics in the
audit plan. The report will contain the findings and be signed and
dated by the team.

SAFETY
Chapter – 13
HSE AUDIT PROTOCOL

1. Audits:
Audits are the primary mechanism used to measure changes over period of time. Audit Report assists us in
discharging our legal & moral obligations by highlighting where our efforts are to be directed for maximum
benefit. HSE audits are a regular feature of our operations. Key HSE audits for our operations activities are as
follows
2. Definition of Audit:
A HSE audit subjects each area of a company‟s HSE activity to a
systematic and very critical examination. Every single
component/element of the system of HSE management is
examined to verify its effectiveness, to assess performance and to
reveal shortcomings. In this way strengths and weaknesses are
disclosed and areas of vulnerability are highlighted with the
overall objective of determining the true state of safety within the company and thus minimizing the potential for
loss to occur
3. What is System?
The term system is used through the audit to mean an established way of carrying out the activity being
examined. Whenever this term is used, the auditor should determine that responsible persons are identified, the
work to be done is clearly defined, communicated and understood through procedures, management policies,
practices, training, processes, plant layout & design, operating procedures, emergency plans, incident reporting
& investigation methodology, PPE standards etc that the work is being applied throughout organization.
It is an assessment of HSE performance of the unit.
4. Periodicity of the Audit:

Ideally, a HSE audit should be conducted annually and should include every part of the company, That is every
operating unit, location or department should be included in audit. Such a task though requires considerable
planning and a team of trained and competent auditors, therefore an annual audit in its totality may not be
possible in many situations.
In such cases it is sensible to consider the possibility of conducting a “ Rolling audit‟. That is conducted over a
pre-set period of time as per criticality of unit operation according to Risk Matrix of QHSE protocol, during this
time period the whole company is audited unit by unit. The criticality of unit and subsequent periodicity of audit is
determined as per API guidelines ie. Every unit is to be audited minimum once in four years barring criticality and
the methodology adopted in this regard .

SAFETY
5. Audit Methodology:
Preparing an audit plan with the consent of respective Assets/basins/Plants for their convenience for active
participation in audit process.
 Opening meeting with Site/Unit management for smooth and success audit, as it offers both
parties a chance to make their impressions, clarify any questions and also to ensure that all
understand the audit process
o And also it helps to involve key personnel deemed appropriate
o Typically it would be 30 minutes
 Conducting structured interviews with knowledgeable unit people, when conducting these
interviews, the auditor(s) should be constructive/objective in their questioning to ensure that
the system are formalized and consistently in place.
 Closely examining technical reports and maintained records
 Confirming the systems are in place by conducting a walk around inspection of the premises
and all operations
 Close off meeting for the purpose of giving a preliminary general overview of the audit findings
 Audit Report
The audit is also usually divided into elements and sub- elements or categories as per API-RP-75 and
ISO/OHSAS standards (HSEMP Elements)
6. Internal Safety Audit Procedure:

Refer documentCHSE/ISA/Jul-15/2015-16 dated 25.06.2015 which is Annexed.

SAFETY
Chapter – 14
RECORDS AND DOCUMENTATION

SAFETY
Chapter – 14
Records and Documents
GENERAL A documentation system for the safety and environmental
management program should be established to ensure that
records and documents are maintained in a manner sufficient to
implement the management system. All records should be dated
and readily identifiable.
DOCUMENTATION Various elements of the safety and environmental management

program identify documentation requirements. Documentation
should be sufficient to describe the core elements of the program
and the interaction between the elements.
RECORDS Examples of records that should be maintained are:

i. Info on applicable regulations or other info
j. Complaint records
k. Training records
l. Process information
m. Product information
n. Inspection, maint. & calibration records
o. Pertinent contractor and supplier info
p. Incident report
q. Info on emergency prep and response
r. Info on significant environmental aspects
s. Audit results
t. Management reviews
RELATED Examples of related

DOCUMENTATION documentation are:
a. Organizational charts
b. Internal standards
c. Operational procedures
d. Site emergency response
plan
e. Site emergency
evacuation plan
f. Oil spill response plan
RECORD AND DOCUMENT CONTROL The operator should consider establishing

and maintaining procedures for controlling
records & documents pertaining to HSEMP

SAFETY
Chapter – 14
Records and Documents
Introduction:
A documentation system for the safety and environmental management program should be established to
ensure that records and documents are maintained in a manner sufficient to implement the management
system. All records should be dated and readily identifiable.
Various elements of the safety and environmental management program identify documentation
requirements. Documentation should be sufficient to describe the core elements of the program and the
interaction between the elements.
The following documents & records are to be maintained at the work place
1. Appicable laws, regulations, codes, recommended practices and guidelines

2. Training records
3. Process information
4. Product information
5. Inspection, maint. & calibration records
6. Pertinent contractor and supplier information
7. Incident report
8. Information on emergency prep and response
9. Information on significant environmental aspects
10. Audit results
11. Management reviews
12. Complaint records
13. Organizational charts
14. Internal standards
15. Operational procedures(SOP)
16. Site Emergency plan
17. Process Flow Diagram
18. P&ID drawings
19. Surface plan
20. Well Plan
21. Pipeline network
22. Oil Spill Contingency Plan

SAFETY
Chapter – 15
SAFETY IN CONTRACT
MANAGEMENT

SAFETY
Chapter – 15
SAFETY IN CONTRACT MANAGEMENT
1. Objective
Contractor, be a general contractor, self employed contractor, sub contractors (general / self
employed), form an integral part of ONGC‟s business operation.
Contractors are deployed on construction activities, development of new facilities, i.e. hooking up with
the existing facilities, O&M contracts, maintenance and repair, major / minor renovations, turn around
or specialty and general services in an around process equipment, laboratories pipelines terminals,
utilities and other petroleum and petrochemical facilities.
Therefore, proper interface of the contractor and their employees with our facilities and manpower is
considered the most vital element of a sound HSE Management System.
The objective of this chapter is to ensure a comprehensive and systematic contractor safety
programme to achieve the goals, i.e.
i. Safety and well being of contractor and ONGC employees are improved.
ii. Improved quality and productivity result from implementation of a comprehensive contractor
safety program which requires that workers be properly trained for their job tasks, are
familiar with their job requirements and conform to procedures.
iii. Fewer incidents result in more controled project costs and less need for regulatory action.
iv. The potential for damage to ONGC facility and contractor‟s equipment are minimized.
2. Elements of Contractors Safety Management Program
2.1 Safety Management Plan

Develop a written plan that identifies specific objectives and document the necessary procedure
which clearly defines and assigns accountabilities, establishes measurement and evaluation
criteria and provides system for feed back and improvement.
The Plan should ensure that it meets all regulatory requirements.
2.2 Contractor Selection Process

Bidding contractor shall exhibit that their employees are qualified to perform the work to be done.
Doc. No. ONGC/CHSE/51/HMS/Acronyms March 2016 Page 228 of 289

SAFETY
The bidding contractors understand the scope of work and meet the site and regulatory Health,
Safety and environment requirements.
2.3 Inbuilt HSE clauses in bid package

Bid package shall include necessary Health, Safety & Environment (HSE) clause based on
following guidelines:
A. The Contractor shall comply with

i. All Central, State and Local Government Regulations applicable to the Work.
ii. All applicable Company's and accepted industry HSE practices appropriate for the Work.
iii. the requirements of the QHSE system based on ISO 9001, ISO 14001 & OHSAS 18001
latest standards, wherever system is in place
iv. OISD standards, American Petroleum Institute (API) standards, BIS standards and other
relevant international practices. In case of conflict between the requirements of the various
specifications and/or the requirements specified in the bid document, the more stringent
requirement shall be followed.
B. Safety / fire protection

Contractor shall take all necessary measures to protect the work and Workmen against
accidents and occupational disease. They shall observe and comply with all Governmental
safety regulations as well as Company‟s and accepted industry safety practices as required for
this work. In case of any emergency, Contractor should immediately mobilize all resources to
combat the emergency and co-ordinate with Company suitably.
The contractor shall abide by all safety regulations of the plant as well as ensure that safety
equipment as stipulated in the Factory Act/ Mines Act or the rules & regulations made thereof
(latest edition) is issued to his employees during the execution of the work.
The Engineer incharge may also suspend all work at site, if he finds contractor‟s workmen
adopting unsafe practices. Suspension / stoppage of such work and cost & time effect thereof
shall be to contractor‟s account...
C. Environment protection
Contractor shall take all necessary measures to protect the environment and shall observe and
comply with all governmental environmental regulations as well as company‟s and accepted
industry environmental practices as required for this work including safe disposal of waste.
D. The Contractor will be required to demonstrate that:

i. the management systems and the erection are adequate to ensure that the design and the
operation of the erection and the equipment are safe;

SAFETY
ii. the potential hazards of the erection and the risks to personnel and environment have been
identified and appropriate controls provided;
iii. adequate provision is made for ensuring, in the event of a major emergency affecting the
installation, the safe evacuation and rescue of personnel and
iv. the statutory and Company requirements relating to safety and pollution control measures
are complied with.
E. Watch and Lighting

The Contractor shall, in connection with the works, provide and maintain at his own cost all
lights, guards, fencing, markers and watch when and where necessary or required by the
company for the protection of the Works or for the safety and convenience of the Public or
others.
F. Safety Audits
Contractor shall within 30 days of commencement of contract and also once every three months
thereafter submit a safety report to the Head HSE of the work centre with a copy to the Project
Coordinator. Contractor shall maintain a record of the relevant statutory and Company
requirements relating to safety and pollution control measures and compliance.
G. Accident/ incident reporting

In the event of any accident or dangerous occurrence, the contractor shall forthwith send a notice
of accident to the Head HSE of the work centre with a copy to the Project Coordinator.
Contractor shall also arrange for pickup and immediate medical attention for the injured
personnel..
H. Safety Mines officials procedure

Contractor should submit a safety procedure prior to start of the activities for company review.
the procedure should include the safety measures to be taken during the work & fire
fighting/emergency situations, in case of any emergency, number of safety / fire officers and their
role, periodical exercise on awareness of workers towards safety, familiarization of workers with
safety equipment, teams for fire fighting etc.
I. Training
Contractor should ensure that all the contractor‟s personnel have undergone the trainings as
below:
 For Offshore – Sea Survival, HUET, basic Fire Fighting, basic H2S and First Aid.
 For Onshore – Mines Vocational Training, First Aid and Fire fighting

SAFETY
Note:
1. Well control training shall also be required for O&M contractor personnel for rigs (Installation
Manager, shift in-charge & asst shift in-charge)
2. Above trainings shall be mandatory for major and long duration contracts. For petty
contracts, orientation training shall be provided.
J. Permit to Work
Contractor shall obtain permit to work as per the statutory & ONGC guidelines and shall strictly
comply with all safety requirements of the work permit during permit duration failing which
company's representative will have the right to stop the work and all cost and time effect thereof
shall be to Contractor's account.
All hot works job in hazardous area shall be carried out in presence of the contractor‟s safety
officer, who shall be directly responsible for carrying out the hot work job in a safe and orderly
manner.
K. PME & PPE

Contractor shall provide all necessary PPE to their employees including Safety Helmet, Safety
shoes, overalland other PPE as per requirement of the job. Pre-placement & Periodical Medical
examination (PME) of employees shall be carried out as per the applicable act, rules &
regulations.
L. Safety audit by ONGC

ONGC may conduct safety Audits at any stage of project execution and before taking over the
facilities. The audit shall be based on a protocol that covers elements which can affect the safety
during execution or the safe operation of the facilities in the contractor‟s scope of work. The
protocol shall cover documentation, process hazard analysis, fire detection and suppression
system, life saving appliances and escape routes, operating procedures, pre-startup safety
review, safe work practices, safety and shut down devices, management of change, assurances
of quality and mechanical integrity, emergency response control investigation of accidents,
personnel protective equipments, audit team which could be conducted by the company‟s
personnel or any agency appointed by the company for the purpose, accord full access to site
and provide all relevant information, comply with the observations and recommendations of the
audit.
M. Information to be obtained with bid related with HSE

As part of the contractor‟s proposal and bid, the following HSE related information also to be
requested from the contractor for major long duration contracts / service contract;
a) A written QHSE/ safety policy endorsed by the contractor‟s top management.
b) The contractor‟s QHSE/ safety management system manual including risk register.
c) The contractor‟s staffing plan for HSE/ safety program implementation.

SAFETY
d) The contractor‟s number of reportable accidents, man-days lost, total man-hours

worked etc. for the current and previous 3 years. Longest accident–free period is also
to be mentioned. Fatalities should be listed separately, with detailed explanations
provided.
e) A description of the initial employee HSE orientation program proposed by the
contractor.
f) A disciplinary action procedure that addresses safety related violations.
g) A list of the types of safety equipment that the contractor anticipates will be used,
including personal protective equipment (PPE) and equipment that ONGC may be
requested to supply.
h) A description of the contractor‟s hearing conservation program if noise levels are
expected to exceed 85 dB(A).
i) A description of how the contractor‟s onsite job manager and supervisors are held
accountable for safety performance and how performance is monitored, assessed, and
communicated to them.
j) A description of the contractor‟s incident reporting and investigation procedures and
the types of incidents that are investigated along with associated formats.
k) A description of the manner in which safety inspections will be performed, a list of who
will perform them, and the proposed frequency of the inspections.
l) A description of the types of safety, health and fire training the contractor‟s work force
has received or will receive and if these are intended to conform to specific relevant
regulations. This shall be in line with the requirements mentioned earlier.
m) A description of how often safety meetings are conducted, who presents and attends
the meetings, and how the topics are selected.
n) A description of the safety incentive program (if the contractor anticipates that one will
be used).
o) A description of the contractor‟s policies and programs relating to alcohol, smoking,
controlled substances, and firearms.
p) A description of how the contractor‟s safety programs apply to subcontractors and of
the method by which successful implementation of, and compliance with, the programs
will be assured.
q) A description of employee selection practices including security screening of personnel
working in sensitive positions.

SAFETY
r) A description of the contractor‟s hazard communication and hazard evaluation

procedures.
s) A description of the contractor‟s industrial hygiene procedures and what support will be
requested from ONGC.
2.4 Pre- Job Verification

Ensure that contractor is familiar with the location, facility, personnel, management program,
process hazards & facility requirement and other information before work begins.
2.5 Safety Orientation of the Contractors Workforce

Before start of the work identify and present to the contractors our important safety rules for
working in the facility. This information is to be communicated through written material, safety
handbook, video presentation and verbal instructions:
a) Smoking and drug/ alcohol policy.
b) Apprise on various work place hazards and safety measures to be taken to mitigate
them.
c) Clearly explain the mechanism of PTW and SIMOPS procedures.
d) Explain the process of JSA.
e) The process of Tool Box talks/ meetings.
f) Emergency response plans with clear identification of the responsible persons and
escape and evacuation procedure.
2.6 Verification of the pre-requisite mandatory training for the Contractors

As per tender requirement
 Verify that all mandatory training of contractors workforce with valid certificate.
 Verify the availability of all required PPE and PME records of all working personnel and also
HSE documents of contractor.
 Verify the fitness/test certificates by competent agencied for tools & tackles being used by
the contractor for execution of the job.
 Scaffolding shall meet the required procure.

SAFETY
2.7 Monitoring while Work in Progress

Monitor the contractors‟ activities while the work is being conducted. Conduct periodic reviews of
the job site jointly with the contractor‟s supervisory personnel, as per the Contractors‟ Safety
Program Audit Checklist at Appendix-1. The periodicity is to be decided at the pre-job safety
meeting. Random inspection of the work site is to be conducted by the Installation‟s safety officer
and the line management.
Emergency mock drills shall be conducted at planned and random schedule.
2.8 Work Evaluation

At the completion of the contracted work, evaluate the overall performance of the contractor and
determine the safety results to qualify the contractor as eligible for bidding in future works.
2.9 Managing Contractors‟ safety Issues

i. Include job specific HSE requirements in contractor‟s bid packages
ii. Provide hazard communication information (including MSDSs) and communicate
the need for hazard assessment and related industrial hygiene monitoring.
iii. Establish specific training requirements for contractors, particularly on HSE issues
iv. Establish reporting requirements e.g. statutory reporting and its frequency.
v. Establish the frequency of ONGC-Contractors‟ meetings.
vi. Establish penalty procedures for safety violations.
vii. Conduct meeting addressing specific contractors‟ safety requirement before bid
submission (to be a part of pre-bid conference).
2.10 Bridging document

It is to be ensured that contractors operate a management system that is consistent with the
requirements and provisions of ongc. this may be achieved by means of a specific interface or
bridging document so that any differences may be resolved and management system and
procedures are agreed before commencement of work. This document shall also bring out the
roles & responsibilities of contractor‟s key personnel & ONGC. As such, this document shall
facilitate interfacing of contractor‟s activities with those of ONGC.
Note: Refer Contractor selection criteria document(Available at Annexed)

SAFETY
APPENDIX
(A) Definitions: All definitions in this document are given in the corresponding chapters only
(B) Industry Codes, Applicable Laws, Regulations, Rules & Guidelines & References
Thefollowing codes /guidelinesruleshave beenconsultedinframingthisdocument.Theremay

besomeconflictsbetweentherequirementofthevariouscodesmentionedbelowand certain regulationswhichmay
comeintoexistenceinfuture.In those casesthe moststringentprovisionsshallbe applicable.
1. Explosive Rules 1983

2. IndianElectricityRules1956
3. Oil Mines Regulations in 1984
4. Petroleum Rules 1976
5. FactoryAct 1948
6. Environment Protection Act 1986
7. Taskforcereport-SafetyinuseofexplosiveinONGC‟swirelines/loggingoperation.
8. API-RP-14-Designofsafety system
9. API-1104 Welding of Pipelines
10. API-2015-Cleaningandmaintenance ofPetroleumstoragetank.
11. ANSIB31.4and31.8standardofconstruction
12. MerchantshippingAct 1958: Toregulatethe design,construction
13. SOLASconventions1974: Useoflifesaving appliances.
14. NFPA11 B: Forfireprotectionandprevention.
15. NFPA13: Forfireprotectionandprevention.
16. API-RP-9B–1996 Slings
17. API-RP-5C1-1998 StackingofTubularsinYard
18. AWS Welding Hand Book 1978
19. API-RP-7Rotary Hose
20. API-RP-53 and 59BlowOut and Well Control
21. API-RP-2DCranesandWinches.
22. Inflammable Substance Act, 1952
23. Petroleum Act, 1934
24. The Explosive Act, 1984
25 MSIHC Rules, 1989
26. ERDMP regulations
27. The National Environment Tribunal Act, 1995

SAFETY
Some of the acronyms which have been liberally used in the HSE MS document.( Abbreviations)
Sl ACRONYM STANDS FOR

1 AFFF Acqueous Film Forming Foam
2 ALARP As Low As Reasonably Practicable
3 API American Petroleum Institute (US)
4 ATF Aviation Turbine Fuel
5 ATR Action Taken Report
6 BARC Bhabha Atomic Research Centre, Mumbai
7 BLEVE Boiling Liquid Expanding Vapour Explosion
8 BOP Blow Out Preventor
9 CBA Cost Benefit Analysis
10 CCE Chief Controller of Explosives
11 CCL Cement Collar Log
12 CDMP Corporate Disaster Mangement Plan
13 CHSE Corporate Health Safety & Environement
14 CTF Central Tank Farm
15 CTU Coil Tubing Unit
16 DCP Dry Chemical Powder (Fire Extinguisher type)
17 DGMS Directorate General of Mines Safety
18 DISH Department of Industrial Safety & Health
19 DMP Disaster Management Plan
20 DST Drill Stem Test
21 ELT Emergency Locator Transmitter
22 EPIRB Emergency Position Indicating Radio Beacons (Maritime distress)
23 ERP Emergency Response Plan
24 ESD Emergency Shutdown Device
25 ETA Expected Time of arrival
26 ETU Endless Tubing Unit
27 FLP Flow Line Pipe
28 GCS Gas Collecting Station
29 GGS Group Gathering Station
30 GLV Gas Lift Valve
31 GR Gamma Ray (Log)
32 GTO Geo-Technical Order
33 H2S Hydrogen Sulphide (Gas)
34 HAC Hazarduous Area Classification
35 HAZAN HAZard Analysis

SAFETY

36 HAZID HAZard IDentification
37 HAZOP HAZard & Operatability study
38 HLO Helicopter Landing Officer (on platform)
39 HPU High Pressure Unit
40 HRT Hydrostatic Reference Tool
41 HSE Health Safety & Environment
42 HUET Helicopter Underwater Escape Training
43 ICS Incident Command System
44 IMCA International Maritime Contractors Association
45 IOGPT Institute of Oil & Gas Production Technology
46 ISO International Standards Organisation
47 JSA Job Safety Analysis
48 LEL Lowest Exposure Limit
49 LSHH Level Switch High High
50 MCB Miniature Circuit Breaker
51 MCCV Multi Cycle Circulating Valve
52 MOC Management Of Change
53 MSDS Material Safety Data Sheet
54 MSIHC Manufacture Storage & Import of Hazardous Chemical
55 MSO Mines safety Officer
56 NDT Non Destructive Testing
57 NFPA National Fire Prevention Association (US)
58 NGL Natural GasoLine
59 O&M Operation & Maintenance
60 OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer
61 OHSAS Occupational Health Safety Assessment Series (ISO 18001)
62 OIM Oil Installation Manager
63 OISD Oil Industry Safety Directorate
64 OMR Oil Mines Regulation (1984)
65 P&ID Pipeline & Instrumentation Drawings
66 PCTV Pressure Controlled Tester Valve
67 PFD Process Flow Diagram
68 PHA Process Hazard Analysis
69 PLB Personal Locator Beacon
70 PME Periodical Medical Examination
71 PPE Personnel Protective Equipment
72 PTS Production Testing Surface (Equipment & Services)

SAFETY

73 PTW Permit To Work
74 PVC Poly Vinyl Chloride
75 QHSE Quality Health Safety & Environment
76 QRA Quantitative Risk Analysis
77 QRM Qualitative Risk Matrix
78 RDAG Reservoir Data Acquisition Group
79 ROW Right Of Way
80 SAFE Safety Analysis Function Evaluation
81 SART Search And Rescue Transmitter
82 SAT Safety Analysis Table
83 SBSV Single Ball Safety Valve
84 SCBA Self Contained Breathing Apparatus
85 SCSSV Surface Controlled Sub-Surface Safety Valve
86 SHORT Single Hydraulically Operated Reversing Tool
87 SICP Shut-In Casing Pressure
88 SIDPP Shut-In Drill Pipe Pressure
89 SIMOPS SIMultaneous OPerationS
90 SOP Stanadard Operating Procedure
91 SRP Sucker-Rod pump
92 SSTT SubSea Test Tree
93 SWP Seawage Water Plant
94 TBT Tool Box Talk
95 TCP Tubing Conveyed Perforation
96 TEC Ternary Entectic Chloride
97 TEED Topman Emergency Escape Device
98 UKOOA United Kingdom Offshore Operators Association
99 ZESP Zero EnergyState Procedure
100 MOPNG Ministry Of Petroleum & Natural Gas (India)
101 BOEMRE Bureau of Ocean Energy Management, Regulation & Management

ENVIRONMENT
Chapter B
ENVIRONMENT
MANAGEMENT
Chapter B
ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT
1.0 Introduction
The term Environment refers to the surroundings including air, water, land, natural resources, flora,
fauna, humans and their interrelations. If the environment is not protected, human life will be in peril.
The protection and improvement of the environment is a major issue which affects the well-being of
people and economic development throughout the world.
1.1 Environmental Issues Related to Oil Field Operations

1) Upstream petroleum industry includes multifarious activities like Exploration, Drilling, Exploitation,
partial processing, limited storage and finally transportation of crude oil, natural gas, LPG, NGL both
from onland and offshore and hence responsible for any type of release of oil/ gas as its products or
waste water treated or untreated which yield ecological imbalance or commonly called pollution. The
release of unwarranted fluids/gas/or gaseous mixtures call for immediate response to nullify the
impact both under the statutory acts and as a social responsibility.
2) Environmental damages are anticipated/ created by spillage of oil from leak in pipeline, manual/
operational failure of machines/equipment, accidental release of oil, blowouts, wreckage or natural
calamity. The release of oil can be only few barrels or quite substantial running into thousands of
tones or can be continuous in case of blow out etc. before remedial action is implemented. These
activities anticipate all types of pollution which cause air, water, soil and noise pollution due to one or
other activity affecting human/mankind and flora & fauna.
3) Oil field operations are waste intensive and have significant environmental implications. With the
increasing public awareness on pollution and environmental protection, all the countries throughout
the world have come out with stricter regulatory measures.
4) India is one of the foremost countries to make environmental protection as the constitutional
commitment of the nation and protection of wild life and quality of water bodies as the fundamental
duty of every Indian Citizen. ONGC as one of the eminent corporate citizens of this country has
adopted Environmental protection as one of its corporate objectives and a policy towards this effect
was put in place in 1983 itself. In 1988, ONGC adopted Environmental Protection as its fifth objective.
The thrust of the objective is to maintain the ecological balance and take necessary preventive and
corrective steps to improve Environment.
5) The salient features for Environment Management in ONGC are:
i) All developmental activities of the company should be placed on sound ecological principles and
must incorporate appropriate environmental safeguards.
ii) Environmental Impact assessment with all the details required by the Ministry of Environment,
Forests and Climate Change (MoEFCC) should be prepared at the earliest stages of the project
formulation and necessary financial provisions for environmental safeguards must be made in the
project estimates.
iii) Environmental norms prescribed by Central & State Governments should be strictly observed in
the design, construction and operation of all facilities.
iv) The widest possible range of information on the practical options available for the design of the
projects should be gathered and analyzed for the final decision-making and the technology that
ensures Energy economy, Environmental safeguards, Recycling of resources and utilization of
wastes should be adopted for all projects.
v) Release of Oil, Chemicals and other materials should be controlled so that it does not disturb the
flora & fauna. Releases containing viruses, pathogenic, bacteria and parasites which survive in
marine life should be completely eliminated and precluded from entering marine waters.
vi) Environment adjacent to the project areas and resources of the coastal waters should not be
adversely affected. No action harmful to the potential for marine resources such as fish, salt,
crustacean, etc should be permitted. Coastal marine areas should not be subjected to unplanned
siltation, erosion, changes in the flow pattern and coastal contours.
vii) Microbiological activity of significance to marine and estuarine life and man using the coastal
waters should be fully protected.
viii) Aesthetic, cultural and social pattern and historical characteristics of the areas covered by or
adjacent to the ONGC project should not be unduly disturbed due to project activities. Scenic
landscapes, historical and cultural and the environment around them should be clean and
hygienic.
ix) As far as possible, a minimum area of 500 meters from the high tide mark in respect of coastal
project or projects located near river banks should be kept clear of all structures so that beach
activities or river front development are not adversely affected.
x) Effective mechanism for monitoring the environment and for the collection of the required data of
various parameters of the environment for the purpose of surveillance should be set up within
each project.
xi) Work environment in the operational areas should be conducive to safe and healthy working
conditions. Good housekeeping is an integral part of the sound Environmental management.
xii) Promoting a healthy, safe, productive and aesthetically satisfying environment is the responsibility
of all staff of the company.
xiii) Every effort should be made to promote Environmental education and create environmental
awareness at all levels.
However the developments in science and changes in technology throw up new challenges in environment
management by way of newer regulations by the government. In addition to this, India‟s commitments in
international forum on environment further add responsibility in managing the environmental impacts of our
operations.
2.0 Relevant Legislations
The important environmental acts and rules pertaining to ONGC operations are:
 The Indian Wildlife (Protection) Act 1972 amended in 1993 and The Wild Life (Protection)
Amendment Act, 2002.
 The Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974, amended 1998
 The Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Cess Act, 1977 amended 1992 and The Water
(Prevention and Control of Pollution) Cess (Amendment) Act, 2003
 National Oil Spill Disaster Contingency Plan (NOS-DCP) and Preparedness.
 Forest (Conservation) Act 1980, amended 1988
 The Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981 amended 1987
 The Environment Protection Act, 1986 and subseqent amendments.
 Bio- Medical Waste (Management and Handling) Rules, 1988
 Coastal Regulation Zone Notification 2011 and subsequent amendments.

 The Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991, amended 1992 and The Public Liability Insurance
Rules, 1991, amended 1993
 Chemical accidents (Emergency Planning, Preparedness and Response) Rules, 1996 and
subsequent amendments.
 Noise Pollution (Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000
 The Batteries (Management and Handling) Rules, 2001 and subsequent amendments.
 Biological Diversity Act, 2002
 The Merchant Shipping (Amendment) Act, 2003
 The Motor Vehicle Act, 1988
 The Factories Act, 1948
 The Hazardous Waste (Management, Handling and Tran boundary Movement) Rules,2008
 Environmental Impact Assessment Notification-2006 and subsequent amendments.

2.1 The Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974:
The Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act” was enacted on 23 rd March 1974. The original act
provides for control of water pollution of Rivers and wells. The act was amended in 1978 and the amended act
brought under its purview all discharge made into public sewers and land.
The act has defined Pollution as “Water Pollution means such contamination of water or such alternation of the
physical, chemical or biological properties of water or such discharge of any sewage or trade effluent or of any
other liquid, gaseous or solid substance into water (weather directly or indirectly) as may or is likely to create a
nuisance or render such water harmful or injurious to public health or safety or to domestic, commercial,
industrial, agricultural or other legitimate uses or to the life and health of animals or plants or of aquatic
organism.”
2.2 The Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Cess Act, 1977 including subsequent
amendments:
This act provides for levy and collection of cess on water consumed by persons carrying on certain industries
and by local bodies.
An industry has to pay cess on water consumed by it for following purposes:

a. Industrial Cooling, Spraying in mines, Pits or Boiler feeds
b. Domestic purpose
c. Processing where pollutant in polluted water is easily biodegradable.
d. Processing where pollutant in polluted water is not easily biodegradable.
2.3 The Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981:
The act defines air pollution as: “Air pollution means presence in the atmosphere of any solid, liquid or
gaseous substance in such concentration as may be or tend to be injurious to human beings or other living
creatures or plants or property or environment.”
2.4 The Environment Protection Act, 1986:
This is an umbrella legislation and the main provisions of the acts are:
a. It defines environment as “water, air and land and interrelationship which exits among and between
water, water, air and land and human beings, other living creatures, plants, micro-organisms and
property.”
b. It is applicable to whole of India
c. It empowers Central Govt. to take all such measures, as it deems necessary for the purpose of
protecting the quality of environment.
d. Industry shall comply with laid down procedures for handling of hazardous substances or preparation
by reason of its chemical or physicochemical properties or handling is liable to cause harm to human
beings, other leaving creatures, plants, micro organisms, property or to the environment.
e. In case of an accident / unforeseen event where discharge of environment pollutant is in excess of
standard, the industry has to inform it to SPCB.
f. CPCB / SPCB officials have powers to entry and inspection of an installation and can collect samples.
g. Contravention of the provisions of the act may attract imprisonment, fine or both.
2.5 The Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991
The main features of the act are:

a. This is third party insurance.
b. Every industry has to take PLI policy for an amount not less than paid up capital of the undertaking,
not exceeding Rs. 50.0 crore.
c. Every insurer shall contribute to Environment relief fund together with the amount of premium.
d. District Collector shall verify the occurrence of an accident.
e. Application for the relief to be made within a period of five years of the occurrence of the accident to
the collector.
2.6 Noise Pollution (Regulation & Control) Rules, 2000
The main features of the rules are:
a. State Govt. to categorize areas into Industrial, Commercial, Residential or Silence zones.
b. State Govt. to take measures for abetment of noise.
c. All development authorities to consider all aspect of noise pollution as a parameter.
d. Restriction on the use of loudspeakers / public address system.
e. Any violation to provisions of the rule shall be liable for penalty under the provisions of the act.
Noise limit Table

Area Code Category of Area/ Zone Limits in dB (A) Leq.
Day time Night Time
A Industrial Area 75 70
B Commercial Area 65 55
C Residential Area 55 45
D Silence Zone 50 40
Note:- 1. Day time shall mean from 6.00 a.m. to 10.00 p.m.
2. Night time shall mean from 10.00 p.m. to 6.00 a.m.
3. Silence zone is an area comprising not less than 100 metres around hospitals, educational
institutions, courts, religious places or any other area which is declared as such by the competent
authority
4. Mixed categories of areas may be declared as one of the four above mentioned categories by the
competent authority.
* dB(A) Leq denotes the time weighted average of the level of sound in decibels on scale A which is
relatable to human hearing.
A “decibel” is a unit in which noise is measured.
“A”, in dB(A) Leq, denotes the frequency weighting in the measurement of noise and corresponds to frequency
response characteristics of the human ear.
Leq: It is energy mean of the noise level over a specified period.
2.7 The Hazardous Waste (Management, Handling and Trans boundary

Movement)
Rules, 2008
In pursuant of the EPA act, 1986 Central Government framed these rules. The main
features of the rules are:
a. Hazardous waste is defined as – Waste substances, which are generated in the

process indicated in the column – 2 of schedule – 1, substances and their
concentration is given in schedule – 2.
b. Industry has to obtain hazardous waste authorization for generation, storage,
treatment, handling, transport and for disposal from SPCB.
c. Industry shall maintain a register and record the quantity of waste generated and
shall file annual returns to SPCB.
d. Drill cuttings are referred in Schedule -1 as follows
S. Process Hazardous Waste

No.
Drilling operation from oil and 2.1 Drill cuttings containing oil
gas production
2.2 Sludge containing oil
2.3 Drilling mud other drilling waste
2.8 Offshore Operations (beyond 12 nautical miles)

THE MERCHANT SHIPPING (AMENDMENT) ACT, 2003
NO. 59 OF 2003 [30th December, 2003.]
356B. Definitions.-In this Part, unless the context otherwise requires,-
(i) "off-shore installation" means an installation, whether mobile or

fixed, which is used or is intended to be used for under-water
exploration or exploitation of crude oil, petroleum or other similar
mineral oils, under lease, licence or any other form of contractual
arrangement and includes-
(a) any installation which could be moved from place to place under its
own motive power or otherwise; and
(b) a pipe-line;
In view of above Statutory requirement/guidelines as prescribed in Indian Merchant

Shipping Act (Amended) shall be applicable in all Offshore Operations
2.9 Legal requirements prior to commencement of operations
Prior sequential environmental permissions are required to commence construction and operation of any
unit (Installations/Rigs/Facilities) or for expansion/ modernization thereof, from following statutory
governmental agencies depending upon the area of operation.
1. Environmental Clearance (EC)from Ministry of environment and forest (MoEFCC) for all offshore and
onshore oil and gas exploration, development & production projects (under category “A” of
Environment (Protection) Rules, 1986 against notification dated 14 th September, 2006) except
Exploration surveys which are exempted provided the concession areas have got previous clearance
for physical survey.
2. Consent (NOC)* from State pollution control boards (SPCB)

a) Consent to Establish (Provisional No Objection Certificate)
b) No Objection Certificate, for release of power connection (No E-II)
c) Consent to Operate (Final No Objection Certificate)
3. Coastal Regulatory Zone (CRZ) authorities and Maritime board for the activity falling under coastal
area and
4. National Board of Wildlife under MoEFCC for activity area falling under Eco sensitive Zone.
2.10 Legal requirements for operating units (Installations/ Rigs/ Facilities)
Sl. Legal requirement To obtain Frequency Reference

No. from/Reports
to be
submitted
1 Consent to operate under Air & Water SPCB As per Water (Prevention &
Act respective Control of pollution ) Act,
SPCB 1974
Air (Prevention and
Control of Pollution) Act,
1981
2 Water cess payment SPCB As per The Water (Prevention

respective and Control of Pollution)
SPCB Cess Act, 1977
3 Environmental Clearance MoEF As per Environmental Impact

modificatio Assessment Notifications
ns/ validity and amendments-2006
3 No objection certificate (for Drilling SPCB As per Water & Air Act
Rigs) respective
SPCB
4 Authorization/renewal for SPCB As decided Hazardous Wastes

collection/reception/treatment/ by SPCB (Management, Handling
transport/storage/ disposal of (5 years ) and trans-boundary
hazardous wastes in Form I Movement) Rules, 2008
5 Hazardous waste return in Form IV SPCB Yearly Hazardous Wastes
(Management, Handling
and transboundary
Movement) Rules, 2008
6 Records of disposal of hazardous To be Continuous Hazardous Wastes

waste to be maintained in Form -III maintained at (Management, Handling
installation and transboundary
Movement) Rules, 2008
7 Batteries returns in form VIII SPCB Half yearly The Batteries

(Management and
Handling) Rules, 2001
8 Environmental Statement SPCB Yearly The Environment

(Protection) Act, 1986
9 Insurance under Public Liability Insurance Yearly The Public Liability

Insurance act (Common Policy for all Company Insurance Act, 1991
ONGC Facilities)
11 Authorization under Bio-medical SPCB - The Bio-Medical Waste

waste (M&H) Rules (Management and
12 Bio-medical waste return SPCB Yearly The Bio-Medical Waste

(Management and
13 Monitoring of SOx, NOx, PM10, SPCB/MOEF Twice a National Ambient Air

PM2.5, O3, Pb, NH3 & CO, Benzene, (Regional week 24 Quality Standards 2009
Benzo Pyrene, As, Ni office) hourly
14 Noise monitoring of Ambient Noise & - - Noise Pollution

DG sets (Regulation and Control)
Rules, 2000
15 Monitoring of emissions from DG sets - - Environment (Protection)

& stack Rules, 1986,
16 Regular Compliance of MoEF Six monthly Environmental Clearance

Environmental Clearance Conditions, conditions
if any.
17 Monitoring of Effluent Quality SPCB As decided Environment ( Protection )

by SPCB Rules, 1986
Responsibilities:
 All the operating units (Installations/Rigs/Facilities) on land or marine jurisdiction of state pollution
control board that produce water /liquid effluent/trade effluent, stack emissions and generate
hazardous waste will seek independent or combined consents (Water consent and Air consent) and
authorization (CCA) from respective state pollution control board.
 Project In-charge will be responsible for seeking above approvals and subsequent renewal of the
same.
 Project In-charge will ensure filing of timely return as per the periodicity laid down in consolidated
consent and authorization as well as stipulations, if any, prescribed by MOEF at the time of granting of
environmental clearance.
 Each operating unit will submit its half yearly environmental compliance report along with monitored
data and statistical interpretations to the concerned regulatory authority (respective Regional office of
MOEF and SPCB) on 1st June and 1st December of each calendar year.
 Environmental management cell: Each SPCB approved operating oil-field unit will identify and
maintain environment management organogram in accordance to the guidelines therein. The approval
conditions implies that the environmental management cell shall be setup to ensure implementation
and monitoring of environmental safeguards and other conditions stipulated by statutory authorities.
The environmental management cell shall directly report to the chief executive of the organization and
shall work as a focal point for initializing environmental issues. These cells/units also coordinate the
exercise of environmental audit and preparation of environmental statements.
Guidelines for obtaining Environment Clearances from MoEFCC:

Applicable for : All new exploratory drilling proposals, Expansion cases, Modernization and change in
technology proposals of Onshore/Offshore areas and proposals of pre-drilling activities of NELP, locations
located upto 12 Nautical miles in offshore areas
Sl Activity Requisite documents Activity to be Authority to Time limit

N conducted by receive the
o. documents
1 Issue of Terms 1. Form –I, Asset/Basin/ ED- Chief-HSE, Submit to the office of
of References 2. Feasibility report Plant Managers Delhi ED- Chief-HSE for
(TORs) 3. Proposed Terms of corporate review at
References least one month in
4. Copy of the advance prior to
presentation for submission to Ministry
review of Environment and
Forests (MoEF)
2 Completed 1. Form –I, By the Head- To be submitted
documents after 2. Feasibility report HSE through To Director (IA),
vetting form 3. Proposed Terms of respective Member
office of ED- References Asset/Basin/ Secretary,
Chief-HSE 4. Copy of the Plant Managers Industry-2, MoEF,
presentation for New Delhi Under
review intimation to ED-
Chief-HSE with a
copy of all
documents
3 EIA study and Asset/Basin/Plant Managers to prepare EIA report as per approved
report Terms of References. The EIA may be prepared either through
preparation empanelled agencies or from in-house resources.
4 Vetting of 1. Draft EIA Report To be submitted to Within one week from
reports at draft 2. Draft Risk the Committee the submission by the
stage Assessment (RA) constituted by consultant for
3. Draft Environmental ED- Chief-HSE finalization of reports
management Plan for review and its
(EMP) acceptance.
5 Public As per EIA By the Head-HSE Respective state Immediately on
consultation/ Notification, 14, through respective pollution control receipt of final report
Public Hearing September,2006 and Asset/Basin/ or committee or from the consultants
subsequent Plant Managers department of
amendments there off environment as
the case may be
6 Submission of 1. EIA Report By the Head-HSE To be submitted to Submit to the office of
EIA report and 2. Risk Assessment through respective ED- Chief-HSE, ED- Chief-HSE for
public (RA) Asset/Basin/ Delhi corporate review at
consultation 3. Environmental Plant Managers least two weeks in
documents management Plan advance prior to
(EMP) submission to Ministry
4. Copy of of Environment and
recommendations Forests (MoEF).
and CD of the
proceedings of
Public
consultation/
Public Hearing
5. Issued Terms of
References (TORs)
6. Form –I
7. Feasibility report
8. Copy of the
presentation for
review
7 Submission to 1. EIA Report By the Head-HSE 1. One set
MoEF 2. Risk Assessment through respective submitted To
(RA) Asset/Basin/ Director (IA),
3. Environmental Plant Managers Member
management Plan Secretary,
(EMP) Industry-2,
4. Copy of MoEF, New
recommendations Delhi
and CD of the
proceedings of 2. Three copies of
Public all documents
consultation/ to ED-Chief-
Public Hearing HSE
5. Issued Terms of
References (TORs)
6. Form –I
8 Agenda 1. EIA Report By the Head-HSE to 1. All Members All documents must be
Finalization and 2. Risk Assessment circulate all desired of Expert dispatched to all EAC
call for (RA) information and one Appraisal members prior to 15
presentation 3. Environmental copy of each Committee, days of the EAC
before EAC, by management Plan documents to the Industry -2, meetings
the MoEF (EMP) respective EAC MoEF via Post
4. Copy of members by post and e-mail.
recommendations through respective
and CD of the Asset/Basin/ 2. Simultaneously
proceedings of Plant Managers three copies of
Public all documents
consultation/ to ED-Chief-
Public Hearing HSE, Delhi
5. Issued Terms of
References (TORs)
6. Form –I
8. Copy of the
presentation for
Appraisal
9. Soft copy of all
reports along with
CD
9 1. Presentation 1. EIA Report Concerned Head- CHSE will Concerned Head-HSE
before 2. Risk Assessment HSE along with communicate date along with
CHSE prior (RA) representatives from of presentation representatives from
to 3. Environmental concerned group of and meeting concerned group of
presentation management Plan respective respective
to EAC, (EMP) Asset/Basin/Plant Asset/Basin/Plant
MOEF 4. Copy of along with the along with the
2. Presentation recommendations consultants consultants shall arrive
before and CD of the (involved directly in at least two days in
Expert proceedings of the EIA studies at advance from the
Appraisal Public field level and shall exclusive of the date
Committee, consultation/ be competent of presentation or the
Industry-2, Public Hearing enough to date decided by the
MoEF 5. Issued Terms of defend/explain the Chief-HSE
References (TORs) data generated in the
6. Form –I report) shall be
7. Feasibility report deputed to CHSE
8. Copy of the
presentation for
Appraisal
9. Soft copy of all
reports along with
CD
Operational activities pertaining to exploration, drilling, production processing etc. have increased by
several folds and these activities often have impact on surroundings unless some environment
protection measures are planned well in advance. Incidentally oil operations in search of oil are carried
out in diversified geographical locations ranging from cold mountain area to hot desert and rain prone
areas/ marshy areas to coastal locations. Therefore interaction of oil field operational activities with the
environment is inevitable.
For oilfields environment protection, the guidelines have been issued by OISD vide “Recommended
Practices for Environment Protection in Upstream Petroleum Sector” (OISD-RP-201). The specific
features of the guidelines are given below.
Guidelines for Environment Protection in Upstream Petroleum Sector:
Through these guidelines, attempt has been made to minimize the impact of oil exploration and drilling
activities on the environment. In this document, Guidelines for Upstream Sector i.e. oil exploration,
drilling, production and processing facilities have been developed. The text is divided into three
sections
(i) Recommended Practices (RP) for Exploration Activities

(ii) Recommended Practices (RP) for Drilling Activities
(iii) Recommended Practices (RP) for Production and Processing Operations.
Scope
The scope of work covered in these Recommended Practices is divided in the following three
major activities of upstream petroleum sector.
Exploration activities
 Geophysical survey (including shot hole drilling) and geophysical operations.

 Logging operations including storage & handling of explosives, radioactive material.
 Use of explosives for perforation.
 Reservoir studies.
 Laboratories.
Drilling Activities
 Exploratory drilling, development drilling

 All such operations which lead to environmentally sound practices for land based drilling
operations which begin with initial planning of the drilling projects and end with
decommissioning of drilling site.
Production Activities
Sound environmental practices associated with hydrocarbon production operations & sound
field practices to be adopted for mitigating these hazards. The RP pertains to operational
coverage from well completion to production of crude oil, natural gas and natural gas
compressors.
3.1 Exploration Activities
Onland Exploration activities in upstream hydrocarbon industry primarily involve Geophysical Survey,
Logging, perforation, reservoir studies and allied operations. All the significant environmental aspects
arising out of exploration operations have been considered for formulating code of practices. These
practices integrated with operations/ activities will help in making exploration an ecofriendly business.
3.1.1 Geophysical Survey
A. Drilling of shot points/ Holes & Shooting:

Environmental aspects are consumption of resources (water and energy), generation of effluent and
cuttings, generation of emissions including noise.
Recommended Practice:
(i) Prior to undertaking any exploration activity such as survey shot hole drilling, it should have forest
clearance from concerned appropriate authority.
(ii) Ensure that the reccy report of the area under survey is in place. Location of shot hole points
should be decided in consultation with designated environment officer (duly identified/ notified by
project head) on the basis of reccy report.
(iii) Critical environmental aspects of reccy report should be conveyed to designated personnel for
strict compliance. In case of surveys through contractual services, it is to ensure that the
contractor should comply with the operator‟s guidelines on the subject.
(iv) Unauthorized movement of the people should not be allowed within 15 mtrs of operating area.
(v) Shot hole points should be reclaimed after cessation of the operation.
B. Generators:
Environmental aspects are air borne pollutants including noise.
Recommended Practice
(i) Generators should meet the existing standards as notified by statutory agencies.
(ii) Used up batteries should be sent for recycling or disposal at identified place in accordance with
the laid down procedure.
C. Shooting:
Environmental aspects are air borne pollutants including noise and human health.
(i) No blasting operation should be carried out between the hours of sunset and sunrise.
(ii) Before commencing shooting, adequate warning to public should be given by an efficient system
of signals like putting up red flags in the danger zone i.e. 55 meters from the place of blasting. It
should be ensured that persons and wild animals in the vicinity are properly in safe zone.
(iii) If shots are being fired in the vicinity of public places and human settlement, adequate
precautions should be taken to prevent impact on public & property.
General Guidelines
(i) Electrical fitting and utilities should be secured in a manner so as not to pose any danger of
electrocution to the wild animals.
(ii) Hazardous waste (discarded explosives, lubricants, chemicals etc.) should not be dumped as
such as it may pose threat to fauna and flora of the surroundings. These wastes should be
disposed at an identified place.
(iii) For constructing camp site and survey sites, felling of trees should be avoided. In case, felling of
trees is essential for constructing survey sites, compensatory afforestation should be undertaken.
(iv) Underground and above ground utilities should be avoided while carrying out survey operations.
(v) Any natural system like grasslands, mangroves, water body etc. around the area of activities of
geophysical survey should not be contaminated with any effluent and waste generated during
operational activities.
(vi) Wildlife, habitats and biosphere reserves should be protected from the geophysical survey
activities as per guidelines laid down in EIA 1994 notification and subsequent modifications
thereof.
(vii) During land survey operations before entering into thick forest area, a din of sound from drum
should be made to drive away the wild animals.
(viii) Two tier communication system should be in place.
(ix) Standards on health and sanitation should be followed as per prevalent Indian Standards.
3.1.2 Logging
Environmental aspects are spillage of hydrocarbon and drilling fluid, radioactive emissions, human
health.
(i) The well should be filled properly with well conditioned mud so as to overbalance the bottom
hole pressure in conformity with Geo-technical order.
(ii) No leakage should be permitted through wire line BOP while carrying out production logging
operations.
(iii) The seal of radioactive sources should withstand test of temperature, external pressure,
impact, vibration and puncture. For test, requirements of standards laid down in AFRB/SS-3
1990 or IS-2919 (1980) should be followed.
(iv) In case of loss of radioactive source in the well bore, frequent checks for radioactive
contamination of the surrounding should be made during fishing operations. Further, if
emission level is found above the permissible limit, BARC Guidelines should be followed for
mitigation.
(v) If the radioactive source is not retrieved, it should be immobilized and sealed in place with
cement plug. Height or length of cement plug should be in accordance with stipulated
standard.
3.1.3 Use of Explosives for Well Perforation
Environmental aspects are noise, spillage of hydrocarbon and subdued fluid and fire.
(i) When perforation is being done through the tubing a wire line blowout preventer should also
be installed so that in case of a kick, the well can be closed with the perforation wireline tool in
the hole.
(ii) Storage and handling of explosives at well site should be done in accordance with Indian
Explosive Rule 1983 and local rules if any.
(iii) Any mechanical impact or interference on explosive components should be avoided.
(iv) Discarded and faulty explosives should not be thrown and to be disposed of at an identified
place.
(v) Transportation of explosives should be done in accordance with Indian Explosives Rules
1983.
(vi) Location of magazine for storing the explosives should be chosen as per the guidelines laid in
Indian Explosives Rules.
3.1.4 Reservoir Studies
Environmental aspects are leakage of hydrocarbon and fire.
(i) An area within 30 meters of the well should be treated as danger zone and no smoking or
open flame be permitted within the danger zone.
(ii) All electrical equipment within the danger zone should be de-energized.
3.1.5 Laboratories
Environmental aspects are draining of tested and left over hydrocarbon and other samples, chemical
fumes, waste chemicals and containers, fire and explosion.
(i) Left over crude oil samples and tested samples should be collected in container and be disposed
in identified oil sumps.
(ii) Other used chemicals should be collected in a separate container and not to be drained in the sink
of laboratory.
(iii) Electrical lights and fittings in laboratory should be flame proof.
(iv) Laboratory should be properly ventilated.
(v) Safety data sheet of chemicals being used in laboratory should be kept readily available.
(vi) Effluent from laboratory should not go to storm water channel. Such effluent should be subjected
to effluent treatment plant.
(vii) Before disposing of spent chemicals, these chemicals should be neutralized suitably. Suitable
disposal site should be identified.
(viii) Oxidizing chemicals should be stored away from flammable material.
(ix) Cylinder containing flammable gases and toxic gases should be kept separately and suitably
partitioned by a wall.
(x) Appropriate protective gears should be used while handling hazardous chemicals.
3.2 Drilling Operations
Drilling operations are carried out to find hydrocarbons (Exploratory drilling) to delineate a discovered
reserve, to develop a reservoir for production, for injection, for EOR and for disposal purposes. Land
drilling operations are carried out with full regard for preservation of environment in such diverse
conditions and metropolitan cities, wilderness areas, barren deserts, wildlife refuges and tea estate
locations etc. Recommendations presented are based on such wide ranging and extensive industry
experience.
Land drillingoperations comprise of:
 Drill site and allied constructions

 Rig Movement and Rig Building
 Drilling
 Decommissioning
 Restoration
3.2.1 Drill Site and Allied Constructions
Environmental Aspects are Disposal of hazardous waste, discharge of effluent, emissions to air
and generation of noise
A. Land:
i) Top soil of the site should be stocked for site reclamation and restoration after the cessation of the
drilling operations
ii) Skid mounted tanks of adequate capacity should be provided in place of earthen pits so as to
minimizethe impact on land due to the construction of the earthen pits
iii) Provision should be made to store the drill cuttings at a suitable place within the drill site area for
drying and transit storage prior to its disposal.
iv) The approach road should be laid through barren lands wherever possible even if it results in
laying of relatively lengthy ones.
v) Acquisition of land for the construction of the approach roads should be on basis of the minimum
requirement.
vi) Soil and other earthen material required for the construction of the roads etc. should be fetched
from barren lands.
vii) To resort to cluster drilling practices wherever applicable for minimizing the requirement of land for
drilling operations.
viii) Criteria for site assessment/ selection/ construction processes (viz. Public safety, Size,
Topography, Soil, Surface water, Ground water, Wild life, Vegetation, Cultural and historical
sources and Site selection
B. Water Sources :
i) Water of ponds/ streams to be used wherever possible. If water from local bore well is to be
extracted, the rate of extraction should always be kept below the safer yield level.
ii) To maintain the wholesomeness of the quality of ground/ surface water sources, a peripheral ring
bund of compacted clay should be provided in every drill site so as to control/ prevent spillage and
seepage of effluents
iii) Health, hygiene and sanitation facilities at drill sites/ drill site accommodation areas should be
maintained as per the existing standards on the subject.
C. Air quality:
i) All vehicles and construction equipment with internal combustion engines should be maintained
for efficient combustion to reduce vehicle emissions in order to comply with the standards of
CPCB.
ii) Water should be sprayed adequately during dust generating construction activities for dust
suppression.
iii) Asbestos should not be used for any kind of construction activity.
D. Noise:
i. Vehicles and construction equipment with internal combustion engines should be provided with
proper silencers and mufflers in order to reduce noise levels.
ii. Ensure the use of protective noise gear by all the employees working near the areas which
produce abnormal noise levels.
3.2.2 Rig Movement and Rig Building
Environmental Aspects are same as above
i) Before moving equipment to the location, all the machinery should be inspected and plugged,
drained or otherwise secured to ensure that fluids do not leak during transport.
ii) While moving in, transporters should place draw works , engines and other equipment in a level
position on the drilling location to ensure that no fluids leak while waiting to set the equipment in
place
iii) Liquids such as excess fuels, paints and thinners should be returned to the vendor and to ensure
that no leaks occur during transport.
iv) All vehicles should be maintained for efficient combustion to reduce vehicle emissions in order to
comply with the standards of CPCB.
v) Vehicles and other rig movement equipment should be provided with proper silencers and
mufflers in order to reduce the noise levels.
vi) Ensure the use of protective noise gear by all the employees working near the areas which
produce abnormal noise levels.
3.2.3 Drilling
Environmental aspects are same as above
Recommended Practices;
A. Land:
i) Leakage of drilling fluids should be avoided by resorting to the use of mud saving devices such as
pipe wipers, Kelly mud saver, drip pans etc.
ii) To use eco-friendly drilling fluid systems consisting of biodegradable additives and chrome free
dispersants wherever possible. However, if chrome based additives are used, it should be
ensured that the concentration of chrome does not exceed the regulatory limits and a proper test
report/ record should be maintained
iii) All the left over chemicals and other materials should be properly refilled and transported to the
next location.
B. Water resources:
Fresh water requirements should be minimized by taking following measures.
i) Reuse the water/mud collected from the periodic cleaning of cellar pit for drilling fluid preparation.
ii) Use water under high pressure for cleaning of rig floor, mud pits, mud channel etc. and use wiper
for cleaning of the drill string.
iii) No waste should be discharged outside the drill site premises.
iv) The waste water generated should be recycled for making up drilling fluid volumes, washing of
shale shaker screens, drill string and rig floor etc.
C. Air Quality:
i) Measures for vehicles and equipment with internal combustion engines as mentioned in
construction phase should be followed in drilling phase also.
ii) Ambient air quality monitoring for SOx, NOx, PM10, PM2.5, O3, Pb, NH3 & CO, Benzene, Benzo
Pyrene, As, Ni and HC should be carried out at intervals as per NAAQ standards and its
periodicity should be as per the guidelines of the respective SPCB.
iii) Exposure of working personnel in the operational area to various toxic gaseous emissions should
be as per the OISD-GDN-166 for occupational health monitoring.
iv) Fugitive emission of toxic gases like H2S should be minimized by taking appropriate design
measures for early detection, control and proper operational practices for which workers should be
trained wherever applicable.
v) During production testing produced gas should not be cold vented.
D. Noise:
i) Ambient noise levels should be maintained as per the MOEF notification no. 92, dated Feb.14,
2000 on the noise pollution (Regulation and Control) rules, 2000.
ii) Exposure of personnel to abnormal noise levels in the operational areas should be as per the
OISD-GDN-166 occupational health standards.
E. Waste:
The following are the types of the wastes.
 Drilling fluid and solids

 Cement returns
 Salt water
 Oil
 Formation cuttings (such as shale, lime, salt or dolomite)
 Empty containers, bags and oil filters.
Handling of waste in Onshore / Offshore Operations:
i) Water contacting the drill site from nature and well site activities should be diverted to the
designated segment of waste tank. This can be used for other activities with or without treatment.
ii) Drilling fluid system should be designed to minimize drilled solid degradation.
iii) Use of diesel base mud is prohibited. Only WBM should be used for on-shore/ offshore oil drilling
operations. In case of any problem due to geological formation for drilling, low toxicity OBM having
aromatic content< 1% should be used.
iv) The chemical additives used for the preparation of DF should have low toxicity i.e. 96 hr LC50 >
30,000 mg/l as per mysid toxicity or toxicity test conducted on locally available sensitive sea
species. The chemicals used (mainly organic constituents) should be biodegradable.
v) Barite used in preparation of DF shall not contain Hg> 1 mg/kg & Cd> 3mg/kg.
vi) Drilling wastewater including DC wash water should be collected in the disposal pit evaporated or
treated and should comply with the notified standards for on-shore disposal.
vii) In case, DC is associated with high oil content from hydrocarbon bearing formation, then disposal
of DC should not have oil content > 10 gm/kg.
viii) The solid control equipment should function efficiently so that more undesired solids and minimum
liquids are removed from the drilling fluids. This will result in less liquid waste and more solid
waste which can be handled easily.
ix) Use of drip pans beneath rig floor with flexible hoses draining to cellar pit can avoid dirty water
and mud dripping on the rig sub-structure and location.
x) Usage of automatic shut of nozzles on all hoses on rig floor and wash down racks should be
adhered to minimize wastage of water.
xi) Review the specifications of mud additives wherever necessary so as to ensure the use of only
environmentally sound products in drilling operations.
3.2.4 Decommissioning
Environmental aspects are the disposal of various chemicals and all types of wastes.
i) Removal or disposal of all material from drilling location such as chemical products, construction
material, pallets and other wastes is the joint responsibility of the operator, drilling contractor and
the service personnel. The operator has the final accountability for the condition of the
decommissioned site.
ii) All chemical drums or sacks should be properly labeled as to the contents including any safety or
transportation warning labels.
iii) Empty drums should be disposed of or returned to the vendor or sent to the companies that clean and
re-cycle the drums.
iv) Drill Cuttings (DC) separated from Water Base Mud (WBM) should be properly washed and unusable
drilling fluids (DF) such as WBM, Oil Base Mud (OBM), Synthetic Base Mud (SBM) should be
disposed off in a well-designed pit lined with impervious liner located off-site or on-site. The disposal
pit should be provided additionally with leachate collection system.
v) WBM/OBM /SBM used at offshore should be recycled to a maximum extent. Unusable portion of OBM
should not be discharged into sea and shall be brought to on-shore for treatment & disposal in an
impervious waste disposal pit.
vi) The waste pit after it is filled up shall be covered with impervious liner, over which, a thick layer of
native soil with proper top slope is provided.
vii) Drilling fluids should be transported and re-used at other locations wherever possible. Drilling fluids
should be disposed of by annular injection or natural/facilitated evaporation or burial or land spreading
or permitted discharge. The solids remaining after dewatering the pit need to be disposed of through
burial or trenching, land farming, land spreading, and offsite disposal at an approved facility.
3.2.5 Restoration
Environmental aspect is clearing/ cleaning of land for restoration.

Recommended Practice: Any soil contaminated by operations should be remedied as necessary. The type,
location and extent of contamination and remediation/ restoration should be documented and maintained in
the well records.
i) Ditches, dikes and containment walls should be leveled. Top- soil, whether stock piled at the site
or hauled to the location, should be spread as part of the final contouring. A productive top soil is
necessary for replanting.
ii) Reseeding and replanting of the location should be done with plants and grasses native to the
area.
iii) Upon completion of the location restoration, a program of soil sampling /visual inspection and
record keeping should be established.
iv) If a water supply well is used and abandoned it should be plugged in accordance with applicable
regulations.
v) In case of a dry well, proper abandonment practices should be followed and a record be
maintained.
3.3 Production and Processing Operations
The on-shore hydrocarbon production operations are carried out in diverse topographical conditions
like forestland, barren deserts and tea estates etc. Activities in the course of these operations
comprise mainly of
(i) Well commissioning and testing.

(ii) Handling facilities (flow pipelines, GGS & CTF): construction and operation
(iii) Well servicing & stimulation.
(iv) Work-over Operations.
(v) Enhanced Oil Recovery (EOR) systems including water injection, polymer flooding, in-situ
combustion etc.
(vi) Storage and dispatch of crude oil to refineries and other end users.
(vii) Compression of Natural Gas (for different utility service & supply to consumers).
(viii) Crude oil transportation
 Road
 Pipeline.
3.3.1 Well Commissioning & Testing
The following steps are involved in this operation
(i) Hermetical Testing

(ii) Installation of down hole equipment and tubular
(iii) Installation of surface testing facilities
(iv) Production testing of the well
Environmental Aspects
 Installation phase of the above operation [Steps (i) through (iii)] does not involve
significant environmental aspects except noise.
 Environmental aspects associated with production testing of the well [step (iv)] are as
under.
(A) Development wells
Development wells are tested by diverting the flow to permanent installations that have adequate
facilities for handling of well fluid. Testing of development wells therefore normally does not entail any
significant environmental aspect.
(B) Exploratory wells
Environmental hazards associated with production testing of exploratory wells are as under.
a) Discharge of well fluid.

b) Spillage & leakage of well fluid.
c) Flaring of gas.
d) Liquid carryover along with gas during flaring.
(i) Well should be tested at a rate not above the capacity of gas/oil separator.
(ii) Separator should be sized to handle at least twice the anticipated production of the well.
(iii) In case of prolonged testing (more than one month), mist-extractor should be provided in
the gas stream of the test facility.
(iv) The following should be adopted to mitigate the heat & light radiation from gas flare
a) Minimum size of the flare pit to be 20 m x 20 m
b) Flare pit to be enclosed by a min. 12 ft high wall
c) Multi point ground flaring
d) Quantity of gas flared to be limited to maximum 7.5 MMSCFD.
(As per Director General Mines & Safety requirement).
(v) Well fluid collected at the well-site test tank should not be discharged to surface bodies
and be transferred to existing installations for further processing.
(vi) Monitoring of heat and light radiation should be done at the beginning of flare as well as at
the time of changing the production rate and any impact on environment should be
observed and recorded.
(vii) Flare site should be inspected everyday
3.3.2 Construction & Operation
3.3.2.1 Flow Pipelines
Environmental Aspectsare Leakage and spillage ofhydrocarbons.
(i) Pipelines should pass through less inhabited area preferably with less vegetation.
(ii) Construction of the pipelines in sensitive areas should be in conformance with
prevailing law & norms.
3.3.2.2 Construction of GGS/CTF
(i) The site should be away from

(a) Water bodies.
(b) Monumental structure.
(c) Notified restricted areas.
(d) Human settlement/populated areas.
(e) Horticultural farm.
(f) With focus on aquatic & terrestrial eco-system.
(g) With focus on social environment study.
(ii) Air quality monitoring to be done.

(iii) Ground water & surface water monitoring to be done to generate base line data.
(iv) Dust suppression system, if required, to be provided.
(v) Noise monitoring particularly in areas near the restricted areas to be done.
(vi) Before initiating construction, all necessary statutory permits must be obtained.
(vii) Soil characteristic to be checked to determine the appropriate foundation design specifically for
storage tank area.
(viii) Proper drainage system to be planned. Separate drainage system for effluent water & storm water
to be planned & constructed.
(ix) X-raying of welds should be considered in critical areas where extreme pressure or corrosiveness
is anticipated or where there is a concern of potential risk to the local environment.
(x) If a fluid other than water is used for pressure test, the fluid should be collected & disposed of as
per the applicable laws.
(xi) A scheduled inspection to be done once in a week by a competent person to ensure compliance
of environment related norms.
3.3.2.3 Operation of GGS/CTF
(i) Discharge of hydrocarbons.

(ii) Spillage of hydrocarbons
(iii) Accidental release of hydrocarbons.
(iv) Flaring of gas.
(v) Generation of formation water.
(i) In case of leak, spillage or uncontrolled release of hydrocarbons, emergency response planning &
execution should be fully complied as per the EMP.
(ii) Produced water disposal and injection facilities should be planned, constructed & operated in a
scientific manner. For saline & corrosive produced water, special care is to be taken. This should
be done as per applicable CPCB/SPCB guidelines.
(iii) Produced water should be disposed only after required treatment & applicable laws as per
guidelines.
(iv) Monitoring of ground water & surface water should be done monthly. Ground water monitoring
tube wells at an angle of 1200 and not more than 100 m. away from the disposal well should be
provided.
(v) The parameters to be monitored should be specified before commissioning of the installation.
(vi) Solid waste disposal should be done in accordance with the Hazardous Waste (Management,
Handling and Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2008
3.3.3 Well Servicing and Stimulation
Well servicing includes deparaffination of tubulars by either mechanical scraping or chemical dozing,
well bore caving cleaning operation, measurement of well parameters in dynamic conditions,
swabbing and well enlivening operation. Well stimulation includes acidization, fracturing and water
shut-off treatment etc.
(i) Discharge of chemicals, reaction products, hydrocarbons and petroleum products.

(ii) Discharge of formation clay, minerals, sludge, waxes etc.
(iii) Uncontrolled release of high pressure nitrogen gas.
(i) Chemical storage containers must be of robust construction and material of construction
should be compatible with the chemical to be stored.
(ii) Storage of chemicals at well site should not be for more than two weeks period.
(iii) Provision should be made to keep adequate and ready-to-use stock of such chemicals that
may be required to nullify adverse effects caused by any accidental release of hazardous
chemical.
(iv) Properties of reaction products should be determined to ascertain the potential of their
hazardous impact, prior to execution of the job involving such chemical reaction.
(v) Necessary arrangements should be made before hand for collection and disposal of such
chemicals that may carry detrimental effect to the environment.
(vi) All piping should be tested hydraulically to 1.5 times their working pressure before they are
pressurized with nitrogen.
(vii) All solids generated during caving cleaning operation should be collected in a sump. Disposal
of hazardous substances should be done in accordance with the Hazardous Waste
(Management and Handling) Rules, 1989, Hazardous Waste (Management and Handling)
Amendment Rules, 2000, No.13, January 6, 2000 of MOEF and subsequent amendments
thereof.
(viii) All safety equipment to be periodically checked and tested as per norms and guidelines.
3.3.4 Workover Operations
Workover operations include recompletion, preparation for stimulation, well bore caving cleaning,
repair of casing, re-entry, fishing, isolation repair, downhole parameters measurement etc.
Same as those stated in Para 3.3.3 above
(Besides those stated in Para 3.3.3 above)

(i) Any well discharge must be contained and suitably disposed.
(ii) Workover fluid should not be discharged to surface bodies.
(iii) Well sites should be so prepared that accidental release of chemical, workover fluid,
petroleum, petroleum products etc. get accumulated and do not mix with storm water.
(iv) Prime movers of workover outfits should be energy efficient. Exhausts of the engines should
be monitored quarterly and result of such measurements recorded.
(v) Solids generated from workover operations should be made oil-free before disposal as per
stipulated norms and guidelines.
3.3.5 Enhanced Oil Recovery
Enhanced oil recovery includes water flooding, polymer flooding, surfactant flooding, steam flooding,
microbial recovery, in-situ combustion etc.
Environmental aspects
(i) Discharge of chemicals, hydrocarbons, petroleum products accidentally or otherwise.

(ii) Noise created by prime movers and other running machinery.
Same as those stated in Para 3.3.3 and 3.3.4 above.
3.3.6 Storage & Dispatch of Crude Oil to Refineries
Environmental Aspects are Leakage and spillage of crude oil.
(i) Spill Prevention Control & Counter Measure (SPCC) plan to be made.
(ii) Spill potential to be determined.
(iii) Contingency & shutdown plans to be made to cope up with disasters.
(iv) Spill control & containment should be considered at the design & construction stage itself as
per the applicable law.
(v) Adequate spill control & containment equipment to be kept in readiness.
(vi) Cleanup procedure should be developed & included in the emergency management plan.
(vii) Mock drill to be carried out.
(viii) Training especially for spill control to be imparted to operating personnel.
(ix) Prevention control, containment & cleanup procedures should be revised & updated to make
them more effective for future response.
3.3.7 Compression of Natural Gas
Environmental Aspect is noise
(i) Noise survey should be done in installations to obtain baseline information.

(ii) Noise control at source should be done as under
(a) Noise dampeners in the compressors to be provided.
(b) Compressors to be provided with better engineered noise control equipment.
(c) Proper & schedule maintenance of engines & other machines will reduce noise at source.
(iii) The noise barrier walls with double layer at an acoustic air gap of 0.5m will help reduction of
noise level at receiving end.
(iv) Work persons should be provided with user-friendly ear plug/muffs.
(v) The ambient noise level and work place noise level should meet the requirement of noise
level standards Noise Pollution (Control and Regulation) Rule, 2000, No.92, February 14,
2000, MOEF and subsequent amendments thereof, OISD-GDN-166 on Occupational Health
respectively.
4.0Waste Management in Oilfield Operations
The major activities in upstream petroleum industry concern to exploration using
Geological,Geophysical and Geochemicaltechniques, drilling of oil wells and production &
transportation of oil & gas while keeping the reservoir in good health. Many of the materials and
wastes associated with these activities have the potential to impact the environment.
Impacts of various oilfield operations on Environment
The potential impact depends primarily on the material, its concentration after release, and the
biotic community that is exposed. Some environmental risks may be significant, while others
are oflow significant risks.
5.0 Waste generated in various ONGC operations

Type of waste Equipment generating the Activity Guidelines
waste
5.1.1 Hazardous Solid Waste
Oily Sludge Bath Heater Periodic Pressure vessels are subjected

testing/cleaning to hydro testing every three
years. The generated waste is
to be stored in an appropriate pit
and should be transported after
treatment to landfill for final
disposal as per authorization
from SPCB/EC conditions
Separators Periodic -do-

testing/cleaning
Heater Treaters Periodic -do-

testing/cleaning
Storage Tanks Periodic Tank bottom sludge may be

testing/cleaning considered for selling to
authorized vendors.
Bioremediation/ Incineration
Spent Oil Engines, Pumps, Change of oil Should be recycled
Compressors etc
Waste Oil Crude oil or lube oil mixed Accidental Spill of Oil spill related incidents to be
with soil. oil reported to state pollution control
board. The oil mixed with soil is
to be Bio-remediated prior to its
disposal in secured landfill.
Transformer Oil Transformer Change of The generated transformer oil
transformer oil should be recycled.
Oily cotton waste Routine activity Cleaning of pipes To be sent to TSDF.

etc.
Lead acid Battery backup UPS,DG sets, Replacement of Used up batteries are to be
batteries Communication system used up batteries. returned to authorized vendors
Spent catalyst Catalyst controlled processes Replacement of Secured Landfill disposal/ To be

spent catalyst. sent to TSDF.
Oil filters Generators, dispatch pumps Replacement Cleaning and disposal to

etc during periodic secured landfill site/ To be sent
maintenance. to TSDF.
Electronic waste Electronic hardware and Outdated or Disposal as per approved

software discarded hard guideline of MoEF letter no 23-
and softwares 23/2007-HSMD dated
12.03.2008 to the govt.
approved Recycler/
Manufacturer.
Biomedical waste Medical centers Medical treatment Autoclaving/

and spent
equipment and Incineration as prescribed by
state pollution control board in
medicines
authorization.
Plastic waste Storage and supply of Unwrapping of To dispose of at approved landfill

equipment in plastic wraps, plastic packing area/ To be sent to TSDF.
day to day generation of material/equipment
plastic material at sites. Recycling options may also be
explored.
Drill cuttings Drill bit Drilling Operation Disposal in pits with impervious
linings and topped with local soil
at each drill site or at a central
place.
Unused mud Mud system Unused mud after Disposal in pits with impervious
linings and topped with local soil
drilling is over. at each drill site or at a central
place or to be used at some
other site.
Unused brine Drilling/ Workover operations Testing/ Workover Reuse
Municipal and Installations/establishment Housekeeping Disposal as per Municipal waste

housekeeping rules
waste
5.1.2 Gaseous Waste
Flue gases Bath Heater During Operation To be monitored by CPCB

approved Labs/ agencies.
Options to capture hydrocarbon
emission if commercially viable
should also be sought.
Hydrocarbon Heater Treater During Operation -Do-

gases
Flare stack -do- -Do-
DG sets -do- -Do-
Diesel fire water pump -do- -Do-
Fugitive Storage tanks During Operation -Do-

emissions
Flare stacks -do- -Do-
Valves and flanges -do- -Do-
Pneumatic controls of gas -do-

lines
Vehicular Vehicles running on diesel Transportation of Pollution under control

pollution and petrol, Helicopters man and material certification as prescribed by
state authority by each vehicle.
Periodic maintenance.
Noise and Moving equipment and Operation of Use of appropriate PPE. Periodic
vibrations motors equipment medical examination of exposed
personnel.
Dust/SPM Drill site preparation Drill site Suppress the dust by water
construction of sprinkling. Use of appropriate
other construction PPE like Respiratory protection
activities. equipment.
Air born dust of Drill site During loading of Use of appropriate PPE like
chemicals chemicals in Respiratory protection
process of mud equipment.
preparation
5.1.3 Liquid Waste
Water Effluent Heater Treater Phase separation Should be treated in ETPs in

of crude oil compliance to the parameters
and disposal procedures laid
down by state pollution control
board.
Storage Tanks Draining the -Do-

storage tank to
remove free water
Separators Drain of separator -Do-
Drilling activities During washing of Waste water should be collected

cuttings and other in pit and to be treated by using
general use. ETP prior to its reuse, recycle &
disposal. Pits to be provided with
impervious lining and should be
covered with native soil after
drilling activities are over.
Oil contaminated Brine from Used brine To be sent to production

WO operations installation through pumping or
be taken to ETP for treatment
and disposal.
Effluent from well stimulation Well stimulation To be collected and disposed of

operations services as per the nature of fluid/effluent.
5.1.4 Guidelines for handling Hazardous wastes
1. Each installation should have adequate provision of storage of hazardous waste generated
during the process.
2. Each installation should be member of land fill site and incinerator as required for seeking
authorization of state pollution control board.
3. Installation should store the dry oily waste generated from periodic cleaning of separator and
heater treaters in a manner so that this waste does not come in contact with liquid or
semisolid oily waste or waste oil.
4. Installation should store oily cotton waste and oil soaked discarded hand gloves.
5. Installation should collect air and oil filters and pack these separately for transportation to
approved TSDF.
6. In case of oil spill, the oil soaked soil may be treated with technologies like bioremediation to
reduce the oil content to render it fit for landfill.
7. To deal with the oil contaminated soil generated during accidental leakages etc, management
of the installation should try to harness the technology which may help in recovery of oil as
well as soil.
8. Chemical sludges generated in the ETPs during physico-chemical treatment should be
collected on sludge beds constructed for the purpose.
9. The dried sludge should be stored in shaded storage facility packed in the bags. The dried
sludge should be disposed of to landfill as per the time frame and quantity prescribed in
authorization from state pollution control board.
10. The discarded filter media generated during replacement of used up filter media should be
dried and sent to approved TSDF.
11. The following hazardous wastes should be recycled/ reused by subjecting these wastes to
approved vendors.
 Spent oil
 Transformer oil
 Lubricating oil from Turbines
 Tank bottom sludge
 Left over oil samples in laboratories
6.0 Waste Water treatment
Necessity of oily waste water treatment
As the oil production continues, its saturation slowly decreases and the water saturation increases which in
later stageproduced oil in the form of emulsion. The water associated with produced oil and gas needs to be
separated from oil & gas at surface before it is transported to refinery. The produced water is separated from
crude oil in heater treaters at production installation, where heating, chemical treatment & electrical methods
are applied. This water besides containing hydrocarbons in soluble, emulsified and free form, also usually is
high in suspended and dissolved solids. Hydrocarbons are considered among the most harmful pollutants for
various reasons such as:
- They are lethal to human, animal and plant on direct consumption.
- Some hydrocarbons especially polynuclear aromatic hydrocarbons (PAH) are potentially
carcinogenic.
- They pollute the water and form a layer on the water surface and prevent the oxygen from
dissolving which is vital for aquatic life.
- The oil contaminated aquatic food if consumed by human being lead to health hazards.
- Oil directly kills some more sensitive species and increases the predominance of less
susceptible species thereby creating an ecological imbalance.
- Hydrocarbons kill the soil micro-flora which are vital to keep the soil fertile thus reducing its
fertility value.
- The oily wastewater sometime contains high concentration of dissolved salts. Such waters
reduce soil fertility and make it unsuitable for agriculture.
- If brine finds its way into the water resources, it renders the receiving water unpotable.
- Long term exposure of the hydrocarbons may result into gradual changes in the ecosystem.
It is thus, obvious that the oil-field wastewaters cannot be let off as such in the environment.
6.1 Standards for Effluent disposal for Oil Drilling & Gas Extraction Industry (CPCB)
The following standards for liquid effluent as per GSR 176(E) of Environment Protection Act, 1986, amended
in 1991 are to be followed. These standards laid down for disposal of industrial effluents are given below.
These standards are reviewed from time to time incorporating the limits of disposal of additional compounds
and increasing or decreasing the limits of various compounds depending upon their impact indicated by the
new findings.
A. On-shore facilities (for marine disposal)
Parameters Concentration not to exceed
pH 5.5-9.0
Oil & grease 10 mg/l
Suspended solids 100 mg/l
BOD, 27°C for 3 days 30 mg/l
Note:
1. For on-shore discharge of effluents, in addition to the standards prescribed above, proper marine
outfall has to be provided to achieve the individual pollutant concentration level in sea water below
their toxicity limits as given below, within a distance of 50 meter from the discharge point, in order to
protect the marine aquatic life:
Parameter Toxicity limit, mg/l
Chromium, as Cr 0.1
Copper, as Cu 0.05
Cyanide, as CN 0.005
Fluoride, as F 1.5
Lead, as Pb 0.05
Mercury, as Hg 0.01
Nickel, as Ni 0.1
Zinc, as Zn 0.1
2. Oil and gas drilling and processing facilities, situated on land and away from saline water sink,
may opt either for disposal of treated water by onshore disposal or by re injection in abandoned well,
which is allowed only below a depth of 1000 m from the ground level. In case of reinjection in
abandoned well the effluent have to comply only with respect to suspended solids and oil & grease
content.
The permissible limits for re-injection below 1000 meters:
S. No Parameter Conc. Not to exceed
1 Suspended Solids 100 mg/lit.
2 Oil & Grease 10 mg/lit.
3. The permissible limits for on shore (surface) disposal:
On-shore discharge No.

S. No Parameter
standards (Not to exceed)
1 pH 5.5 -9.0
2 Temperature 40°C
3 Suspended solids 100 mg/l
4 Zinc 2 mg/l
5 BOD at 27°Cfor 3 days 30 mg/l
6 COD 100mg/l
7 Chlorides 600 mg/l
8 Sulphates 1000 mg/l
9 Total Dissolved Solids 2100 mg/
10 % Sodium 60 mg/l
11 Oil & grease 10 mg/l
12 Phenolics 1.2 mg/l
13 Cyanides 0.2 mg/l
14 Fluorides 1.5 mg/l
15 Sulphides 2.0 mg/l
16 Chromium (hexavalent) 0.1 mg/l
17 Chromium (Total) 1.0 mg/l
18 Copper 0.2 mg/l
19 Lead 0.1 mg/l
20 Mercury 0.01 mg/l
21 Nickel 3.0 mg/l
B. Off-shore facilities
For off-shore discharge of effluents upto 12 nautical miles, the oil content of the treated effluent
without dilution shall not exceed 40 mg/l for 95% of the observation and shall never exceed 100 mg/l.
However discharge of effluents beyond 12 nautical miles, the oil content of the effluent without
dilution shall not exceed 15 mg/l as per MARPOL convention 1973. Three 8 hourly grab samples are
required to be collected daily and the average value of oil and grease content of the three samples
should comply with these standards.
6.2 Disposal / Reuse of Oilfield Waste Water:
The upstream petroleum industry employs both surface and subsurface disposal options for produced waters
depending upon the surrounding environmental conditions of the concerned oilfield. When wastewater is
discharged into onshore freshwater locations, both the hydrocarbon and dissolved solids concentrations must
be low. Because of the high cost of removing dissolved solids, surface discharge of wastewater is generally
possible only if the initial dissolved solids concentration of the water is low. For surface discharge of
wastewater, the waters are treated to remove hydrocarbons and the rapid mixing and dilution of discharged
water makes their impact on the surrounding environment as negligible.
The most preferred discharge option practiced in upstream petroleum industry is subsurface disposal through
wells. The disposal wells either drilled fresh or old abandoned oil wells are converted into disposal wells.
Disposal wells must be completed in a formation that
 is permeable and porous
 has low pressure
 has large storage volume and
 is geologically isolated from any fresh water aquifers
Reuse of produced water for reservoir pressure maintenance by sub-surface water injection is one of the best
options to minimize the disposal costs. An important factor affecting the success of sub-surface injection of oil-
field wastewater is the quality of water being injected.
The water, therefore, should be treated and conditioned before injection. Water quality refers to overall
treatment, particularly filtration necessary to provide water that can be injected over an extended period of
time. Extent of treatment depends on the formation that will receive the water.
Quality Requirement for Sub-Surface Effluent Injection/Disposal:
Water quality for sub-surface injection or disposal is usually defined in terms of plugging tendency of water.
Despite numerous attempts to correlate water quality parameters with reservoir rock properties, it is not
possible to quantitatively predict the minimum water quality required for trouble free injection/disposal into the
given formation.
Monitoring of Sub-surface Effluent Injection/Disposal:
Regular quality monitoring of treated effluent is required for injection/disposal of large quantity of water into the
formation through identified wells. Periodically Tubing Head Pressure (THP) and Casing Head Pressure (CHP)
of each well are also monitored to ensure that disposal effluent is being arrested in the identified zone only.
7.0 Air Emission Management

Air Pollution
Definition: Air Pollution is defined as the presence in the outdoor atmosphere of one or more contaminants in
quantities and duration that can injure human, plant or animal or property (materials) or which unreasonably
interferes with the enjoyments of life or the conduct of business.
The five major types of pollutants of immediate concern to life on the earth are
 Particulate matter
 Carbon monoxide
 Oxides of sulphur
 Hydrocarbons
 Oxides of Nitrogen
Air Pollutants concerned to oilfield activities include:
1. Suspended Particulate Matter(SPM) & Respirable Suspended Particulate Matter (PM2.5)

(Sources are Combustion units such as Diesel Engines, Generators, Boilers, Incinerators, Flare
Stacks etc.)
2. Carbon Monoxide
3. Partly and Unburnt Hydrocarbon (emitted on burning of petroleum fuels)
4. NOx (Oxides of Nitrogen are formed at very high temperature by reaction of Oxygen and Nitrogen)
5. SOx (SO2 is formed during burning of fuel and is slowly oxidized)
6. Hydrogen Sulphide
These pollutants may be cause of concern if not controlled or catered properly
7.1 National ambient air quality standards, 2009
Pollutants Time- Concentration in ambient air Method of Measurement

weighted
Industrial, Residential, Sensitive Areas
average Rural & other Areas
SulphurDioxide (SO2) Annual 50 µg/m3 20 µg/m3 - Improved West and Geake
Average* Method
- Ultraviolet Fluorescence
24 hours** 80 µg/m3 80 µg/m3
Oxides of Annual 40 µg/m3 30 µg/m3 - Modified Jacob & Hochheiser
Nitrogen as Average* Modified
(NO2) (Na-Arsenite) Method
24 hours** 80 µg/m3 80 µg/m3 - Gas Phase
Chemiluminescence
Particulate Matter (Size Annual 60 µg/m3 60 µg/m3 - Gravimetric
less than 10µm) or PM10) Average* - TOEM
- Beta attenuation
24 hours** 100 µg/m3 100 µg/m3
Particulate Matter (Size Annual 40 µg/m3 40 µg/m3 - Gravimetric
less than 2.5µm) or PM2.5) Average* - TOEM
- Beta attenuation
24 hours** 60 µg/m3 60 µg/m3
Ozone (O3) 8 hours** 100 µg/m3 100 µg/m3 - UV photometric
- Chemiluminescence
- Chemical Method
Ozone (O3) 1 hours** 180 µg/m3 180 µg/m3
Lead (Pb) Annual 0.50 µg/m3 0.50 µg/m3 - ASS / ICP Method after
Average* sampling
using EPM 2000 or equivalent
Filter paper
24 hours** 1.0 µg/m3 1.0 µg/m3 - ED-XRF using Teflon filter
Carbon Monoxide (CO) 8 hours** 02 mg/m3 02 mg/m3 - Non Dispersive Infra Red
(NDIR)
1 hours** 04 mg/m3 04 mg/m3 Spectroscopy
Ammonia (NH3) Annual 100 µg/m3 100 µg/m3 - Non Dispersive Infra Red
Average* (NDIR)
24 hours** 400 µg/m3 400 µg/m3 Spectroscopy
Benzene (C6H6) Annual 05 µg/m3 05 µg/m3 - Gas chromatography based
Average* continous analyzer
- Adsorption and Desorption
followed by GC analysis
Benzo(a) Pyrene (BaP) – Annual 01 ng/m3 01 µg/m3 - Solvent extraction followed by
particulate phase only, Average* HPLC / GC analysis
Arsenic (As) Annual 06 ng/m3 06 ng/m3 - AAS / ICP method after
Average* sampling on EPM 2000 or
equivalent filter paper
Nickel (Ni) Annual 20 ng/m3 20 ng/m3 - AAS / ICP method after
Average* sampling on EPM 2000 or
equivalent filter paper
Annual Arithmetic mean of minimum 104 measurements in a year at a particular

* site taken twice a week 24 hourly at uniform interval.
24 hourly/8 hourly or 01 hourly monitored values, as applicable, shall be compiled

** with 98% of the time in a year. However, 2% of the time, they may exceed the limits
but not on two consecutive days of monitoring.
Air Monitoring:
Stack monitoring and ambient air monitoring of the installation is necessary as per the stipulated condition in
air consent.
Ambient Air Monitoring
 It shall be carried out at the prescribed frequency and by the agency internal or third party as
prescribed by state pollution control board.
 The return of the air monitoring shall be submitted to state pollution control board as per the defined
time scale.
 Ambient air quality monitoring should be carried out at the frequency rate and by agencies as
prescribed in air consent from state pollution control board
Stack Monitoring:
 Each stack meant to vent flue gases and as identified in air consent should have provision of
collection of flue gas sample.
 If the height of the sample port is more than the 1.8 meters, then the sampling platform should be
provided with adequate railing.
Flare stack
 Each flare stack should have knock out drum type facility to prevent carrying over of crude in the
stack.
 In case flaring of natural gas having hydrogen sulphide as in-situ combustion plants/installations,
provision of either stripping of hydrogen sulphide or perfect flaring ensuring conversion of hydrogen
sulphide to sulphur dioxide should be ensured.
 Cold Venting of gases shall never be resorted to and all the gaseous emissions are to be flared.
 All flaring shall be done by elevated flares except where there is any effect on crop production in
adjoining areas due to the flaring. In such cases, one may adopt ground flaring.
 In case of ground flare, to minimize the effects of flaring, the flare pit at Group Gathering
Station(GGS)/Oil Collecting Station(OCS) and Group Collection Station(GCS) shall be made of RCC
surrounded by a permanent wall (made of refractory brick) of minimum 5m height, to reduce the
radiation and glaring effects in the adjoining areas.
 A green belt of 100 m width may be developed around the flare after the refractory wall in case of
ground flaring.
 If the ground flaring with provision of green belt is not feasible, enclosed ground flare system shall be
adopted, and be designed with proper enclosure height, to meet the ground level concentration (GLC)
requirement.
 In case of elevated flaring, the minimum stack height shall be 30m. Height of the stack shall be such
that the max. GLC never exceeds the prescribed ambient air quality limit.
 Burning of effluent in the pits shall not be carried out at any stage.
Significance of air quality monitoring (AQM)
AQM is a programmed, long term assessment of pollutant levels at various locations within a defined area
Programme includes-
* Base Line Monitoring
* Periodic Record of Change in Air Quality
8.0Noise Pollution:
1.
Noise is an airborne pollutant responsible for behavioral changes, Health and Performance losses.
2.
Interference of noise with speech communication
3.
High noise levels at drill sites causes interference in communication
4.
At derrick floor, communication is must as team works
5. Derrick floor most vulnerable for accidents
Precautionary Steps
o Use protective kits like Ear Muffs/ Ear Plugs in high noise area
o Avoid long term exposure to high noise
o Keep equipment like rotary drum, rotary table, brake, tongs etc. well maintained.
o Mufflers/silencers to be kept in desirable working condition
o Appropriate maintenance of shale shaker
o Lubricate mud tank agitators
o Follow norms for working time in noisy areas
o Keep sufficient space between rest rooms and rigs
o Rotation of personnel
o Motivation and awareness for damaging effects of noise pollution
AMBIENT NOISE STANDARD
Permissible Exposure (continuous or intermittent)
Hours Per day, dB

8 90
6 92
4 95
3 97
2 100
1 102
½ 107
¼ 110
1/8 115
9.0 Environmental Aspects of Offshore Oilfield Operations and Marine Environment
Protection
Discharges from offshore oilfield operation, to the marine environment, present different environmental
concerns to those from onshore areas. There are three areas that cause environmental concerns
about offshore oil and gas operations:
 those occurring because of the physical presence of the facilities

 those occurring as a result of waste discharges from facilities
 and those occurring as a result of accidental discharges
Nature of offshore discharges:
1. Drilling waste
2. Produced water
3. Accidental oil discharges
4. Site abandonment
Potential impacts on the environment:
1. Potential impacts from drilling waste:

Major impacts to the marine environment from drilling waste generated by oil and gas operations
include
 Toxicity:
Following factors contribute for Toxic impacts:
o A minimum concentration
o A minimum exposure time and
o A recovery rate that is sufficiently slow for the effect to be detected
 Bioaccumulation and fish tainting
 Biochemical oxygen demand (BOD) and
 Persistence
2. Potential impacts from produced water
Major impacts to the marine environment from drilling waste generated by oil and gas operations
include
 Bioaccumulation and fish tainting

 BOD
 Persistence and
 Sedimentation of constituents
When waste water is discharged in offshore, the water is typically treated to remove only the
hydrocarbons. Although the dissolved solids (salt) concentrations of most produced waters are high
enough to be toxic to even marine life, the rapid mixing and dilution of the discharged water makes the
resulting environment impact negligible.
3. Potential impacts fromchemicals

 Production treating chemicals
 Gas processing chemicals
 Stimulation and workover chemicals and
 Drilling chemicals
4. Potential impacts from accidental discharges
Accidental discharges consist primarily of crude oil. The environmental impacts of crude oil are same
as the impacts from drilling fluids and produced water, viz.,
 Fouling
 tainting
 BOD and
 Persistence
Annexure-1
Environment Management/ Inspection Checklist
Flare System
S.N. Questionnaire Response of Plant Remarks

Head/ Safety
Officer
1. Is the installation maintaining “zero Yes / No
flaring” or there is a continuous flare?
2 Are the flare clear and no evidence of Yes / No

any oil carry over?
3 Is the Level Switch High high (LSHH) of Yes / No

the flare Knock Out Drum (KOD) in line?
4 Is the pilot gas line functional? Yes / No
5 Is the flare ignition system functional? Yes / No

When it was last tested?
Noise Monitoring and Control

Head/ Safety
Officer
1 Are proper notices posted in all high Yes / No
noise areas at all strategic location?
2 Are personnel working in the high noise Yes / No
areas using proper PPE (ear muffs, ear
plugs etc.)?
3 Is there regular supply of hearing Yes / No
protectors and are they issued to all
personnel working in high noise areas?
4 Has noise survey been carried out of all Yes / No
the areas? When was the last survey
carried out?
5 Have any engineering modifications Yes / No
been done or are planned to reduce high
noise identified in the surveys?
Chemicals and Lube / Hydraulic Oils Transfer

Head/ Safety Officer
1 Is the transfer area free from spillage Yes / No
and leakages?
2 Are all the barrels stored upright and Yes / No
secured properly?
3 Are the barrels segregated, properly Yes / No
identified and stored in appropriately
demarcated areas?
4 Are the MSDS of all the process chemicals Yes / No
handled available in
a- Chemistry Laboratory
b- Barrel handling area
c- Infirmary
d- At First Aid locations?
5 Is the eye / wash shower near the Yes / No
chemical area functional?
6 Are all the chemical transfer and Yes / No
chemical injection pumps leak free? Are
the pump skids also free of the
chemicals?
7 Are all the chemicals barrels sealed Yes / No
properly?
8 Is the system of disposal of empty Yes / No
barrels environment friendly?
9 Are the chemical tanks painted, Yes / No
maintained and appropriately tagged?
Are all the chemical lines color-coded
for easy identification?
10 Are appropriate PPE used for handling Yes / No
of the chemicals and instructions for
usage of the PPE posted in the
handling areas?
Chemistry Laboratory
S.N. Questionnaire Response Remarks

Of Plant Head/ Safety
Officer
1 Is the system of disposal of all used
chemicals and samples environment
friendly?
2 Are all the chemicals segregated and

stored with proper demarcation?
3 Are sitting & working places are

separate and well ventilated?
5 Are personnel using requisite PPEs/

Aprons while conducting experiments
Effluent/ waste Water Management
S.N. Questionnaire Response of Auditee Remark
1 Facility available for effluent/ waste water

treatment: ETP/ STP/ PWC
2 Whether all systems of plant working

properly?
3 Total quantity of effluents generated,

average m3/day
4 Frequency of testing of treated effluent

discharged outside
5 Quality of receiving water body – upstream

and downstream of discharge point :
(Provide analytical data)
6 Consent for effluent discharge valid

till………….
7 Application for renewal of consent submitted

on………….
8 Steps taken for correcting any non-

compliance of statutory stipulations as
pointed out by statutory authorities
9 Mode of disposal for effluents

10 Whether steps are taken for recycle/ reuse of
waste/ effluent water?
Ambient air quality/stack Monitoring
S.N. Questionnaire Response of Remark

Auditee
1 Is regular monitoring carried out (For HC, H2S etc)
2 If yes, give details (frequency, duration of sampling

and typical values)
3 Annual consumption of CFC / Halon, if used:
4 Total inventory of CFC / Halon in use and in stores:
5 Plans for replacement of CFC /Halons.
6 Emission monitoring and compliance status. Details

of emission monitoring and percent compliance of
statutory stipulations.
7 Height of stacks
8 Type of fuel and quantity consumed?
9 Is monitoring of stack emission carried out?
10 It parameters of emissions are under prescribed limit

of SPCB?
Hazardous waste Management
S.N. Questionnaire Response of Remark

Auditee
1 Is waste is categorized / segregated into various

categorizes?
2 Types of hazardous wastes being generated with

quantity per year
3 Are records of hazardous waste generation &

disposal maintained?
4 How various types of hazardous wastes are being

disposed of by the unit?
5 Is copy of manifest on prescribed form is sent to

SPCB at the time of disposal?
6 Whether periodical returns are filed with SPCB as

per Hazardous waste (Management and Handling)
Rules, 1989?
Battery Rooms

Of Plant Head/
Safety Officer
1 Are the battery rooms properly ventilated? Yes / No
2 Are the exhaust fans operational? Yes / No
3 Are the old batteries disposed of in an Yes / No
environmentally friendly manner?
4 Is the eye wash shower functional? Yes / No
5 Is the lighting adequate Yes / No
6 Are returns being filed under Batteries Yes / No
(Management & Handling ) Rules, 2001
Potable Water (if applicable)

Of Plant Head/
Safety Officer
1 Is the water maker functional and how Yes / No
much water is it producing per day. Is it
sufficient to cater to the needs of all the
personnel
2 When were the pot water tank last cleaned

and has it been done in the last one year?
3 Are the pot water filters cleaned Yes / No

periodically?
4 Is the pot water chlorinated regularly and Yes / No

are records maintained?
5 Is the pot water tested for salinity, pH, Yes / No

bacteria (e-coli) and is it of good quality?
OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH
Chapter -C
OCCUPATIONAL
HEALTH
MONITORING & CARE

OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH
Chapter -C
OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH MONITORING & CARE
1.0 Introduction
Occupational Health in ONGC is aimed at promoting and maintaining physical, mental and social well
being to the highest degree among its personnel by monitoring their health and the state of the
workplace so that a well placed worker contributes positively to the organization and to his family.
Occupational Health monitoring shall be applicable to Workers (Which include all regular employees of
the corporation, Deputationists, Tenure/ term based employees and Casual/ contingent workers) at all
installations and work centers.
1.1 Scope of activities Thisinclude
Personnel Surveillance – Periodic Medical Examination, Pre Employment Medical

Examination and Pre Placement Medical Examination.
Investigations will be carried out at authorized labs.
Workplace Surveillance – Monitoring of all workplaces for Hazards
Ergonomic Assessment of the Workplace
Sanitation Evaluation – including potability of Water
Legal Compliance to applicable laws
Educative Function – By imparting training in:
Occupational Health
Preventive Medicine
First Aid Training
1.2 Responsibility for the implementation of OH Services is laid on three major groups
supported by Top Management, they are:
 The employee
 Work Place Managers
 OH Care givers.
1.3 Responsibilities of the Employee
 Health is the responsibility of each employee.

 Before using any material – the employee must familiarize himself/herself with the substance
handled – Refer to MSDS or NIOSH POCKET BOOK OF CHEMICALS for particulars of each
substance you are to handle.
 Make sure to know the location of the eye bath and shower to be able to reach it blind folded.

OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH
 Undergoing Periodic Medical Examination is Mandatory for all ONGC Employees. It is also the
key to a healthy and illness free life – For Details of PME refer to PME POLICY Office Order
50/2007 (Pl note that the procedure is modified after introduction of OH module in SAP in 2010)
 Report HealthHazards to your superiors.
1.4 Responsibilities of Managers
 Keep a Health Record of all personnel:

- Those under Factories Act – Maintain Health Register (Annex VIII)– Refer to Factories
Act 1948.
- Those under Mines Act/OMR – Maintain a file of „O‟ form (Annex – VII) – Refer to
Mines Act.
- Those offshore, under P&G (Safety in Offshore Operations) Rules 2008.
 Ensure that First Aid Boxes are strategically placed and contain the required contents. Refer to
Contents of First Aid Boxes (Annex – I)
1.5 Responsibilities of Occupational Care Givers
 Carry out wall to wall walk through survey of each and every workplace – Refer to Section 3.0
 Be familiar with current TLVs – Refer to OISD-GDN-166, ONGC Occupational Health Manual,
OSHA‟s Website, OSHA Pocket Book of Chemicals and MSDS
 All PME activities are now linked with SAP.
 SAP authorisation is given to all regular ONGC Doctors, and select medical personnel.
 Step by step instructions are given in the Occupational Health-Process guide Vol I (Doctors
Activities) –Refer to Annexure VI of this volume
 Steps involved are:
- Issue Call letters to the individual through SAP.
- When he/she reports to the OH, get the PME format (Annexure XI) filled in by the
employee and assist if required.
- Issue SAP note for Investigations (listed in Annex III) to be done in an authorized Lab
(for selection of authorised lab pl. refer to Annexure V).
- Individual to report back with investigation reports or appointment given if reports are
sent directly from the lab to the OH Centre.
- Carry out Medical Examination in accordance with PME General Examination Protocol
(ref to Annexure IV).
- Enter all findings and Investigation reports in SAP.
- A summary sheet (page 9 of the PME format placed as Annexure XI) print out is to be
given to the installation head to file for inspection.
 Keep a schedule for Potability of Water and send samples to a recognized Lab in the area
following proper water collection Procedures – Refer to FACTORIES ACT.
 Issue Health alertswhen necessary
 Impart First Aid training at regular intervals so that 10 % of any shift are certified and trained
First Aiders.
Note: For details refer Occupational Health Manual

OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH
Doc.NO.1/1
04.03.2016
Control Page
HSE Management System
Document Review Status
Issue Review Status Date

1. Issue after release of document by CMD, 04.03.2012
ONGC on the occasion of National Safety
Day celebrations, 2012
2. Reviewed the HSEMS document and 04.03.2015
modified & updated according to the new
guidelines, standards, regulations,
technology and observations made by user
groups
3. Reviewed the HSEMS document and 04.03.2016
modified & updated according to the new
guidelines, standards, regulations,
technology and observations made by user
groups
4.
5.
Documented and controlled by
Chief HSE,
Corporate Health, Safety and Environment
8th Floor, SCOPE Minar, South Tower,
Laxminagar, New Delhi - 110092
Phone: 22406020 & Fax : 22406681

OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH

OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH

Hsems PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Hsems PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Hsems PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HSE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Doc. No. ONGC/CHSE/1/1/HSEMS March 2016 Page 1 of 289

Doc. No. ONGC/CHSE/1/1/HSEMS March 2016 Page 3 of 289

Doc. No. ONGC/CHSE/1/1/HSEMS March 2016 Page 4 of 289

Doc. No. ONGC/CHSE/1/1/HSEMS March 2016 Page 5 of 289

Doc. No. ONGC/CHSE/1/1/HSEMS March 2016 Page 6 of 289

Doc. No. ONGC/CHSE/1/1/HSEMS March 2016 Page 7 of 289

Doc. No. ONGC/CHSE/1/1/HSEMS March 2016 Page 8 of 289

Doc. No. ONGC/CHSE/1/1/HSEMS March 2016 Page 9 of 289

Doc. No. ONGC/CHSE/1/1/HSEMS March 2016 Page 10 of 289

Doc. No. ONGC/CHSE/1/1/HSEMS March 2016 Page 11 of 289

Doc. No. ONGC/CHSE/1/1/HSEMS March 2016 Page 12 of 289

Doc. No. ONGC/CHSE/HSEMS March 2016 Page 14 of 289

1. Purpose of HSE Management SystemDocument

2. Objective of HSE Management System Document

3. Vision & Mission

5. Distribution and Use

Doc. No. ONGC/CHSE/HSEMS March 2016 Page 16 of 289

10.0HSE Management Programme Elements and Principles

10.1 The following are the 14 Elements:

Doc. No. ONGC/CHSE/HSEMS March 2016 Page 17 of 289

Doc. No. ONGC/CHSE/HSEMS March 2016 Page 18 of 289

Doc. No. ONGC/CHSE/HSEMS March 2016 Page 19 of 289

Roles & Responsibilities of Line Managers & other Support services

Sl. Roles & responsibility Frequency

Doc. No. ONGC/CHSE/HSEMS March 2016 Page 20 of 289

7 HSE tour (Loss control tour) of facilities/ sites 4 per/yr

Sl. Activity Frequency

Doc. No. ONGC/CHSE/HSEMS March 2016 Page 21 of 289

13 Ensure QHSE management system is implemented against a defined plan Ongoing

Doc. No. ONGC/CHSE/HSEMS March 2016 Page 22 of 289

Surface Area Manager / Location Manager / Plant Operation Area Manager

Sl. Activity Frequency

Doc. No. ONGC/CHSE/HSEMS March 2016 Page 23 of 289

Sl. Activity Frequency

Doc. No. ONGC/CHSE/HSEMS March 2016 Page 25 of 289

25 Ensure maintenance and inspections records are maintained Ongoing

Doc. No. ONGC/CHSE/HSEMS March 2016 Page 26 of 289

16 Ensure annual review of the management manual Once per/yr

Project Managers (Engineering Services)

Sl. Activity Frequency

Doc. No. ONGC/CHSE/HSEMS March 2016 Page 27 of 289

Doc. No. ONGC/CHSE/HSEMS March 2016 Page 28 of 289

I/c HR-ER at Asset / Basin / Plant

Sl. Activity Frequency

Sl. Activity Frequency

Roles & Responsibilities of HSE Group

4. Monitoring of compliance of all Legal & other requirements related to HSE

Head Offshore Safety

Doc. No. ONGC/CHSE/HSEMS March 2016 Page 30 of 289

I/C Sectoral HSE-Onshore

Head HSE - Asset / Basin / Plant

I/C HSE - Drilling Services / Well Services/ Surface

HSE officer of Installation / Platform / Rig

HSE officer Logging Services

Doc. No. ONGC/CHSE/HSEMS March 2016 Page 32 of 289

I/C HSE - Engineering Services

I/c HSE Institutes

I/C HSE - Central Workshop